Home

Results - Hayeshelp.com

Contents

1. Horiz Dist is the horizontal distance from the reference point to the new point Vert Dist is the vertical distance from the reference point to the new point Store point When this is checked the computed point will be stored with the name specified here Solve will compute the location for the new point and access the next screen R 324 Enli Define a Location Ref Point 1 Description START From Gun to Location Angle Right 99 04 33 Horz Dist 88 224 Wert Dist 0 256 FE to Rod 89 50 01 Stakeout Menu Define a Location Screen Two The second Define a Location screen displays the direction and distance information from the occupy point to the new point Ref Point is the reference point specified in the From Point field in the previous screen Description is the description for the reference point From Gun to Location displays the angle and distance information from the total station to the new point Users would aim their non robotic total station the direction specified here Circle Zero is used to modify the circle on the total station so that the angle right reading will be zero when it is facing toward the design point which can sometimes be easier than turning to an obscure angle value When this button is tapped the following actions will occur 1 Anew backsight circle value is computed sent to the instrument and stored in the raw data 2 The A
2. Degree Chord defines the Leai poot M radius degree arc or degree chord of the curve Begin Station 0 00 0 Fe respectively Turn Left Right Dir W TS to SC O CS to ST Length is the length of the spiral curve Begin Station is the station associated with the Start Point Turn defines if the curve turns toward the Left or Right Close Settings from the point of view of the Start Point Spiral defines the direction of the spiral curve by the following options e TS to SC the spiral begins at the tangent Tangent to Spiral and ends at the circular curve Spiral to Curve e CS to ST the spiral begins at the circular curve Curve to Spiral and ends at the tangent Spiral to Tangent R 306 Stakeout Menu Stake Spiral and Offset Screen Two Station to Stake is the desired station on the spiral Stake Spiral And Offset curve that you want to stake station 00 0 i Station Interval is the value that is added to the Station Station Interval to Stake after the Next Sta button is pressed Offset O R kot bw Next Sta advances the Station to Stake by the Station bok M Interval Offset is the horizontal distance of the offset from the Height of Rod spiral curve The offset occurs on the left while viewing OCC 53 HI 5 000 BS so oo oo the spiral from the Start Point when the L is selected or on the right when amp R is selected Note An offset of zero would
3. Delta is the deflection angle Length is the arc length Chora is the chord length e Tangent is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI Mid Ordinate is the distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curve s length External The minimum distance between the PI and the curve Solve Computes the details for the horizontal curve Layout Accesses the Horizontal Curve Layout screen Page R 375 where points can be created so the curve can be staked in the field Traverse Accesses the Traverse on Curve screen Page R 382 R 370 Curve Menu Results Radius is the distance from the radius point to the curve Length is the arc length Chord is the chord length Deg Arc is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft arc length Deg Chord is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft chord length Delta is the deflection angle Tangent is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI Deflection Angle Delta External is the minimum distance between the PI and the curve Mid Ord is the distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curve s length External not shown The minimum distance between the PI and the curve R ie y Segment is the area between the arc Sector d i i length and the chord aS Segment N Delta Sector is the area between the arc lt ff length and the two edge radi
4. Stream ee aa a aE Job Menu Note If a boundary is defined only polylines that fall within the boundary can be added New opens the New Polyline screen which is identical to the Edit Polyline screen and is used to create a new polyline Edit Polyline View DTM Breaklines Edit or View DTM Breaklines New The Edit Polyline screen is used to perform some preliminary editing to a polyline prior to accessing the polyline editor with the key Tap Points allows you to tap points to define a new polyline Ifa polyline was already selected prior to accessing this screen it will be replaced by the polyline being created To From allows you to define a range of points that define a polyline If a polyline was already selected prior to accessing this screen it will be replaced by the polyline being created 17 615 619 620 621 622 605 606 607 603 609 610 599 594 595 596 597 598 Edit accesses the Polyline Editor described on Page 581 582 589 584 565 586 R 62 where the polyline can be further edited Clear will permanently remove the selected polyline from the job Properties opens the New Line dialog box where the description layer and feature attributes can be modified ee opens the Map Display Options screen Page R 437 to select what is displayed on the screen R 81 Survey Pro Reference Manual Points on DTM Layer The Points on DT
5. 2007 Tripod Data Systems Inc All Rights Reserved TRIPOD DATA SYSTEMS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT IMPORTANT BY OPENING THE SEALED MEDIA PACKAGE YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE LICENSE AGREEMENT AND LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY Agreement THIS AGREEMENT CONSTITUTES THE COMPLETE AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND TRIPOD DATA SYSTEMS INC Licensor CAREFULLY READ THE AGREEMENT AND IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS RETURN THE UNOPENED MEDIA PACKAGE AND THE ACCOMPANYING ITEMS including written materials and binders or other containers TO THE PLACE WHERE YOU OBTAINED THEM FOR A FULL REFUND LICENSE LICENSOR grants to you a limited non exclusive license to i install and operate the copy of the computer program contained in this package Program on a single computer one central processing unit and associated monitor and keyboard and ii make one archival copy of the Program for use with the same computer LICENSOR retains all rights to the Program not expressly granted in this Agreement OWNERSHIP OF PROGRAMS AND COPIES This license is not a sale of the original Program or any copies LICENSOR retains the ownership of the Program and all subsequent copies of the Program made by you regardless of the form in which the copies may exist The Program and accompanying manuals Documentation are copyrighted works of authorship and contain valuable trade secrets and confidential information proprietary to LICENSOR Y
6. Pts Sateka i Save Point Once the final shot is completed the Save Point dialog box will open showing the computed coordinates for the Survey Pro will now save and set Eni Save Point ewan PT 7 N 4 899 997 E 4 999 999 Description is the desired description for the point that Sa will be stored Description stores the new point and automatically sets the point Ptal as the current occupy point ia ce roretanccae Cancel exits the dialog without storing a new point R 148 Survey Menu Results Resection OC N is the computed northing of the Occupy Point OC E is the computed easting of the Occupy Point OC Z is the computed elevation of the Occupy Point Residuals dRMS is the average distance residual from all shots performed aRMS is the average horizontal angle residual from all shots performed FS is the foresight name dHD is the distance difference of the measured shot and the computed shot d H orizontal D elta dHA is the angle difference of the measured shot and the computed shot d H orizontal A ngle R 149 Survey Pro Reference Manual Remote Elevation The Remote Elevation screen will compute the elevation for the occupy point by shooting a foresight with a known elevation or it will compute the elevation for a foresight when the occupy elevation is known Known Elevation Is is where you specify if the Occupy point or the Foresight point has a known elevation
7. Shoot Shoot BS is used to shoot the current point If the shot was already performed the button will be enabled Tapping Shoot again will throw out the results of the last shot and re shoot it Next gt is used to take the next required shot in the routine The button label will contain additional information to help indicate which shot is required next R 128 Survey Menu Distance Offset The Distance Offset screen is used to store a new point that is a known distance away from the rod location This screen is useful when the rod cannot occupy the new point s location m Foresight is the point name that will be stored fia Distance Offset eo PESE Desc is the description for the offset shot that is stored a roes ae Desc HR 5 18 if E e HR is the length of the rod Left Right direction From GUN to ROD f opens the Smart Target options Page R 444 ort lt Offset is the offset distance that is to the left when L is selected or right when R is selected of the prism HD Offset oot _ from the total station s point of view Elevation Offset ort l i Horz Dist Offset is the offset distance that is beyond the prism positive value or in front of the prism OCC 1 HI 5 20 BS 42 359 59 55 negative value from the total station s point of view fant E rests me Elevation Offset is the offset distance that is below the Q Ar ial v
8. 2 Immediately record the horizontal angle from the total station using the button 3 When the target becomes properly aligned with the crosshairs record the current time as accurately as possible The time can be automatically read from the data collector using the Get Local Time button or measured from an external time piece and manually entered in the appropriate fields R 155 Survey Pro Reference Manual 4 When finished tap amp to complete the current observation When all observations are complete the Results page displays the computed azimuth to the backsight Results BS D R is the horizontal angle recorded to the backsight for the particular direct reverse observation Azi D R is the computed azimuth to the backsight for the particular direct reverse observation Avg is the computed average azimuth of the backsight relative to true north Grid Avg is the computed average azimuth of the backsight relative to the local State Plane grid This field is only displayed when a state erid correction is applied Note See the User s Manual for more information on the usage of the Solar Observation routine R 156 Survey Menu Remote Control Remote control mode is a special mode that makes it easier for users to control fully robotic total stations from a remote data collector Note The remote control functions are available only after a supported robotic total station is selected and enabled i
9. Page R 204 where you can pick a reference stereographic map projection zone or a solved localization site from the coordinate system data base file csd Reset Projection initializes a new localization reference stereographic map projection with the input parameters Note To simply assign a geoid to use with the TDS Localization coordinate system which will be set up automatically with your first base leave all fields of this screen empty and tap Reset Projection The geoid setting will be applied to the coordinate system setup automatically with your first base setup Select Coordinate System Reset Origin Pick from Database The Select Coordinate System screen is used to pick a Ground TDS Localization mode default zone or solved TE localization site from the database file Use Zone 7 Select Database O Use Site This screen is described in detail in the Mapping Plane mode projection section on Page R 215 The difference Region TDS Localization ZoneGrour when in Ground TDS Localization mode is that you can only select records from the TDS Localization Region Zone TDS_GR1951_1107165143 collection la n Select Coordina ie ane 7 22 Use Geoid EGM96 Global Delete Zone R 204 Survey Menu GPS Module Select Database Reset Origin Pick from Database Select Database The Select Database screen is used to select the coordinate system database to use This
10. Remote Control R 113 Survey Pro Reference Manual Backsight Setup The Backsight Setup screen allows you to define your backsight prior to performing data collection or stakeout The screen is also accessible from any screen that requires a backsight Note all the information in the Backsight Setup screen is saved and will automatically be recalled if the job is reopened at a later time but the screen must still be re solved before you can begin surveying Occupy Point is the name of the point from the current Ea packsight Setup gt d 12 31 l l Occupy Point Ee iel HI is the height that the total station is above the a pom fe m F sre AE A job that the total station is occupying ground HR is the distance that the backsight prism is above the ground opens the Smart Target options Page R 444 Bees E o 00 00 gt BS Point gt BS Direction is the point or direction of the backsight where the total station is aiming Current BS Direction Fixed Backsight should be checked when a separate prism is set up over the backsight The rod height input Esme CS entered here is then used independently of the foresight Oo 2 Al rod height when checking the backsight by distance and when shooting the backsight during repetition shots Backsight Circle displays the backsight circle value which is set using the button described below Note The backsight circle angle is subtrac
11. 0 579536 0 545394 0 515059 0 489913 0 454007 0 659355 0 640579 0 612687 0 624118 0 606925 0 744520 0 726396 0 637773 0 618195 0 721371 0 705577 0 687103 Utah Virginia Washington West Virginia Wisconsin Index 2 PCS testoa R 264 procedure 00cc eee 205 2D 3D points ynna 47 SID VEW nasunie R 83 3D view settings R 84 A about Survey Pro R 33 add edit break lines114 R 80 adjust with projection299 R 231 projection calculator 303 prompt adjust 302 results nsicnceicscastoiecvasser 303 select coordinate system301 select points 06 300 adjustment 066 R 266 angle 180 182 R 429 compass rulel81 183 R 430 rotate 179 R 426 scale wo cece 176 R 424 translate 177 R 425 alignment properties R 402 alignments 6 50 R 65 angle adjustment180 182 R 429 angle format 006068 10 architectural units conversion PASIE AAF P EEA antes R 368 archive job ccc eeeee wees R 26 PSC LE Alonen che tienen 35 AULTIDULES 6 ccc nti ce eens R 59 auto collect 08 R 132 auto linework R 73 azimuth format 10 B backsight check R 115 R 117 circle 62 R 114 R 119 backsight setup R 114 backup Job oaeee R 26 base receiver session R 198 base setup 0008 R 200 Oa E E ate
12. 1 ft of the design horizontal tolerance from the design from the design point point specified in the point stakeout settings GPS Status displays the current solution type the number of satellites used and the horizontal and vertical precision computed by the receiver When this area of the screen is tapped the epoch count stops and the GPS Status screen opens Page R 168 Go SOUTH NORTH displays the distance the rover must move in a south or north direction to reach the design point Go EAST WEST displays the distance the rover must move in an east or west direction to reach the design point R 331 Survey Pro Reference Manual Note The Display Directions As field in the Stakeout Settings screen configures the format for the text that directs you to the design point CUT FILL displays the required cut or fill between the current elevation and the design point Ref 0 00 00 opens a screen where you can select a reference azimuth or point which will then be displayed on the navigation graphic as a blue line to assist in orienting yourself When Auto Snap to Reference When Close is checked in this screen and when using the navigation method the navigation method will automatically switch to the method when you are within 3 meters of the design point Checking this box while in using the navigation method has no effect gt ROVING switches from ROVING to OCCUPYING mode When ROVING the
13. 55 0P1 FP72 ARD 0000 ZE90 0000 4l Prev j peel rev jum kmark h 1 kmark 0P1 FP73 4830 0000 7 90 0000 jumps to bookmark above the active bookma Next jumps to the bookmark below the active bookmark Clear All clears all bookmarks Time appends the current date and time in the form of a note to the end of the raw data file Note opens the Raw Data Note screen where any note up to 127 characters can be appended to the raw data file R 77 Survey Pro Reference Manual Raw Data Note Enter any note to append to the raw data file You can En Raw Data Note use the buttons to insert common linework commands Enter a Note of Up yay to 127 Characters When finished tap to append the note to the end of the raw data file View DTM Before viewing a DTM the Setup DTM 3D screen will open where the DTM layers must be defined This screen is also used to define other parameters for the DTM Layers opens the Layers for Staking DTM screen Es Setup DTM 3D where the DTM layers are selected See OTM O Auxiliary Topo Boundary opens the Choose Polyline screen where a polyline can be selected that defines the boundary of the DTM Boundary E Exclude points or breaklines outside of Exclude points will move any points that exist the boundary tom DTM Layer outside the selected boundary to the Auxiliary layer Ifa point is later stored outside the boundary they will
14. Hard Reset Receiver resets the receiver Hard Reset Receiver File Management The File Management routine is used to manage post processing files on the GPS receiver The routine can delete post processing files from the receiver or recover files that were recently deleted The files can also be copied or moved from the receiver to the data collector for more convenient transfers to a PC The routine is identical in the GPS module and is covered on Page R 239 R 253 Leveling Menu The Leveling Menu replaces the Survey Menu when running in leveling mode It contains routines to perform a level loop or 2 peg test A Select Create Loop B Level C 2 Peg Test D Remote Control R 255 Survey Pro Reference Manual Select Create Loop The Select Create Loop screen is used to select a loop that has not yet been closed view the notes for any existing loop or create a new level loop Select an Existing Loop allows you to select an existing loop from the dropdown list Closed Loop Description Activate Selected Loop opens the selected loop so new Control Benchmark Point s Benchmark Points data can be added to it This button will not be available we De ee when a closed loop is selected Level Sideshot Point s View Level Notes for Selected Loop displays the notes for the selected loop in the Level Notes screen described below New Loop gt opens the New Level
15. Internet Single Base NTRIP RTK should be selected when using a cellular phone as a data modem for connecting to the Internet to receive Single Base NTIP corrections e Dial Up Connection is where you select any existing dial up connections that have been added from the Connections routine R 109 Survey Pro Reference Manual e Manage Connections is a shortcut to the Windows Start gt Settings gt Connections gt Connections screen where you can add manage modem cell phone connections Tapping the button from that screen will open the help for it For more information on adding a modem connection see Using a Cellular Phone in the Basic GPS Module section of the User s manual e IP Address of Base is the IP address of the base as provided by the Internet service e Port Socket of Base is the socket number of the base as provided by the Internet service Change Radio Settings Screen The Change Radio Settings screen is used to view the current base radio settings and change the channel sensitivity Channel displays the last radio channel when applicable j PacCrest PDL gt g s 10 22 pees ais ee Current Configuration Sensitivity displays the last radio sensitivity when chaancle applicable Sensitivity Medium Baud displays the baud rate the receiver will use to Seta AON communicate with the modem Configure Channel 0 464 5500 Sensitivity Medium Y Parity d
16. M Center Line offset points will be stored at locations on the centerline when checked M Edge of Pavement offset points will be stored at the end of the first segment the edge of the roadbed on the left and or right side when checked M Curb offset point will be stored at the end of the second segment the end of the curb or ditch on the left and or right side when checked Unselect All quickly unchecks all the checkboxes lt Back returns to the previous screen Store stores all the offset points based on the information provided R 314 Stakeout Menu Stake DTM The Stake DTM routine allows you to stake an area and get cut fill information between the point being staked and a reference DTM surface at the same horizontal coordinates You can also obtain volume information between the surface being staked and a specified reference elevation or the reference DTM surface The reference DTM surface can be defined by a layer in the current job or a file loaded on the data collector Either a DXF file containing a triangulated irregular network TIN or a digital terrain model DTM file can be used Consult the User s manual for more information Note The speed performance of the Stake DTM routine is enhanced when using a DTM file as opposed to a DXF file Se DTM Source is where you select your reference DTM emg toke DIM ne surface If using a layer toggle the button to gt and then select the
17. Once you are satisfied with the stake location this button will take a final shot before proceeding to the next Stake Point screen Screen Three described above R 273 Survey Pro Reference Manual Remote Staking Stake Points Performing stake out in remote mode is different from running in a non remote mode because the feedback is continuous and provided in the rod s point of view instead of the total station s point of view When staking in remote mode the first four shots taken in a row where no distance is returned will result in a beep to warn that the instrument has possibly lost track of the prism There are three different graphic displays of the Remote Staking screen depending on how close the rod is to the stake point Each screen is shown here Done When you are satisfied with the location of the prism this button will open the Stake Point screen see Page R 270 where the staked point can be stored ian Remote Staking Status Locked FORWARD 3 859 Go RIGHT 0 064 CUT 0 017 EDM Mode O 1 IR Tracking We Pe fF Feet WA Design Location El current Rod Location Direction to Gun Ob 2 Display when prism is within 3 meters from the target R 274 IR Tracking w WA Design Location El Current Rod Location ff Direction to Gun ob 2 Display when prism is more than 3 meters from the target E 20 Feet 1 00 Feet IR Tracking w WA Design Location El Cur
18. Spiral Layout The Spiral Layout screen is used to compute station locations on a spiral curve Radius is the radius of the circular curve EJ spiral Layout Spiral Length is the length along the spiral curve from paris hoort IW TS to SC Spiral Length hoort TS station is the station at the TS point ee Gao M Interval When checked is the spiral arc distance Interval io0 0f I that is added or subtracted from the Current Station using current Sta boo i the and buttons Current Station is the station on the curve that is computed Solve solves and displays the details for the specified spiral curve Sta decreases the Current Station by the specified Interval Sta increases the Current Station by the specified Interval Layout computes the location of the Current Station lt x gt lt X of Throw gt Tangent V Spiral Curve Delta TS Tangent to Spiral Spiral PI i Y of ee ee SC Spiral to Curve Circular Curve R 390 Curve Menu Results Station is the current station Deflection is the horizontal angle to the current station as if occupying the TS and backsighting the Spiral PI Long crd is the chord length from the TS to the current station Short crd is the chord length from the previous station to the current station Traverse on Spiral The Traverse on Spiral screen is used to compute the location of and
19. Start Recording Or Control Points Post Process Or The Receiver Session screen is used to enter the station information and antenna height for a post processing data collection session ine Static Receiver Sessi 47 x T Recording Elapse 0 15 Sw O06 HDOP 1 80 Store pt in Receiver file only Site ID 202 4 Description ok nail Session Duration Log Until Stop e min l Antenna set eile G i E n to Bottom of mount Starting a Static Session During timed stop and go session R 197 Survey Pro Reference Manual Store point in is used to select how to store this session You will always get a session recorded in the post processing log file Select Receiver and job file to store a point record in the Survey Pro JOB file as well By default post processing points will go on the layer selected on the Job Settings Post Process screen Note If you are using this screen with the RTK rover you can only store points in the post processing log file from this screen Use the RTK Data Collection screen to store points in Survey Pro simultaneously with points logged to the post processing file Point or Site ID is where you enter the station name for the static session or stop and go point Note If you are storing this point in Survey Pro the screen will look like the picture above and you can pick points using the Survey Pro compound point control If
20. Table of Contents Reference VW EI CON aia asd cases cea a wataded geacunadawaedsaddduanweceseaweawatadsecuadstacesseucsecees 1 Man M CP sisi cocesceceas secede aaa a aaa aE aai 3 Fie Men en aa a aaa a aa aaa aani 7 Jpn NON arrar E 8 New VOID anina a La ets ahaa 9 SWO AS oa ina cassaaicastenastas dantaenaniunsiacaiasaisastaastas caatavansiaattarinatiaasiiante 15 Nag ole quameerenmecernte terete tents ce teter re stint ter reer re ener en et 16 EXPO GME Rar eee ner ree een ge erence mere eer tener eer eae eee 22 MPO CONT Ol POMS uione 26 Backup R StOre J OD ccccecssscssssesssseessseeessseenessnenesneneaes 26 Tan E sisi tns cacatestaread cede a ease 31 Register Modules sca fainavusienshessicnsivanahivanadnavspenaiaetatanivetenstiverwinnss 32 A DOUES Pr Oese 33 E EA E AEE AA O E A EE A E A E EE 33 TOD M GNU a aa aaa aA 35 SELLING c EE EE EEE E 36 EQIP ONUS sranie ai a a 56 EGICRONINE crer 61 EQICANGAMEA S aaa a NA nN 65 AUO IEW OF K arsaa 73 View Raw Data Fil Qa scdsvernsiassisncrdiavahasavetetcvwurviaictviveciatinenecs T1 VIW DI Mieorar naa sbeateia acti aneraieaianaananevatviatsuies 78 Manage Layer S isrener a A 85 TOD IMIONA ON ssecascticsdentoidoneiauta ssh electentaeelaivetactosteniceneunastadetie 86 COI CULALOF soeone nna A A 87 Job Menu GPS eases ices sens et tases cece anceeecsticasadekneantbeaetecetnehaus HLTA cadet eatc ingens taaies ad mieaaiaianenananinaraiain oandiata ant naa auaaaness 90 Job Menu Basic GPS
21. US Survey Feet i f Coordinat Units are the units that the distances in the file were Plane 5 Geodetic DMS stored in O Geodetic Decimal Coordinates is used to specify if the coordinates are _ Skip the first row plane coordinates geodetic coordinates in degrees minutes seconds format or geodetic coordinates in decimal format R 18 File Menu M Skip the first row should be checked if the first line in the ASCII file contains non coordinate information such as a heading Next gt opens the second screen Import TXT Coordinates Screen Two gt Name Column No gt Start Point Name When the first option is selected here the column number used for the name field in the TXT file is specified here When the second option is selected it is assumed that the TXT file does not contain point names and will assign the first point the name specified here and increment to the next available point name for the remaining points Columns is where the column number for each specified EW Ascii Import Wizard 0 x 9 56 coordinate exists in the source TXT file The coordinates types displayed here can either be for plane coordinates or geodetic coordinates depending on the Northing selections made in the previous screen If a coordinate has a checkbox which is unchecked it is assumed that the source TXT file does not contain columns for that type of coordinate Easting Elev
22. e Database Site will display controls to pick a localized site record from either the Site zone group or the TDS Localization ZoneGroup group e Current Projection will disable the edit boxes and display the current projection details The job file coordinate system record will be used Adjust with Projection Select Destination Coordinate System The Adjust with Projection Select Destination Coordinate System screen is used to select the coordinate system to transform the job file points into The interface is identical to the Select Source Coordinate System screen described above This screen only shows when the adjustment mode is set to Adjust From Source to Destination Adjust with Projection Prompt Adjust The Adjust with Projection Prompt Adjust screen is used to describe the difference between the source and destination record and to prompt you whether or not you wish to adjust the job with the change of projection This screen only shows when the wizard is opened because of a change of projection record R 233 Survey Pro Reference Manual Tr I 4 Adjust With Projectio 7 x C Lali y AT Adjust With Projectio ix C3 Adjust job with new projection Adjust job with new projection Adiust Horizontal and Vertical Adjust Horizontal and VYertical Adjust all points The plane NEE location of points with geodetic locations will be Updated O Adjust only points with geo
23. lt Back returns to the previous screen Next gt accesses the next screen Offset Staking Screen Three The third Offset Staking screen is used to select the station and section of the road to be staked and to specify an offset distance from the design point Stake Station is the station to be staked offset Staking B 8 41 Interval specifies how far to advance from the current sian oo di station to the next station Interval HR 6 201 ift Efe Center Right Offset HR is the rod height M offset eoit next Sta Next Sta advances the current station by the Station T Subarade Interval x Slope to 1 2 Road Width Note When advancing if you want to also stake the locations where the alignment of the road changes be sure to check the Stake Corners Not J ust Even Intervals option in the Stakeout Settings card Tapping the button will access the Stakeout Settings j gt gt These buttons are used to select the section of the road that you want to stake M Offset When checked is the offset distance that will be applied to the selected design point A positive offset extends from the design point away from the centerline A negative offset extends towards the centerline Subgrade When checked allows you to specify a vertical offset from the actual node locations Positive values result in the stake location occurring below the selected node Negative values result in the stake
24. Back returns to the previous screen Solve gt accesses the third Stake Line and Offset screen described next Note A motorized total station will automatically turn toward the design point after pressing depending on the configuration of the Stakeout Settings screen Page R 45 Stake Line and Offset Screen Three Station displays the current station that is being staked Stake Line And Offset Station H Offset displays the offset distance of the line being 0 00 000 staked from the specified line and if it is on the Right or ils ou Left side of the specified line From Gun to Design Point From Gun to Design Point displays the direction and oe distance that the total station must aim toward so that it Hore Dist l l 942 595 is facing the current station ape DT 8 221 Circle Zero is used to modify the circle on the total ZE to Rod 89 30 01 OCC 1 HE 5 000 BS 0 00 00 Close Settings station so that the angle right reading will be zero when it is facing the current target which can sometimes be easier than turning to an obscure angle value When this button is tapped the following actions will occur 1 Anew backsight circle value is computed sent to R 300 Stakeout Menu the instrument and stored in the raw data 2 The Angle Right value is changed to zero to reflect the change The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the current target
25. HR Convert Slant HI to HI Quick Pick Editor Map View Map Display Options Basemaps Smart Targets R 433 Survey Pro Reference Manual Past Results Ra Past Results where applicable When the Past Results option is used to enter a value in 3 _ a specific field that was computed previously within Ea Choose Past Result Survey Pro Rest vate unit Length 665 353126 Select the line that contains the value that you want to Perimeter 1306 429898 use and tap amp The selected value will then be entered A n ai i in the field associated with that power button Length 100 0 Beg Grade 5 0 End Grade PWC sta 0 50 0 elev 97 5 PWI 0 00 0 elev 100 0 PT sta 0 50 0 elev 99 5 HifLo sta O 33 333333 elev 99 553333 R 434 Miscellaneous Screens Create Points Ra Create Points The Create Points screen is used to store points that coincide with specific locations on an alignment En Create Points Create Points Alignment Modes sta mtengo E estatront SI Description o ooo y Me 6525 2144 ft Start Location E 5741 2219 ft Eley assa M Alignment Nodes When checked will store points at locations where a change occurs on an alignment for example where a straight section and a curved section meet Sta I ntervals When checked will store a point at the specified station interval along an alignment Start Point Name is the name for the first point that will be stored fr
26. PS Map Display Optio 47 sx 12 58 Show Points will show a dot for each point in view show Points Smart Point Labels displays only certain point labels Smart Point Labels dd ae h d Ta name and description when many points are groupe Descriptions together to reduce clutter Show Lines Show Basemaps Show Only This Layer Names will show the point name for each point that is in view Foints Descriptions will show the point description for each point in view alai Show Lines will show all the polylines that are on the ten Show Basemaps will display any basemaps selected for D0 Al the current job Show Only This Layer When checked will show only the selected point data that exists on the specified layer When unchecked point data from all layers is displayed Manage Layers opens the Manage Layers screen Page R 85 where the layers can be configured Manage Basemaps opens the Manage Basemaps screen described below where basemaps can be added to the current job Save as Default Display Options When checked will save the selections made to this screen as the default selections R 441 Survey Pro Reference Manual Manage Basemaps From the Map View tap liz or From the Map View tap The Manage Basemaps screen is used to select the BF Manage Basemaps 4x 1 00 basemaps to display in the map view for the current job Consult the User s Manual for more information on
27. Page R 114 where the current backsight can be modified i is a shortcut to the Surveying and Repetition Settings screens Page R 44 and R 51 respectively R 126 Survey Menu Multiple Sideshots The Multiple Sideshots screen is used to perform multiple side shots using any number of repetitions to each foresight without the need to re shoot the backsight Foresight is the point name that will be stored FG Multiple Sideshots gf 2 2 15 Description is the description for the next stored point o Foresight HR is the length of the rod Description S55 Number of Sets w opens the Smart Target options Page R 444 Number of Sets is the desired number of sets to shoot to the backsight or foresight Shoot Backsight is used to shoot the backsight You will HR 5 18 ift_ i be required to shoot the number of sets to the backsight entered in the Number of Sets field OCC I HE S20 B8 42 25973905R Note The backsight can be re shot at any time but it must be shot before the first side shot can be shot Side Shot is used to shoot a side shot Once the final set is complete the new point is stored and the foresight point will automatically advance to the next available point Backsight accesses the Backsight Setup screen Page R 114 where the current backsight can be modified l i is a shortcut to the Surveying and Repetition Settings screens Page R 44 and R 51 respectively R 127 S
28. Prism is on the line or within the horizontal distance tolerance specified in the Stakeout Settings screen Page R 45 Stakeout Menu Offset Staking The Offset Staking screen is used to stake the center of a road the road edge the curb ditch edge or any offset at fixed intervals An existing polyline alignment or a specified point range can define the centerline of the road The first Offset Staking screen is used to define the centerline of the road that you want to offset stake SA Offset Staking Tap Line displays a map of all the polylines and alignments in the current job Simply tap the line that you want to offset stake and then tap amp i x To From opens a window where a range of points can be defined The points within the specified range will Begin Station O 00 0 E define the centerline of the road to be offset staked OCC 1 HI 5 000 BS 0 00 00 Begin Station is the station assigned to the first point of the selected polyline or point range Backsight accesses the Backsight Setup screen Page R 114 Next gt takes you to the second Offset Staking screen R 281 Survey Pro Reference Manual Offset Staking Screen Two The second Offset Staking screen is used to define the cross section of the road that you want to offset stake 1 2 Road Width is the Left and Right width of the E Offset Staking road respectively from the centerline to the ed
29. See Page R 299 for details R 337 Survey Pro Reference Manual Curve and Offset Curve and Offset The instructions for the Curve and Offset routine for GPS are similar to the conventional method except that the Backsight and buttons are replaced with a Setup HRI button to configure rover antenna and the backsight information is replaced with rover antenna height information See Page R 302 for details Spiral and Offset Spiral and Offset The instructions for the Spiral and Offset routine for GPS are similar to the conventional method except that the Backsight and buttons are replaced with a Setup HRI button to configure rover antenna and the backsight information is replaced with rover antenna height information See Page R 306 for details Show Station and Offset Stakeout Show Station The Show Station and Offset routine allows you to position the rover anywhere near a polyline a range of points that define a line or an alignment to see where the rod is located in relation to the selected line The first screen of this routine is similar to the conventional method except that the button is replaced with a Setup HRI button to configure rover antenna and the backsight information is replaced with rover antenna height information See Page R 310 for details R 338 Stakeout Menu GPS amp Basic GPS Module Show Station Screen Two Once the line is selected the second screen is opened where
30. Start Width oot W measured from the Start Station or it is the end station depending on how the button is toggled End width oot Starting Width is the starting width of the widening _ Mirror to Left This must match the width of the previous template or widening g Ending Width is the ending width of the widening Check opens the Roads Report screen and displays any errors see Page R 399 New opens the New Widening screen which is identical to the Edit Widening screen where a new widening can be created see Page R 395 Edit opens the Edit Widening screen where the selected widening can be modified see Page R 395 M Mirror to Right Left duplicates the widening to the other side of the road when checked R 405 Survey Pro Reference Manual Super Elevations Card New or Edit Super Elevations The Super Elevations card of the New Road screen is used to add or edit super elevations A super elevation changes the cross slope of the first segment of a template in order to bank a curve the slope of any remaining segments will remain unadjusted One super elevation defines a begin point and an end point where the slope change begins and where it finishes the transition for one side of a road Therefore to bank a two lane road four super elevations would be required one at the beginning and one at the end of the curve for each side of the road A su
31. T1i 412 0 003 3 359 o 00 04 o 00 04 S 17 S1 o oo he or By Angle By Distance will take a shot to a prism located over the backsight point and compare the measured distance with the computed distance between the occupy and backsight points stored in the current job Note The Check by Distance method does not apply if the backsight is defined by a direction By Angle When the backsight is defined by a direction this routine will read the current horizontal angle from the total station and compare that to the backsight direction Circle accesses the Backsight Circle dialog box described below R 117 Survey Pro Reference Manual Check by Distance Results Occupy is the current occupy point Backsight is the current backsight point Zenith is the zenith angle measured by the total station Slope Dist is the slope distance measured by the total station HD Error is the horizontal distance between the backsight point that was shot and the backsight point stored in the job A negative value indicates that the point shot is closer to the total station than the point in the job VD Error is the vertical distance between the backsight point that was shot and the backsight point stored in the job Check by Angle Results Circle is the horizontal angle that was measured by the total station Azimuth is the known azimuth to the current backsight Error is the difference between t
32. When unchecked no points 3 Show Points From Current Setup or point names are overlaid Show Only This Layer Names when checked the point name will be shown next to each point that is overlaid on the video screen The color for the text can be selected with the corresponding color button Smart Point Labels when checked some point names will automatically be hidden if they overlap other point names in situations where several points are crowded together For the names that are shown the associated point graphic will be displayed with a bold border When unchecked all point names will be displayed whether or not they overlap other point names Show All Points when checked all points in the job will be shown if in view on the video display Show Points From Current Setup when checked only points that were stored from the current backsight setup will be shown Show Only This Layer when checked only points that are stored on the selected layer will be overlaid on the video screen Manage Layers opens the Manage Layers screen Page R 85 where the layers can be configured R 161 Survey Pro Reference Manual Video Seitings or Instrument Settings The Video Settings screen is used to configure the quality of the live video image and stored photos Quality is used to configure the quality of live video image where Fine produces the best image quality but takes more time for the video im
33. a prompt to select a layer will appear before any new point is stored from any routine other than those included in the Survey and Stakeout menus M Prompt for Attributes When checked a prompt to select feature information will appear before any new point is stored from any routine other than those included in the Survey and Stakeout menus This also requires that a feature file be selected from the Files Settings card described earlier M Prompt to Backup When Closing J ob When checked you will be reminded to backup the current job prior to closing it M Write Point Attributes to Raw Data When checked point attributes will be written to the raw data file as well as the job file M Prompt for Elevation of 2D Cogo Pionts When checked a majority of the COGO routines will prompt you for an elevation before storing a 2D point When unchecked 2D points will be stored without the prompt M Use Smart Soft I nput Panel Activation When checked the SIP will automatically open when the cursor is inside an input field and close when the cursor is moved outside an input field M Always Warn if Not Saving New File to Flash Card When checked a warning will open whenever a new job is saved to the data collector s onboard memory rather than an external CF card M Log Serial Port Traffic When checked all serial port traffic will be logged to a text file called TDS Log txt for troubleshooting purposes and is stored in the Jobs folder Th
34. and returning the product registration card or by visiting our Web site www tdsway com Main Menu The Main Menu is the starting point where all the other Survey Pro screens described in this manual are accessed The area at the bottom of the screen is called the command bar The small buttons in the command bar are used as follows I Corner amp 2 Lines J Corner amp Angle 0 H Al About Survey Pro Tapping the icon or selecting File About Survey Pro opens the About Survey Pro screen See Page R 33 Online Help Tapping the button opens the online help which allows you to access information similar to the information you Survey Pro Main Menu would find in the reference manual for each screen Main Menu Survey Menu Survey Menu for GPS Module Survey Menu for Basic GPS Module Leveling Menu Stakeout Menu Stakeout Menu for GPS amp Basic GPS Inverse Menu cogo Menu Curve Menu Roads Menu Adjust Menu Miscellaneous Screens Appendix R 3 Survey Pro Reference Manual Surveying Mode The instrument icon indicates which collection mode the software is running in There are three possible surveying modes Robotic Trimble Conventional T GPS and amp Leveling Tapping this icon will Manual Mode open a list of options to do any of the following Manage Instruments e Switch to another instrument mode v Conventional e Select a different instrument profile
35. depending on how you change the coordinate system the option to adjust all or geodetic only may or may not be available Ifthe choice is not available you will see some text describing which points will be adjusted Third if you change both dimensions and only one R 234 Survey Menu GPS Module dimension would allow this choice to be active then the display title will indicate which dimension the setting is for Do Not Adjust Job is where you choose to not adjust the job points with this change of coordinate system Details displays a description of the change between the two coordinate system records Adjust with Projection Results The Adjust with Projection Results screen is used to preview the results of the adjustment before it is applied The following points would be to the job file points updated Show All Points When checked the results list will Adjusted from source NEE show all points selected for the adjustment including Adjusted from source NEE points that are not adjusted or which did not change Adjusted fom source WEE ti ith th Avda t Wh t checked th AGueted rem e NEE ocation with the adjustment en not checked the Adjusted from source NEE results list will show only those points that will change pase O arae NEE as a result of this adjustment or points that did not Adjusted from source MEE f Adjusted from source NEE change because of a projection error Adjusted fram source WEE
36. gt opens the next screen R 295 Survey Pro Reference Manual Point Slope Staking Screen Two The second screen is used to perform the actual point slope staking shots Rod Elev is the current elevation at the rod location g Point Slope Staking CUT Slope Des Slope is the design cut or fill slope Rod Eley 102 440 Below DS Des Slope 2 000 0 224 Obs Slope is the computed observed cut or fill slope Obs Slope 2 186 Toward HP HD to HP 5 269 0 454 based on the last shot and the corresponding hinge point Cut to Hp Parr To Slope Offset 0 131 HD to HP is the horizontal distance from the rod to the are ot a 1 25 39 eee EDM Cut to HP Fill to HP is the cut or fill required to bring the current rod location level with the hinge point HR port To Slope Offset is the perpendicular offset between the p rod location and the horizontal line from the hinge point to the catch point Direction CW or CCW is the horizontal angle clockwise or counterclockwise respectively that the rod must turn around the hinge point for it to be over the line from the hinge point to the catch point Below DS Above DS is the vertical distance that the rod is located below or above the design slope If the Automatic Slope option is selected this will be the distance to the nearest slope otherwise it will be the distance to the selected cut or fill slope Toward HP Away HP is the estimated h
37. information is displayed about the rod position and the selected line GPS Status displays the current solution type the number of satellites used and the horizontal and vertical precision computed by the receiver Tap on this button to open the detailed GPS Status screen Page R 168 ETE gt OCCUPYING gt ROVING switches from ROVING to 5 Hz Mode Results Station 0 17 137 Offset Dist 0 191 Elev 82 585 Offset Left Segment NA Om z OCCUPYING mode When ROVING the receiver is in dynamic mode and will calculate your position as you move to the point When OCCUPYING the receiver is switched to static mode depending on settings and will calculate the most precise position for the staked point gt Results gt N E Z displays either the results or plane coordinates in the lower corner of the screen Station is the station at the current rod position Offset Dist is the perpendicular distance from the line to the rod Elev is the elevation at the rod position Eg a Offset displays if the rod is on the Left or Right of the line Segment displays the type of line segment at the current station lt Back returns to the previous screen Store stores a point for the current rod location R 339 Survey Pro Reference Manual Store Offset Points Store Offset Points The instructions for the Store Offset Points routine for GPS are similar to th
38. location occurring above the selected node R 283 Survey Pro Reference Manual X Slope is the slope of the selected road section 1 2 Road Width displays the width of the selected road section defined in the previous screen This value can quickly be edited from this field opens the Smart Target options Page R 444 Backsight accesses the Backsight Setup screen Page R 114 lt Back returns to the previous screen Solve gt accesses the next screen Offset Staking Screen Four The fourth Offset Staking screen displays the information needed to aim the total station toward the selected design point Station displays the current station and section of the roadway being staked and the current line segment type from the polyline that describes the centerline If staking the center and an offset was specified To L or To R is also displayed to indicate if the offset is to the left or right of the centerline respectively Offset displays the offset that is applied to the design point Slope displays the slope of the road at the section being staked From Gun to Design Point displays the angle and distance information from the total station to the design point plus offset if specified Circle Zero is used to modify the circle on the total E Offset Staking Station 0 00 000 Center To R Line Offset 2 000 Slope 000 From Gun to Design Point Angle Right 3
39. rotation and base station local coordinates R 209 Survey Pro Reference Manual Localization Calculator Scale Note This function is no longer necessary with Survey Pro versions after 3 5 The new localization solution sets the origin scale of the reference stereographic mapping plane based on ground height This screen was left in to explain scale factor to users who previously used this work flow Use 1 0 Scale returns to the Localization Calculator screen with a scale factor of 1 0 Localization Calculator Rotation In order to compute the localization rotation you need a known geodetic coordinate system for reference Use this function to set the localization coordinate system parallel to a selected mapping plane The calculate rotation function uses the Projection Calculator screen Page R 237 Note Survey Pro versions prior to 3 5 allowed users to calculate rotation using either a known mapping plane or relative to the first base setup This function is now used only to calculate orientation from a known mapping plane Older jobs that had orientation relative to the first base were automatically converted into a localization solution when first opened with Survey Pro versions after 3 5 Solve Localization Results The Solve Localization Results screen is used to display the results of the horizontal and vertical adjustment and how the adjustment was derived R 210 Survey Menu GPS Module Horizo
40. will trigger the total station to take a shot to Dist 112 343 ifeet the prism The new point is stored as a side shot in the 67 923 feet data collector and the foresight point will automatically advance to the next available point OCC 1 HE 5 20 BS 42 359 59 55 Traverse will trigger the total station to take a shot to the prism The new point is stored as a traverse shot in Input E Results the data collector and a The Traverse Now or Later dialog box will open described on Page R 122 If you choose to traverse now the occupy point will automatically change to the previous foresight point and the backsight point will automatically change to the previous occupy point Note prior to storing a point you may then be prompted for description rod height layer and or feature information depending on the selections made in the Surveying Settings screen Backsight accesses the Backsight Setup screen Page R 114 where the current backsight can be modified is a shortcut to the Surveying Settings screen Page R 44 R 120 Survey Menu Results Angle Right is the horizontal angle right around the Occupy Point from the Backsight to the Foresight Point Azimuth is the azimuth from the Occupy Point to the Foresight Point Zenith is the zenith angle measured by the total station to the prism Slope Dist is the slope distance measured by the total station to the prism Horz Dist is the horizontal
41. 310 After Angle Adjust 333 201 62 18 47 1 9 3 255 484 3 988 900 0 000 Perfect 3 250 649 3231 142 12 294 389 3 439 999 246 320 30 777 24 881 246 320 6 3568 24 552 0 000 101 905 This screen displays the changes that will be made by the adjustment where they can be previewed before the actual adjustment is made The screen lists the adjustment details in three main sections the angle adjustment details the compass rule adjustment details and the point details where the before and after coordinates for each point are listed An example of the information provided in the Preview screen is shown here Error dist is the horizontal distance between the starting point and closing point Error azm is the direction from the closing point to the starting point Precision is the ratio of the error distance to the length Angular error is the difference between N 2 180 and the actual sum of the internal angles where N is the number of sides in the traverse Length is the sum of all the sides of the boundary Perimeter is the length plus the error distance Adjust if the results in the preview are acceptable tap this button to perform the adjustment R 431 Miscellaneous Screens The following screens are only available via a Quick Pick or a power button see the User s Manual They are not available directly from any menu item Past Results Create Points Trimble Slant HR gt
42. 6 will be calculated when you solve the GP S resection Start Surveying Now Start Surveying Now Start now and occupy Start now and occupy SLANU GPS control later Bran GPS control later GPS Backsgnt GPS Resation The GPS Backsight Resection screen will open any time the coordinate system is not solved It will have one of two states depending on if the base was set up on an existing job point and one additional control point is needed to orient the setup or the base was set up on a new point from an autonomous setup Occupy Control gt opens the Occupy Control Setup screen described below Use base as vertical benchmark Check this box if the base is set up on a job point with an accurate elevation to include it for vertical control during localization Start Now opens the Data Collection screen without collecting GPS control at this time R 245 Survey Pro Reference Manual Occupy Control Setup The Occupy Control Setup screen is used to specify which job point with accurate NEE coordinates you are ESS an oat its CES occupying and if you want to use the point for horizontal control point to solve the setup and or vertical control when localizing this can be changed later Point 2 Point is the existing job point you are occupying Use This GPS Control Point For H This point has a good horizontal NE location i Occupy Control g gt f 8 12 H Check this if the point has good horizonta
43. 60 edit point general R 57 R 58 DEOG CLIC aeann R 60 location secese R 59 edit point flags R 60 edit points eseese R 56 edit polyline R 81 edit polylines R 61 Index edit road oee R 398 geoid model 0006 228 edit segment R 69 select 260 R 177 EGM9G newex 220 CreO1G 9G cineres 228 ellipsoid height 228 Geoid99 aeee 228 ellipsoid scale factor 227 303 GeoLock ccccceeeeeeees 153 ephemeris secsec 144 GHA Geena een once ere 144 OMI ENTE EAT ATIR EE R 33 GHA OL ainra R 153 OX DOF eaa R 22 IVEY E 144 R 155 CR5 coordinates R 24 GPS backsight resectionR 245 JOB coordinates R 23 GPS coordinates 215 231 TXT coordinates R 24 managing 246 CSV coordinates R 25 GPS point flags LandXML coordinatesR 25 EdD eei R 60 export coordinates 126 GPS status eee R 168 cell modem card R 170 F position card R 173 feature collection 293 R 188 post process card R 170 foat re S niea eecs cs R 59 receiver card R 168 field label eee eeee 3 sat info card R 172 Ce 0 eapeere eer a eee ene a 3 sky view Card R 171 input didehetest oueserepeweaveestats 17 grid N to geodetic N 304 moving between R 54 grid to ground 303 output EEE A E 17 ground coordinates R 221 MELA WO
44. 712 2 08 Fill ta HP 0 801 95 712 Back Sta 1 201 30 642 Inst EDM HR 6 201 ift ie b Vertical Map t Automatic Slope Note The computed horizontal distance is based on the observed terrain computed from the last two shots If only one shot has been taken it is assumed that the terrain is level when computing this value On Station Back Sta Ahead Sta informs you if the rod is on the station being staked or the distance it must move parallel to the centerline back or ahead to be on the correct station HD to HP is the horizontal distance from the rod to the hinge point VD to HP is the vertical distance from the rod to the hinge point HD to CL is the horizontal distance from the rod to the centerline VD to CL is the vertical distance from the rod to the centerline EDM This button can be toggled to shoot in various EDM modes The options available depend on the total station being used Consult the total station s documentation for more information on the EDM modes that it supports R 290 Stakeout Menu Results This will display the following additional cut fill and location information e Type of slope e g left right cut fill e Design and observed slope ratios run over rise e Design and actual stations e HD and Cut Fill to Hinge Point e HD and Cut Fill to Center Line e Ifapplicable HD and Cut Fill to Edge of Pavement and Edge of Curb e Name of segment and HD and Cut Fill
45. Apply applies the adjustment to the listed points Show all points G i E Note When the Adjust with Projection wizard was opened from the menu tapping Apply will only update the selected job file point locations The job file coordinate system will not be changed in this case When the Adjust with Projection wizard was opened automatically as a result of a change of coordinate system tapping will update all eligible job file point locations and it will update the job file coordinate system Adjust with Projection Adjust More The Adjust with Projection Adjust More screen is used to return to the Select Points screen if you wish to adjust some selected points again This screen only shows when the wizard was opened from the menu R 235 Survey Pro Reference Manual Projection Calculator The Projection Calculator wizard is used to calculate scale factor or convergence rotation for any point on the selected mapping plane You can use the computed values for calculations from the Past Results power button option Projection displays the current mapping plane settings Select Point is where you enter the name of the reference point where the rotation or scale is to be computed Calc Rotation gt opens the Projection Calculator screen where the rotation is computed Calc Scale gt opens the Projection Calculator screen where the scale is computed R 236 Fone Group US State Plane 1983
46. Card The V Map card displays a graphic of the cross sectional profile of the road at the current station The hinge points and slopes are also displayed Fill Hingel 4 gt H Map Map Slopes R 416 Roads Menu Slopes Card The Slopes card is used to specify the cut and fill slopes that will be used when computing the location of the E Cue oe e cut Slope catch point The default values are the slopes stored in Eo the template for the section being staked To override a default slope check the appropriate box and key in the new slope The new slope entered will always be used Fill Slope _ Fill Slope bo regardless of the values stored in the templates Changes to slopes will be reflected in the V Map card graphic Cut Slope is the left and right slope respectively used when the terrain requires a cut the hinge point is located below the terrain s surface Fill Slope is the left and right slope respectively used when the terrain requires a fill the hinge point is located above the terrain s surface Cut Fill Hinge Points Cards The Fill Hinge Points tab and the Cut Hinge Points tab are used to select the segment where you want the hinge point location to be computed from in situations requiring a fill or a cut respectively The hinge point will occur at the node of the selected segment furthest from the centerline The hinge point can also be defined at different segments
47. Design elevations will be lower when Dis selected and higher when U is selected Grade specifies a slope from the specified curve to the offset that is being staked When this is a non zero value the elevation for the staked points will increasingly differ from the corresponding design elevations on the specified curve as the Offset value increases Height of Rod is the length of the rod lt Back returns to the previous screen Solve gt accesses the third Stake Curve and Offset screen described next Note A motorized total station will automatically turn toward the design point after tapping Solve gt depending on the configuration of the Stakeout Settings screen Page R 45 R 303 Survey Pro Reference Manual Curve and Offset Screen Three Station displays the current station that is being staked Stake Curve And Offset H Offset displays the offset distance of the curve being eae staked from the specified curve and if it is on the Right H Offset 20 000 L an w Offset or Left side of the specified curve ee ae eee ere Angle Right is the horizontal angle that the total ger cabrio station must aim toward so that it is facing the current Horz Dist station 20 000 Wert Dist Horz distance is the horizontal distance from the a a occupy point to the current station g0 00 00 Vert Distance is the vertical distance from the occupy OSS HE 5 000 B5 0 o000 point to the curre
48. E Resection aswe OOOO l Instrument Height is the height of the instrument Instrument Height 5 4 ft above the ground Fi i pe E Total Resect Points to Shoot is the number of known positions that will be shot from 2 to 7 eae Shots per Resect Point is the required number of shots to shoot to each foresight when Direct Only is selected in Di z the next field and is the required number of sets when Solve Ive _soWve _ Direct and Reverse is selected in the next field Shots per Resect Point Sequence is the set order when shooting each foresight Input Results Bme You can select either Direct and Reverse or Direct Only Solve accesses the Resection dialog box described below where all of the shots are performed R 147 Survey Pro Reference Manual Resection Screen Two Resect Point is the known point that you will shoot E The 4th Resect Point Option allows you to select the type of data that is recorded when shooting the specified foresight You can U ena Z E select Distance and Angle or if shooting at least three Hon foresights you can also select to record the Angle Only HR HR is the length of the rod Pts On oO Pt4 Bees Ure opens the Smart Target options Page R 444 Take Shot takes a shot to the prism at the specified foresight point After the last shot is performed the Save Point dialog box will open described next
49. Edge of Road R 2 0 X Slope is the cross slope of the Left and Right sides of the road respectively The slope is computed from Rise Run the centerline toward the edge l ings CI a M Stake Curb Ditch When checked this allows you to R 288 100 A negative slope will cause water to run from Stakeout Menu include a curb or ditch in the road profile Height defines the height of the curb or depth of the ditch A negative value would be used to define the depth of a ditch Offset From Edge of Road defines the width of the curb or ditch lt Back returns to the previous screen Next gt opens the next screen Slope Staking Screen Three Station to Stake is the station that will be staked next ra Slope Staking 6 a af 9 15 Station I nterval is the value that is added to the Station statin foro __ I cake after the Next Station button d O ake alter e e ation utton 1s pressed HR 6 201 ift Ee Next Station advances the Station to Stake by the Station Interval Note If the Stake Corners option is selected in the Stakeout Settings screen the button will also stop at any horizontal or vertical alignment node that falls within the interval Fil Slope Segment 1 cite E Backsight Fill Slope is the desired slope calculated from run over rise between the hinge point and catch point when the area requires a fill Cut Slope is the de
50. Fone Oregon North 3601 Choose a point for scale factor or convergence calculation O n Select Point Ele l Calc Rotation Calc Scale gt E Survey Menu GPS Module Projection Calculator Rotation Convergence displays the computed rotation from Projection Calculator lt 7 4xG geodetic north to grid north Rotation displays the computed rotation from grid north to geodetic north lt Back returns you to the first Projection Calculator Geodetic N to Grid N PETER age Accept copies the two computed values to past results 1 57 49 365 a and returns you to the first Projection Calculator screen Grid N to Geodetic N Rotation 1 597 49 3565 oO v Ej Projection Calculator Scale Height Correction o N Ellipsoid Height is where you enter the WGS84 mal ellipsoid height for your current location This value Ellipsoid Scale Factor will be used to calculate the height above the terrain component of the scale factor This is sometimes referred to as the sea level correction lt Back returns you to the first Projection Calculator screen Solve gt takes you to the final screen Correct measured distances for the height of the terrain above the ellipsoid reference surface Ellipsoid Height 183 365752 ft Oo iv E R 237 Survey Pro Reference Manual Projection Calculator Scale Mapping Plane Scale Factor displays th
51. Indiana Delaware Maine Florida Michigan Georgia 1934 sam ga sh sh gow Reference Manual Zone Central State Zone Central Meridian Meridian Mississippi New Mexico Missouri E C W New York E C W Nevada Vermont E W E C W E C W Wyoming New Hampshire New Jersey Lambert Zones Central Meridian and Zone Constants for State Plane Coordinates N North NC North Central I Island S South SC South Central O Offshore C Central M Mainland Appendix A State Zone Central Zone Meridian Constant 92 00 0 559691 California 0 653884 0 630468 0 612232 0 596587 0 570012 0 549518 0 561243 Colorado 105 30 0 646133 105 30 0 630690 105 30 0 613378 Connecticut 7245 0 663059 Florida 84 30 0 502526 93 30 0 658701 98 30 0 614528 85 45 0 606462 Louisiana 92 30 0 528701 91 20 0 500013 91 20 0 454007 I 70 30 0 661095 Michigan N 87 00 0 722790 C 84 20 0 706407 S 84 20 0 680529 Minnesota N 93 06 0 741220 C 94 15 0 723388 S 84 20 0 700928 Montana N 109 30 0 746452 C 109 30 0 733354 S 109 30 0 714901 Nebraska N 100 00 0 673451 S 99 30 0 656076 nZ n Zn Zna z z jnaginanrkwne OV Z Reference Manual New York 74 00 0 654082 Long Island S 100 30 0 729383 S 82 30 0 634520 S 98 00 0 567617 S 120 30 0 684147 Pennsylvania N 77 45 0 661540 S 77 45 0 648793 South Carolina N 81 00 0 564497 S 81 00 0 544652 South Dakota N 100 00 0 707738 S 100 20 0 689852
52. Line To From opens a window where a line can be defined Polyline by a range of points Line Backsight accesses the Backsight Setup screen Page To From ls R 114 een Stake gt takes you to the second Stake Points screen Begin Station nd described below R 277 Survey Pro Reference Manual Stake to Line Screen Two The second screen is where the staking is performed The graphic display of this screen will change depending on how close the rod is to the specified line The initial screen that is displayed before a shot is performed shows the position of the total station the line of the backsight and the specified line to stake Each type of graphic is displayed below Note Tap the graphic portion of the screen for an expanded view HR is the length of the rod Stake to Line ar q2 10 39 EDM This button can be TR oa R a toggled to shoot in various l en foen LEFT of Line EDM modes The options 9255 Station 0 09 226 available depend on the 9 253 oo oe 204 Fill 0 131 total station being used Consult the total station s documentation for more information on the EDM modes that it supports BACK FORWARD is the distance that the rod must travel BACK away from the total station or FORWARD toward the total station in order to occupy the specified line LEFT of Line RIGHT of Line ON LINE is displayed if P o the rod is to the left or r
53. Local is where you enter the three translations from WGS84 to the local datum Note The sign convention for the datum translations is from WGS84 to the local datum If your datum transformation is defined for local to WGS84 be sure to inverse values before entering in Survey Pro Key In Zone Datum Rotation and Scale The Key In Zone Datum Rotation and Scale screen is used to enter translations when the Datum Type is or Similarity pam Key In Zone ie Er f 7 09 Datum Rotate WGS84 to Local Rotate secs Rotate Y secs Rotate Z secs i Scale Factor opr Datum Rotations From WGS84 To Local is where you enter the three rotations from WGS84 to the local datum Scale Factor ppm is where you enter the scale of the datum transformation from WGS84 to the local datum The scale factor is entered in parts per million Note The sign convention for the datum rotations and scale factor is from WGS84 to the local datum If your datum transformation is defined for local to WGS84 be sure to inverse the values before entering in Survey Pro R 219 Survey Pro Reference Manual Key In Zone Datum from Database The Key In Zone Datum from Database screen is used to select a database datum when the Datum Type is Pick from Data Base Datum is where you select the data base datum to use for the new zone fig lkeyInZone gt 0 q 7 09 HAD 1983 Conus NAD 1983 Conus CORSE H HAD 1983 Hawaii i NAD 1983 Mex
54. Offset that you want to stake stations Height of Rod is the rod height eae Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen Page R a 114 where you can set your backsight Height of Rod lt Back returns to the previous screen Solve gt opens the next Station Staking screen Station Staking Screen a eee Three Solve gt The third Station Staking screen shows the direction and distance information from the instrument to the selected stake point Station O 70 000 The Station Surface and Offset information is displayed Su tace_ TOP AC Offset Left 3 500 m at the top of the screen From Gun to Design Point From Gun to Design Point lists the direction and Angle Right distance information used to aim the total station toward Penne ai the stake point 20 304 Vert Dist Circle Zero is used to modify the circle on the total 0 538 station so that the angle right reading will be zero when o it is facing toward the design point which can sometimes 600 7 H 1524 BS 0ooog be easier than turning to an obscure angle value When this button is tapped the following actions will occur 1 A new backsight circle value is computed sent to tae R 322 Stakeout Menu the instrument and stored in the raw data 2 The Angle Right value is changed to zero to reflect the change The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the design point 3 To prevent errors the
55. Plane Parameters The Key In Zone Mapping Plane Parameters screen is used to enter the values for the map projection zone a AE 6 54 The parameters required depend on the zone type They will include iG Key In one Central Latitude bess e Central Longitude Latitude is where you enter Central Longitude the geodetic origin of the map projection 116 4000 False Northing False Northing Easting is where you enter the SO00U0U 0 m coordinate offsets at the origin of the map False Easting projection TARANAN e Scale factor is where enter the scale factor of the 0 59999 map projection e N S Parallel is where you enter the north and south standard parallels of the map projection e Azimuth is where you enter azimuth of the central line of the map projection Key In Zone Oblique Mercator Settings The Key In Zone Oblique Mercator screen is sued to set extra parameters when the Zone Type is set to Oblique Mercator Angle Azimuth at Equator Azimuth At is where you enter the convention for Center of Projection projection azimuth Your choices are e Equator Origin at Equator E cones eure eee Origin At is where you enter the convention for projection azimuth van Key In Zone 2 Er ad 6 56 _ Rectify Coordinates e Equator e Center of Projection Rectify Coordinates is where you set if the coordinates are rectified Coordinates are rectified if the local plane
56. Predetermined Area HD VD to SD ZA SD ZA to HD VD SPAS OAR Fo p AU Conversion R 351 Survey Pro Reference Manual Point in Direction The Point in Direction screen will calculate and store the position of a new point after providing a distance and direction from a known point From point is the point name of the reference point used for locating the new point Bearing is the direction from the reference a a Pont e point to the new point pacimuth fes 1215 i Angle is the angle added to the Azimuth Bearing k i z to modify the direction to the new point Hore Dist a57 74546t i vet ost prse En Point in Direction o Store Point f ir Note To subtract an angle from the specified azimuth or bearing enter a negative Angle value Horiz Dist is the horizontal distance from the reference point to the new point Input EE Results Es map Vert Dist is the vertical distance from the reference point to the new point Store point When this is checked the computed point will be stored with the name specified here Solve will compute the location for and optionally store the new point R 352 COGO Menu Intersection The Intersection screen computes the intersection s of two lines given the direction s and or distance s from two existing points See illustration below Once solved the intersection points can be viewed from the Map card and optionally stor
57. Pro Reference Manual Choose Base Setup The Start GPS Survey Choose Base Setup screen displays your three options to configure the RTK base receiver This screen is always part of the wizard 2 Start Survey Wizard 7 ax OC Survey Pro Base Point No base set Start with a new base or remote base Use Current Base gt Set new base Connect to a GPS receiver and set it as an RTE base Set New Base gt Use remote base station A base is already set and broadcasting RTE corrections Use Remote Base gt 9 Start Survey Wizard 47 E T Survey Pro Base Point Base Point 2 Use Current Base gt Set new base Connect to a GPS receiver and set it as an RTK base Use remote base station A base is already set and broadcasting RTK corrections Choose Base no base set Choose base base already set Base Point displays the current RTK base point configured in Survey Pro If no base is set this box instructs you to start with one of the other two options Use Current Base gt skips the Base Setup screen and opens the next screen required for survey setup This could be the Rover Setup screen the Start GPS Survey Solve Localization screen or the Data Collection screen Set New Base gt opens the Base Setup screen Use this option when you want to set an RTK base to begin broadcasting corrections and also possibly begin logging GPS raw
58. RI GHT Go LEFT indicates if the rod must move to Angle Right Shot the right or left from the total station s point of view 135 00 00 Zenith Stake Next gt ciel Topo SS EDM This button can be toggled to shoot in various Slope Dist EDM modes The options available depend on the total 7 500 Store Tape station being used Consult the total station s documentation for more information on the EDM modes that it supports CUT FILL displays the required amount of cut or fill to bring the stake point to the design point s elevation Store Rod Elev displays the elevation at the rod s location computed from the last shot R 285 Survey Pro Reference Manual Change is used to modify the current design elevation which will also modify the associated CUT FILL value for the current station being staked Shot takes a shot to the prism and computes come go cut fill information Shot data displays the measurements from the last shot Store opens the next screen Store Tape accesses the Stake Out Point Tape Offset dialog box Page R 305 where the staked point can be stored that includes a specified offset The default value is the appropriate distance correction to the design point Topo SS stores a side shot using the data from the last shot taken This will not take a new shot Turn Gun available with robotic total station turns the total
59. Receiver Setup screen Model displays the receiver model selected in the RIK Correction Format Receiver Setup screen Receiver Mode Post Processing r Elevation Cutoff degrees RTK Correction Format is where you set the format for communication between the base and rover Receiver Mode is where you set the mode of operation of this receiver There are four choices e RIK Base use this mode to set the receiver as an RTK base which will broadcast GPS corrections in the selected RTK Correction Format over the Receiver Data Modem General transmitting data modem Oo 7 Ej RTK Rover use this mode to set the receiver as an RTK rover which will listen for GPS corrections on the receiving data modem and calculate a differential GPS position in real time e Post Processing use this mode to set the receiver to collect GPS raw data for post processing No data modem will be used to R 93 Survey Pro Reference Manual transfer GPS measurements in real time This mode is used to setup both static and stop go post processing receivers e Ntrip Rover Select this mode to use the receiver as an RTK rover where the base corrections are to be supplied to the rover by connection to an Ntrip service To configure an Ntrip rover you must setup the Windows Networking modem parameters on the Data Modem card Note You do not need to select the RTK Correction Format for an Ntrip rover because this will be determined
60. S TDS Defaults System Defaults Buttons General afr Cancel Al to lt Global gt Assignment Within Survey Pro is where you select the function for the selected button when it is used within Survey Pro The function of the button will switch back to its global assignment when it is used outside of Survey Pro Selecting lt Global gt from this field will result in the global assignment also being used from within Survey Pro Global Assignment is where you select the function for the selected button when it is used outside Survey Pro TDS Defaults will set all assignments in the Assignment Within Survey Pro field to the TDS default settings System Defaults will set all assignments in the Global Assignment field to the system default settings and set all the assignments in the Assignment Within Survey Pro field R 53 Survey Pro Reference Manual General Settings The General Settings card can contain the following miscellaneous settings M Use Enter Key to Move Between Fields When checked the Enter key will move the cursor to the next m field in all screens When unchecked the Enter key C n orate min will perform a different function depending on the field Remind to backup job selected T a j Jhs dr a x 10 20 Use Enter Key to Move Between F e Allow Alphanumeric Point Mames Note The arrow keys can also be used to move the Always Prorat for Bac eslcHt CHaEE cursor between f
61. Settings screen described below R 143 Survey Pro Reference Manual Video Scan Settings The Video Scan Settings screen is used to configure how many points to shoot within the scan frame You have a choice to define the number of points by distance between points angle between points total number of points or the time required to shoot all points By Distance HD VD specifies the horizontal and vertical distances between points that are measured within a F Scan Settings 2 ao 9 17 scan frame D By Distance Intervals At Distance is the distance from the total station to the 0 328084 ift surface to be scanned 228 083 Shoot Tap this to measure a new distance for the At D By Angle Intervals Distance field 0 032626 By Angle HAVA specifies the horizontal and vertical By Points in Total angles the total station will turn to advance to each point C By Time Estimate within a scan frame i e Calculat By Points in Total is the number of points to shoot M within the scan frame Auto Image Capture Of Scan Frame By Time Estimate will shoot the number of evenly spaced points within the scan frame to finish approximately in the time entered here Recalculate This will recalculate the remaining value s in any dependent fields after changes are made Automatic mage Capture of Scan Frame When checked panoramic photographs within the scan frame are automatically taken after a video
62. Single Wire Prompts for shot data will require center wire readings only Three Wire Electronic Prompts for shot data will require a vertical Single Wire Electronic O Trigonometric and horizontal distance Trigonometric Prompts for shot data will require a zenith angle and horizontal distance R 40 Job Menu Units Settings Settings The Units Settings card defines the units that are used within the software sent from the total station entered from the keypad and displayed on the screen You can select the following settings for your project from the following dropdown lists Units for Distances defines the units used for length as Alpa 4 Meters International Feet or US Survey Feet Units for Distances Feet Units for Angles Note You can enter a distance in any distance field in units other than what is set for the job by appending the Display Directions As Azimuth distance value with the following characters Azimuth Type e for ftor ift International Feet e usf or usft US Survey Feet e ior in Inches em Meters e cm Centimeters e mM Millimeters e cor ch Chains units Format Fies 4 Once the cursor leaves that field the distance will be converted automatically A space between the value and the unit abbreviation is optional Warning When creating a new job it is important that the Units for Distances field be set to the correct units This allows you to
63. Status Rover is not set Base set at 2 Lat 44 33 07 69000 N Long 123 16 06 57000 W Height 55 000 m Last antenna for this receiver Antenna Manual Measured To Bottom of mount Offset 0 000 Survey Menu GPS Module Rover Status displays the status of the rover setup in Survey Pro Base set at displays the current base point This will be empty if the base is not set Antenna displays antenna setup for this receiver It will be in one of three states Last Antenna for this receiver is displayed when you have not yet set the rover in Survey Pro This value is the previous antenna measurement you used with this receiver Selected Antenna is displayed when you have entered new antenna measurements using the Receiver Antenna screen Page R 181 e Antenna Set is displayed when you have already set the rover in Survey Pro and this receiver was used as the rover Measured is where you enter the height of the antenna measured to the location specified on the Receiver Antenna screen Page R 181 Offset displays the vertical and or slant offset values for the selected antenna Entering antenna offsets is explained on the Receiver Antenna screen Page R 181 Setup HR opens the Receiver Antenna screen Page R 181 sets the receiver as an RTK rover If there is a Recording Interval set on the Job Settings Post Process page a file will be opened and logging of raw GPS measurements for p
64. When selected a cut sheet report will list the measured offset values Level Settings The Level Setting screen is only available when running in leveling mode It is used to configure all of the settings for performing a level loop BS1 BSn gt FS1 FSn This sequence requires that you AF settings take all the shots for each set to the backsight turn to eUEPICE the foresight and then shoot all the shots for each set to O BS1 BSn gt FS1 FSn the foresight B51 FS1 gt FS2 BS2 n Number of Sets fri 1 BS1 FS1 gt FS2 BS2 n A single set in this sequence See requires that you shoot the backsight turn and shoot the foresight shoot the foresight again turn and shoot the v Dist Tolerance backsight Repeat for all remaining sets H Dist Tolerance Number of Sets n is the number of sets you want to Tolerance for Error Checking shoot from each setup BS FS Sight Length lt 6 56168 ft Per Shot Stadia Constant is the scale of the upper and lower BS FS Sight Length lt stadia wires in the telescope The vertical distance ie measured between these stadia multiplied by the value oo entered here usually 100 equals the horizontal distance to the rod V Dist Tolerance is the maximum change in vertical distance that can occur between all the shots to any specific point from a single setup If this value is exceeded a warning will occur H Dist Tolerance is the maximum change in horizontal distan
65. a 100 ft arc length Deg Chord is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft chord length Segment is the area between the arc length and the chord Sector is the area between the arc length and the two edge radii Fillet is the area between the arc length and the tangents R 381 Survey Pro Reference Manual Traverse on Curve The Traverse on Curve screen will compute the PT and radius point for a curve when the tangent azimuth at a PC point is known The first known part of the curve is defined by one of the following Radius is the distance from the radius point to the gq RAE curve a mo Delta is the deflection angle Delta s0000 f Degree Arc is the deflection angle that results in a a5 a duds JE e 100 ft arc length pacmuth 283 1727 x Turn Left Right e Degree Chord is the deflection angle that results in store PT Bs M a 100 ft chord length lt C Store RP The second known part of the curve is defined by one of the following e Delta is the deflection angle Input Results Bme Length is the arc length Chora is the chord length Tangent is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI Mid Ordinate is the distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curve s length External is the minimum distance between the PI and the curve PC Point is the point that defines the be
66. a vertical angle exceeds the tolerance entered here during a repetition shot _ Shoot Distance to Backsight Distance Tolerance a warning message will be displayed if a distance exceeds the tolerance entered here during a repetition shot M Shoot Distance To Backsight When checked a distance will be measured to each shot to the backsight When unchecked only the angles are measured _ Do Not Shoot Reverse Distances _ Enable Automatic Repetition Shooting Sequence Repetition d aTr M Do Not Shoot Reverse Distances When checked distances are not measured during reverse shots M Enable Automatic Repetition When checked all remaining shots after the first shot to the backsight and foresight will occur automatically when using a motorized instrument Shooting Sequence specifies the order that the shots are taken from the following options e BS gt FS FS gt BS Backsight Foresight flop Foresight Backsight e BS gt FS gt BS gt FS Backsight Foresight flop Backsight Foresight e BS BS gt FS FS Backsight flop Backsight Foresight flop Foresight e FS FS gt BS BS Foresight flop Foresight Backsight flop Backsight e FS gt BS BS gt FS Foresight Backsight flop Backsight Foresight R 51 Survey Pro Reference Manual e FS gt BS gt FS gt BS Foresight Backsight flop Foresight Backsight e BS BS gt FS FS Backsight flop Backsight flop Foresight flop Foresight fl
67. amp Tapping amp Cancel will return to the previous screen without saving the changes Note if lt End gt is selected in the list the button will change to an lt Append button to indicate that additional points will be appended to the end of the list R 62 Job Menu Screen Four Add Edit Curve The fourth screen is used to modify a selected polyline segment that occurs between two points A horizontal vertical and or spiral curve can be applied to the polyline segment Adding a Horizontal Curve Enli Add Edit Curve Dr eo A Al Tap the Arc Spiral tab Curve must be set to Arc to enter a horizontal curve gt Delta gt Degree Arc Degree Chord allows you to specify the radius of the curve using a variety of methods Turn specifies if the curve turns toward the Right or Left as you occupy the initial point and face the end point Arc specifies if the arc of the curve is Small less than 180 or Large greater than 180 Adding a Spiral Tap the Arc Spiral tab Curve must be set to Spiral to enter a spiral curve Radius is the radius of the spiral curve The same radius of the circular curve adjacent to the spiral Length is the length of the spiral measured along the curve from the TS to the SC Turn specifies if the spiral curve turns to the Right or Left as you occupy the initial point and face the end point Direction specifies if the curve ru
68. and the Increment value 1 the Design Point is advanced to the OCC 1 HI 3 20 BS O 00 00 next existing point Height of Rod is the length of the rod Backsight accesses the Backsight Setup screen Page R 114 Solve gt takes you to the second Stake Points screen where the distance and direction to the design point is displayed see below Backsight i accesses the Stakeout Settings screen Page R 45 Stake Points Screen Two Design point displays the name of the design point that was entered in the first screen Description displays the description assigned to the design point Angle Right is the horizontal angle to turn to face the design point Horz distance is the horizontal distance from the occupy point to the design point R 270 Stakeout Menu Vert Distance is the vertical distance from the occupy point to the design point EG stake Points 4 9 41 ZE to Rod is the zenith angle required to face the prism Design Point over the design point 2 as Circle Zero is used to modify the circle on the total From Gun to Design Point station so that the angle right reading will be zero when Angle Right it is facing toward the design point which can sometimes 3703851 ili be easier than turning to an obscure angle value When ae this button is tapped the following actions will occur vert Dist 4 744 1 Anew backsight circle value is computed sent to gere G the i
69. are 1 1 on the Next erid because the grid is scaled to the ground Key in coordinates to define origin Ground Coordinates Origin is where you select what point to use as the origin of the ground coordinate system relative to the origin of the mapping plane zone You can choose to e Origin at mapping plane origin ground coordinate scale factor will be applied from the origin of the mapping plane zone e Pick point to define origin ground coordinate scale factor will be applied from a point selected from the job e Key in coordinates to define origin ground coordinate scale factor will be applied from a location entered by the user Ground Coordinates Key In Origin Survey Projection Mapping Plane Ground Next gt The Ground Coordinates Key In Origin screen is used to input the location of the ground coordinates origin This screen is used when you select Key in coordinates to define origin on the Setup screen R 221 Survey Pro Reference Manual Project Location is where you enter the local point from Ee at 4 114s which the ground coordinate scale factor is to be applied project Location Coordinate Type Local LLH Coordinate Type is where you select the type of coordinates to enter You can use WGS84 geodetic local geodetic or grid coordinates This choice will affect the Latitude fields displayed below North Latitude is where you enter the northing Height T latitude of th
70. by the Ntrip service you pick at rover setup time Elevation Cutoff is where you set the elevation cutoff for satellite tracking This value will be set in the receiver the next time you configure it as a base rover or static receiver Data Modem Seitings The Data Modem card is used to view and configure the settings for the modem used to transmit RTK base corrections or receiver RTK rover corrections The data modem card is not used when your Receiver Mode is set to Post Processing HJ Rx Settings Er a 9 19 Data Modem IF Modem aaa Serial Port Parity Baudrate 9600 Serial Port Parity Mone Serial i 1 Configure Serial Port Modem Settings Select Modem Channel 1 nnani iiaa E Configure Modem Receiver Data Modem General Receiver Data Modem General Oo 7 E Pac Crest or OEM Radio Cell Phone or IP Modem R 94 Job Menu GPS Module Data Modem is where you select the type of modem There will be several options here depending on your brand and model If the modem you are using is not in the list of known devices you can choose Generic Serial to set the communication parameters to work with just about any external data modem Serial Port displays the current settings for communication between the receiver and the modem This includes Baud Rate displays the baud rate the receiver will use to communicate with the modem Parity displays the parity the receiver will use to
71. checked a heading describing each column is inserted in the first row For example the following header could be inserted Name Northing Easting Elevation Description lt Back returns to the previous screen Next gt opens the second screen R 24 File Menu Export TXT Coordinates Screen Two E Export Coordinates amp Name Northing Easting Elevation Description C Name Easting Morthing Elevation Description amp Mame Latitude Longitude Height Description C Mame Longitude Latitude Height Description Select the desired order and format for the resulting TXT file from the list of options Finish exports the selected points to the TXT file Export CSV Coordinates This routine is identical to the Export TXT Coordinates routine described above with the exception that the formatting for the exported file is automatically set to comma delimited and the extension for the file name will be CSV Export LandXML XML File Export Options Export polylines alignments and parcels Export polylines on the specified layer as parcels layer Ponts Export point description as Unlike the other export routines which only export points the LandXML export routine allows you to export points along with polylines and alignments Export polylines and alignments will export the points in the current project as well as any polylines and alignments If t
72. collected points you wish to make into GPS The first screen is used to select the job points you want control points An accurate MEE L E E theioo to merge with accurate NEE coordinates to convert to fle GPS location GPS control and select how you will enter the control 3 EE selected point source to get the accurate NEE To From From B To From opens the Select Point s screen where you Tap Points Tap Points vy can select points by specifying a point range Select a method to input the source for the accurate location of the GPS Tap Points opens a map view where you can select pen points by tapping them on the screen OPUS Solution Results txt file Select a method Is used to select from the following sources for accurate coordinates e OPUS Solution Results txt file e NGS Data Sheet txt file R 225 Survey Pro Reference Manual e Key In Coordinate Next gt Opens one of two possible screens depending on the choice made for the Select a Method field in the first screen Enter Control Coordinate OPUS or NGS Data Sheet The purpose of this screen is to pick a data sheet point or OPUS solution file to use as the control point source This is the second screen that appears when either OPUS Solution or NGS Data Sheet was selected in the first screen Point displays the name of the selected job point that the control point source will be merged into Search th
73. communicate with the modem Serial Port displays the serial port the receiver will use to communicate with the modem Note The following settings will vary depending on your choice of modem You may see one of the following Configure Serial Configure opens the Modem Serial Comms screen Page R 95 where you can change the settings for communication between the receiver and the data modem Modem Settings displays the settings last used by Survey Pro for this modem type This includes Channel Displays the last radio channel when applicable Sensitivity Displays the last radio sensitivity when applicable Mode Displays the last radio base mode when applicable Configure Modem Establishes communication with the radio firmware and opens the Radio Settings screen Page R 96 where you can change the radio channel and sensitivity settings Select Modem Allows you to select an existing data modem configuration for your cell phone or IP modem IP modem is only available when RTK Rover is selected for the receiver Create Opens the Cell Phone Settings or IP Modem Settings screen Page R 98 or R 99 respectively depending on if Cell Phone or IP R 95 Survey Pro Reference Manual Modem is selected for the Data Modem where a new data modem configuration can be created Edit Opens the Cell Phone Settings or IP Modem Settings screen Page R 98 or R 99 respectively where the selected data modem configur
74. different firmware HDOP displays the Horizontal Dilution of Precision It is a measure of the geometrical quality of the solution DOP has no units and lower numbers indicate better solution geometry VDOP displays the Vertical Dilution of Precision It is a measure of the geometrical quality of the solution PDOP displays the Position Dilution of Precision It is a combination of HDOP VDOP and Time Dilution of Precision It will always be larger than HDOP and VDOP R 169 Survey Pro Reference Manual Cell Modem The Cell Modem card displays information about the radio communications and allows you to disconnect or reconnect a cell phone of IP modem connection Receiver mode see the Receiver Status card Page R 168 Modem Reception displays two values indicating the data modem signal quality This information is only displayed if the receiver is in rover mode GPS Status er a 11 51 Receiver Mode Salution Signal Latency displays the age of the differential Das ae cael correction used in the current GPS solution This value should be one second or less for good RTK solutions If this value is consistently greater than one second check the data modem link Reception displays the receiver s estimation of the percent quality of the radio link Dial Dials the cell phone or IP modem using the configuration set in the Cell Phone Settings or IP Modem perceiver Cell modem Sky view 1 lt gt Setti
75. for the alignment can be selected R 68 E Edit Alignment Start Mt Location E 5000 ft Eley oo a Start Station o 00 0 pop General E Edit Alignment Description Layer Feature lt None gt Attributes General Cancel Job Menu Edit Segment The Edit Segment screen is accessed anytime an existing horizontal or vertical segment is added or edited A variety of segment editing screens are possible depending on the type of segment being edited or created Each segment editor is discussed below Edit Segment Line Card E Edit Segment The Line card is used to add a straight horizontal line segment in the alignment Length is the horizontal length of the line M Make this segment tangent to previous When checked the specified line will be tangent to the ending tangent of the previous segment O Make this segment tangent to ania Note When making a new horizontal segment tangent razimuth Jp to the previous segment the new segment will appear in the Edit Alignment screen tagged with a P This means that if the previous horizontal segment is edited fare Spal st lt Ct RSC deleted where the orientation changes all subsequent horizontal segments that have the P tag will also be adjusted so they will remain tangent to the previous segments This does not hold true for vertical alignment segments Vertical segments will always begin
76. for the left and right sides of the road Rp Left Right is the specified left and right segment respectively to compute the hinge point Changes to these fields will be reflected in the V Map card graphic Fill Hinge Points cut Hinge Points Pick Segments Used For Fill Slope Lett Ditch Stake CP gt opens the next slope staking screen The Right following slope staking screens are identical to non road layout slope staking screens and are described starting on Page R 290 R 417 Survey Pro Reference Manual Road Station and Offset The Road Station and Offset routine allows you to take a shot toa prism that is positioned anywhere on the road and compute the details of where that point is located in relation to the road This information can then be compared to the data from a grade sheet Tap Road opens the Tap on a Road screen where you can tap on any road in the job to select it Name displays the name of the selected road PJ Road Station a 4 10 40 Begin Station displays the station assigned to the beginning of the road H End Station displays the final station in the road a viiel Use Station Equation When checked the current Mame Example station equation will be applied to the road Begin Station 0 00 000 End Station 34 78 540 Equation Settings opens the Station Equation screen E E Page R 421 where a station equation can be configured 1 ac
77. from a dropdown list Baud Rate Parity Serial Port is the serial port on the data collector used for communications with the total station Bluetooth can also be selected for wireless communication between the data collector and a compatible total station Baud Rate is the speed at which communication occurs with the total station This must match the baud rate configured within the total station Parity is the parity used for communication with the instrument This must match the parity setting configured within the total station PIN applicable only when using a supported total station is the Personal Identification Number that was entered in the total station These numbers must match for successful communications Bluetooth applicable only when using Bluetooth with a supported total station accesses the Bluetooth configuration screen that comes with the Bluetooth driver software where you can quickly check or change the virtual COM port and favorites Note See the User s Manual for more information on configuring Bluetooth with a supported total station R 38 Job Menu Defaults will set the Serial Port Baud Rate and Parity to their default values based on the selected total station Instrument Settings accesses the settings that are specific for the selected total station Send to Instrument applicable only to specific total stations will send the selected instrument settin
78. from a file that was previously loaded on the data collector Export saves the selected receiver profile to a file which can then be transferred to another data collector and then imported Receiver Setup or or Connect to Receiver Receiver Settings or Connect to Receiver Create Receiver The Receiver Setup screen is used to create or modify a cee receiver profile a an Name The name of the receiver to appear in your a known receiver list Model Brand The brand of this receiver ee ee Model The model of this receiver Lid SCOOT L Da Data Collector Port The data collector port used to Baud Rate 38400 h i communicate with the receiver Parity Odd oO 7 E R 91 Survey Pro Reference Manual Note Some receivers support Bluetooth wireless communication If the data collector is set to use Bluetooth then the next two settings are hidden Baud Rate the baud rate used for data collector to receiver communications Parity the parity used for data collector to receiver communication Defaults sets the communication parameters to the default for this brand and model Autodetect attempts to communicate with the receiver on each available COM port and at every available baud rate and parity If successful it will update the communication parameters to the discovered values This button only shows when your Data Collector Port is set to COM1 or COM2 Bluetooth
79. from the following options New Location e Automatically solve localization calibration 102 175 851 a 2 280 023 108 e Open the solve localization calibration wizard 79 227 44 33 0 e Solve the localization calibration later i Tap Finish to create the control lt Back This opens a prompt asking if you want to point Isted above and then take the reenter the control source for the selected point If Yes following action the control point source is cleared for the point and the Automatically solve calibration i revi reen i n If l he control poin previous screen 1s ope Nd we leave the control point source and go back to the selection screen Finish See the section on Finish below R 228 Survey Menu GPS Module Multiple Point Results This screen displays the values to be used to create the new GPS control points New GPS Control Points to be Created For all of the selected points this list box shows the new NEE location the existing LLH location and the existing NEE location PJ GPS Import Control 2 1 50 Show Details Shows the same details for the selected New GPS Control Points to be Created point as the Single Point Results screen shows described above CORV 347 675 050 7 471 557 80 er a eee Re Enter Clears the control point source for the selected point in the list box and returns to the previous screen lt Back Returns to the selection screen Tap Anish to crea
80. from the radius point to the curve e Delta is the deflection angle Degree Arc is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft arc length e Degree Chord is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft chord length M Store RP When checked the computed radius point will be stored with the name specified here Solve computes the location of the radius point Layout accesses the Curve Layout screen Page R 377 Traverse accesses the Traverse On Curve screen Page R 382 R 375 Survey Pro Reference Manual Results Radius is the distance from the radius point to the curve Length is the arc length Chord is the chord length Deg Arc is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft arc length Deg Chord is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft chord length Delta is the deflection angle Tangent is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI External is the minimum distance between the PI and the curve Mid Ord is the distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curve s length Segment is the area between the arc length and the chord Sector is the area between the arc length and the two edge radii Fillet is the area between the arc length and the tangents R 376 Curve Menu Line Tangent to Circles Will compute the location of a line that is tangent to the specified sides of two specified circles En Line Tangent
81. i i SIE using basemaps Corvalis2 SIF Yes Corvallis 1 SIF Yes The main portion of the screen lists the names of all the basemaps that have been added to the current job The other columns display if each basemap is visible and the number of elements in the vector basemaps Add allows you to select additional basemaps for the current job Edit opens the Edit Basemap screen described below Move un where you can preview or edit the selected basemap Raster basemaps cannot be edited Remove removes the selected basemap from the list The source file will not be removed Move Up will move the selected basemap up one level in the list Consult the User s manual for information on how to manage basemaps Move Down will move the selected basemap down one level in the list R 442 Line Color e Fill Color Miscellaneous Screens Edit Basemaps From the Map View tap ZA The Edit Basemaps screen is used to preview the selected basemap and if it is a vector basemap the way the basemap appears can be changed Er ax 4 53 The Preview page shows how the selected basemap will look in the map view Visible When checked the selected basemap will be visible in the map view The General page is only available when a vector basemap is selected and is used to customize the way the basemap appears in the map view Line Color is used to select the l
82. is appended to the end of the list Change to is available only when the screen is accessed with the Change Design Point button This is used to stake the point currently selected in the point list E Edit Point List R 276 Stakeout Menu Stake to Line The Stake to Line screen allows you to locate any location in relation to a predefined line The line can be defined by two points a point and direction a polyline or the centerline of an alignment Distance direction and cut fill information is provided so the rod can locate the line by traveling the shortest possible distance a perpendicular offset to the line gt Define Line Polyline When set to shown here a line can be defined by two points or a peine Geert aline point and a direction When set to Polyline shown H Define Line ee below the line is defined by an existing polyline or Start Point Mae fe alignment rot ed Start Point defines the first point of the line to be staked Begin Station hd gt Direction f defines the second point on the line or the direction of the line to be staked respectively HF Stake to Line er x 2 51 E Bie See ewes Begin Station defines the station associated with the Start Point Tap Line displays a map of all the polylines and alignments in the current job Simply tap the line that you want to stake to and then tap amp Define Select a
83. location 3 To prevent errors if this button is used the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog A circle zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked Note The button is not available when using a robotic total station lt Back returns to the previous screen Stake gt accesses the fourth Stake Line and Offset screen which is identical to the third Stake Points screen described on Page R 272 Note Tap the graphic portion of the screen for an expanded view Screen Summary Screen One is used to define the primary line used to determine the location of the line to be staked and the station associated with the Start Point Screen Two is used to define the offset distance and location the station to be staked and the station interval Screen Three provides the distance and direction information to the current station to be staked Screen Four is used to stake the current station R 301 Survey Pro Reference Manual Stake Curve and Offset Curve and offset The Stake Curve and Offset screen is used to stake stations on a curve or at an offset to it at fixed station intervals PC Point is the starting point of the curve point of Stake Curve And Offset curvature Define a Curve PC Tangent Azm PC Tangent Brg defines the azimuth rcrot fe M or bearing respectively of the tangent at the PC Point Meore A Degree Are Degree C
84. modes When in Aim Instrument mode tapping anywhere within the video image will turn the total station to that location When in Define Scan Frame mode you can create a scan frame by tapping on the screen R 142 Brightness F Contrast d White Balance Daylight T Survey Menu Camera 20 Brightness Contrast opens a dialog box where the brightness contrast and white balance can be adjusted Take Photo Takes a digital photo and stores the photo to a file See Video Settings on Page 162 for details on configuring the settings for this feature 1 Take Panoramic Photo This will take a photograph within the current polygonal or rectangular scan frame When a large scan frame is defined multiple photos of the entire area are taken with minimal overlap The photos can later be automatically stitched together and viewed or used for texture maps in RealWorks The individual images are stored in the current job folder with a unique series name Scan opens the second Video Scan screen and starts the scanning process Colored blocks will appear on the screen for each new point scanned The color will vary depending on the distances measured and the reflectivity of each point ol Pause pauses the scanning process Tapping again will continue scanning a Stop cancels the scanning process and prompts you if you want to save the partially scanned data or delete it Settings Accesses the Video Scan
85. names _ Parallel M Store Pt 1 2 When checked will store a point at the adie of the end point s of the computed boundary ine Input Results Map OoOo T e gt Azimuth gt Sealy defines the direction of the boundary sides with lengths that are not yet known Results Point 1 2 Displays the coordinate of the end points of the computed boundary line Total Area is the total area of the boundary Plot Area is the area enclosed by the pre defined fixed boundary lines Difference is the difference between the Total Area and the Plot Area R 365 Survey Pro Reference Manual HD VD to SD ZA The HD VD to SD ZA screen will convert a vertical and horizontal distance to an equivalent slope distance and zenith angle Horz Dist is the horizontal distance from the occupy point to the foresight point F HD YD to SD ZA et q 2 32 Vert Dist is the vertical distance from the occupy point to the foresight point Hore Dist oooi HI is the distance that the total station is above the Teuge oooi iy ground HI 5 20 ift HR is the length of the rod fr Oe ha opens the Smart Target options Page R 444 M Earth Curvature Adjust When checked the resulting zenith angle and slope distance will account for the curvature of the earth and refraction Solve computes the equivalent slope distance and zenith angle from the data entered _ Earth Curvature Adjust Solve R
86. of points or a list of points that define a line that can include curves depending on where the screen is accessed from Point Range Examples of how to enter different lists of er points are displayed in the lower portion of the Point 7 screen See Point Lists in the User s Manual Points fram 7 to 9b for more information 7 9 15 20 30 Combined Ranges Curves Point Range is the area where you enter your 7 to 9 through 8 int list using the same format as shown in AE PRS LOr P 8 7 lt 100 LL39 7 tog radius 100 L or R Lors the examples Note Spaces in a point list are ignored Once the list is entered tap amp to return to the previous screen R 438 Miscellaneous Screens Map View from the command bar or from various screens Main map view without Main map view with basemaps basemaps Many screens provide access to a map view which shows data from the current job It can be accessed from the Main Menu in the command bar with the t button or any screen that has a button Some map views display additional information such as a vertical profile Tip You can pan around your map by dragging your finger or stylus across the screen E Zoom Extents Button will change the scale of the screen so that all the points in the current job will fit on the screen Zoom In Button will zoom the current screen in by approximately 25 R 439 Survey Pro Reference Manual Zoom Out Button wi
87. opens the Save As screen where the current alignment can be saved to a RD5 file Edit Alignment Edit or New The Edit Alignment screen is used to edit an existing alignment or create a new one Edit Alignment Screen HAL Tab The HAL Horizontal Alignment tab in the Edit Alignment screen is used to enter or modify only the horizontal details of an alignment Insert opens the Edit Segment screen where a new horizontal alignment segment can be inserted prior to the selected segment Edit opens the Edit Segment screen where the selected horizontal segment can be modified Remove removes the selected segment and automatically joins the next segment with the previous segment E Edit Alignment Az 0 00 00 L 100 0 ae A7 P 0 00 00 R 10 AziPy 45 00 00 R 1 Remove Sta 1 00 000 Azi 0 00 00 EG 100 Feet Hal vAL PoB Genera Note The station and azimuth at the beginning of the selected horizontal segment are displayed at the bottom of the screen R 66 Job Menu Edit Alignment Screen VAL Tab The VAL Vertical ALignment tab in the Edit Alignment screen is used to enter or modify only the vertical details of an alignment Note The total horizontal length of the VAL must be equal to or ereater than the total horizontal length of the HAL when the alignment is used for road layout E Edit Alignment Insert opens the Edit Segment scre
88. optionally store the SC or ST and spiral PI points E Traverse on Spiral Radius is the radius of the circular curve Radius hoot s Length is the length along the spiral curve from TS to emt isso fw se i gt si isle I TS CS Point is the existing point associated with the e p27 Il te Son ey O T5 gt 5C O CS gt ST Right O Left gt Bearing is the tangent direction at the TS or CS point gt lt _ Store ST b5 M gt lt O Store PI e M TS gt SC specifies that the curve starts at the tangent to spiral and ends at the spiral to curve CS gt ST specifies that the curve starts at the curve to Results s Map spiral and ends at the spiral to tangent A Right Left specifies is the curve turns toward the right or left as you face the spiral from the TS or CS M Store SC ST When checked saves a point for the computed SC point M Store PI When checked saves a point for the computed spiral PI R 391 Survey Pro Reference Manual Results Tangent In the tangent direction entering the spiral at the TS or CS Tangent Out the tangent direction exiting the spiral at the SC or ST X of Throw is the distance along the tangent where a perpendicular line intersects with the radius point Y of Throw is the minimum distance between the tangent and the extended circular curve X is the distance from the TS to the SC along the tangent Y is distance from the SC t
89. or contains invalid characters the data will be stored to the active layer amp On different layers by groups Use group name as layer name Next gt opens the second configuration screen Import polylines alignments and parcels When this is checked polylines alignments and parcels will be imported as well as the points When unchecked only the points will be 7 HD Import Land ML Fi 4 x 10 00 imported k I mport parcels to the specified layer When this is aa polylines alignments and checked imported parcels will be stored to the selected Points will always be imported layer If unchecked parcels will be stored to the layer O Hi parcels to the specified specified in the previous screen p p E T For more information on how parcels are imported consult the User s Manual Point and Line Descriptions Point and Line Descriptions You can select what i Foe eee information to use as the description for imported lines Use desc As Point Description and points in the corresponding two fields j Lines can either be assigned the name or description from the source file and points can either be assigned the description or code from the source file R 20 File Menu Back returns to the previous screen Import imports the specified data into the current project A results screen will open listing the details of the imported data Confirm Point Replace If a point being imported has
90. point setup mode You can enter an existing point or enter a new point name to start this survey from a new autonomous base setup Note When this screen is used in one point setup mode the one job file point is automatically used as the base point and you use this screen to enter antenna height When this screen is used to configure base position in Survey Pro after remote base setup from the rover then this screen is used to display the base point name and antenna height received from the data modem link Antenna displays antenna setup for this receiver It will be in one of three states R 179 Survey Pro Reference Manual e Last Antenna for this receiver is displayed when you have not yet set the base in Survey Pro This value is the previous antenna measurement you used with this receiver e Selected Antenna is displayed when you have entered new antenna measurements using the Receiver Antenna screen Page R 181 e Antenna Set is displayed when you have already set the base in Survey Pro and this receiver was used as the base Measured is where you enter the height of the antenna measured to the location specified on the Receiver Antenna screen Page R 181 Offset displays the vertical and or slant offset values for the selected antenna Entering antenna offsets is explained on the Receiver Antenna screen Page R 181 Setup HR opens the Receiver Antenna screen Page R 181 where the details of the base ante
91. profile R 36 instrument settings R 36 instrument stakeout R 273 international datums 220 intersection 162 R 353 inverse point to line R 345 point to location R 349 point to multiple points R 348 point to point R 344 point to polyline R 346 J job backup restore R 26 information R 86 NEW omoran aa R 9 OPEM anakna R 14 Open NnewW sosseseseeeceseeese R 8 job settings ccceeceeeeees 12 I 4 Key IN ZONG anaa a 240 datum from databaseR 220 datum rotation and scaleR 219 datum translation R 219 ellipse R 218 mapping plane parameters PE EA E R 217 oblique mercator settingsR 217 reS Snn R 220 Lambert Conformal Conic224 Lambert zones 06 A 2 lat Ma Nt cscs Sotaecsseesnestes 222 layers for staking DTM R 79 manage c 2 eet sien wad R 85 level loop benchmark R 262 ClOSC E EEEN R 264 create tus fo5chs debe ve tees R 256 Method ccceeeeee R 40 10 0 2 ee R 257 notes settings R 258 procedure c0ecce eee 193 remote control R 268 Select ccsccescseeees R 256 shot results R 260 SNOT Sasiia R 260 side shot 008 R 261 stakeout eee R 262 level settings 06 R 48 leveling eccerre 189 leveling adjustment R 266 line and offset R 299 R 337 line ta
92. profile Activate activates the selected instrument profile GeoLock opens the GeoLock Settings screen Page R 165 Delete deletes the selected instrument profile Import imports an instrument profile from an instrument profile file that was previously loaded on the data collector Export saves the selected instrument profile to a file which can then be transferred to another data collector and then imported Warning Performing a hard reset on the data collector will result in all the user created instrument profiles to be deleted It is recommended that all instrument profiles be exported to files so in the event of a hard reset they can be recovered using the Import routine R 37 Survey Pro Reference Manual Instrument Settings Screen Two The second Instrument Settings screen opens whenever a new instrument profile is being created or when an existing profile is being edited The options available on this screen will vary slightly depending on the total station model selected Name is the name of the instrument profile being FFl instrument Setup lt P 4x 11 11 created or changed This is the name that appears in the list on the first Instrument Settings screen Brand is where you specify the manufacturer of the a Lanne instrument that you are using from a dropdown list Serial Port COM 1 bl Model is where you specify the model of the instrument ee that you are using
93. reflectorless total station where a direct measurement to the point is not a Foresight 734 m possible but two points on two intersecting lines can be Description shot Point 1 of Line 1 Angle Right O 00 0O deg Foresight is the name of the point that will be stored zenith a0 00 00 deg Slope Dist 100 000 feet Description is the description for the point that will be Point 2 of Line 1 stored etalk HR 0 000 HR 0 000 shows that no rod height will be used with Shoot Line 1 EE this routine since all shots are direct reflectorless OCC 1 HI 5 000 BS O 00 oo Input E Results Close Settings Shoot Line 1 will prompt you to take two shots on Line 1 which intersects with Line 2 at the point you want to Survey Pro store Shooting point 1 of line 1 Press any key when ready Note Each shot for a line can be in any location on the same line Shot 1 can be to the left or the right of Shot 2 Sp Ling err 2 1 Sols Shoot Line 2 will prompt you to take two shots on Line 2 2 Ki which intersects with Line 1 at the point you want to store Target Note After all shots are done the computed elevation is displayed for the new point You can either enter a different elevation or tap amp to accept the computed elevation Corner amp 2 Lines Backsight accesses the Backsight Setup screen Page R 114 where the current backsight can be modified R 134 Survey Menu
94. result in the spiral curve Close Settings itself being staked gt V Offset will result in the elevations for the design points to be adjusted by the value entered here and will change the cut fill values accordingly Design elevations will be lower when is selected and higher when U is selected gt Grade specifies a slope from the spiral curve to the curve that is being staked When this is a non zero value the elevation for the staked points will increasingly differ from the corresponding design elevations on the spiral curve as the Offset value increases Height of rod is the length of the rod Backsight accesses the Backsight Setup screen Page R 114 lt Back returns to the previous screen Solve gt accesses the third screen described next Note A motorized total station will automatically turn toward the design point after pressing Solve gt depending on the configuration of the Stakeout Settings screen Page R 45 R 307 Survey Pro Reference Manual Stake Spiral and Offset Screen Three Station displays the current station that is being Stake Spiral And Offset staked Station 0 00 000 H Offset displays the offset distance of the spiral curve H Offset 2 000 R being staked from the specified spiral curve and if it is to CME eee R ie From Gun to Design Point on the Right or Left side of the specified spiral curve angie Right Angle Right is the h
95. s cssscsssssseessssseessesseesseeseesseessesseesseeseesseeseees 105 SECC a 106 Survey M n s a aa aaa aa aa 113 BaCKSI ONE oU Daska R 114 REDEUT OF SNO sn 125 VEU DIG SIG CSNOUS onnsa naa a aan 127 Radial SI CSSINOUS sannana a wcthigiets 128 Distance Offset coca ere diecaecnested ome neecesnenenteemacdecmceeeienen tices 129 Horizontal Angle Offset ccsssssssssssesssseesssrensssrenesneees 130 Vertical Angle OMS wswisienarsierivariwatanvnwadaene 131 AUO CO E Aai 132 CORNER e 2 LINES aran EN 134 COME GANGE eia N 135 Coma oetans Wr Ae OA PE 136 Corner amp PANG vrcdccresicncclasdcchndsicictnasdactenaisdecchaticccstmasdectacnize 137 SUIT ACE SCN aaa ti saint itech ace 138 VIdeo yee G s een nne nC eunITET a nT Paneer OC 141 SHIOOE From TWO EIS sicccaites tee ite seht na 145 PR Ol OG Se trscnde er sent cut cutae a tants aaiae 146 PRESOG OM an e a 147 REMOTE EV all OM serran ae a 150 Ga GS POIN NP ne nea eric a ee a ee rc 151 Solar ODSEV AU OM eanan TN 152 Rerote Contolera exer nie tactei dee cartels 157 Survey Mientl G PS iissa pkan ntcntvecdecwetancdancneedwencsdecdausscecusnsbucus 167 ORS SES aae E hoists E 168 start GPS SUNN OY rencer e a 174 Daa Colledion te mreener ner eer eee 187 CONt Ol POIN S ecane iA netics 192 POSE ProOceSSI NO oaea a 195 Base S D esera a e ea eee matesntetins 200 ROVE SUD eana o anette ineaneenacsneateataie 201 PO UON ainena A AER 201 Remote El CV AU OM erea ai 224 MPOT GPS C ONION ssissi sicat
96. scan is performed for viewing within RealWorks along with the video scan data R 144 Survey Menu Shoot From Two Ends The Shoot From 2 Ends screen is used to provide more accurate vertical closure to a traverse The routine requires that a foresight point is shot but it is not stored until after it is occupied and another shot is taken to the previous occupy point The coordinates for the foresight point are computed from an average of data gathered at each occupy point Foresight is the name given to the next stored point Hg Shoot From 2 Ends r 2 17 Description is the description given to the next stored J point Description Number of Sets Number of Sets is the desired number of sets required HR e when shooting each foresight You must select at least one set HR is the length of the rod Rae opens the Smart Target options Page R 444 Backsight accesses the Backsight Setup screen Page a il ULES eee ree R 114 where the current backsight can be modified Input ES Resuts Es map Traverse will prompt you to shoot the Foresight point x eo sf amp J After each set is performed the Move To Other End dialog box will open and prompt you to set up on the new point and enter a new instrument and rod height The New Occupy Point dialog box Page R 122 will open and inform you of the updated points i is a shortcut to the Surveying and Repetition Settings screens Page R 44 and R 51 respec
97. set in the receiver Remaining displays the time remaining in the current session if a session is in progress This field only shows when your receiver times sessions counting down Elapsed displays the time elapsed since this receiver was put into static mode if a session is in progress This field only shows when your receiver times sessions counting up Free Memory displays the amount of memory remaining on the disk where post processing data is stored This will usually be the receiver s built in memory or the receiver s removable memory card For some brands and models this may be disk space on the data collector HDOP VDOP Satellites Used Satellites Locked See the Receiver card Page R 168 Sky View The Sky View card displays a plot of the satellites tracked and the elevation mask boundary R 171 Survey Pro Reference Manual SV Used SV Lock See the Receiver Card Page R 168 Elev Mask Displays the elevation mask currently set on the General card of the Receiver Settings screen Note If the receiver setup has not yet been performed the elevation mask will not be displayed Also if you have changed the elevation mask setting and have not yet reconfigured this receiver the value you see on this display will be the value from the settings and not the value the receiver is currently using Sat Info The Sat Info card displays signal quality information for the satellites used by the receiver an
98. static mode depending on settings and will calculate the most precise position for the staked point 3D View opens the 3D View screen consult the conventional surveying Reference manual where a 3D view of the DTM can be viewed from any angle as well as cut fill information for the current location Note The 3D View button is only available when Generate TIN w Staked Points is checked in the previous screen and at least three stake points have been stored Store stores a point at the current rover location with the point name shown in the St Pt field and the description in the Desc field Also advances the St Pt to the next available point name St Pt is the point name that will be assigned to the next stored point Desc is the description that will be assigned to the next stored point HR is the height of the rod Data shows the northing easting and elevation of the current rover location Result shows the computed elevation of the DTM at the current location and the cut or fill necessary to bring the elevation at the current location to the elevation of the DTM at the current location R 341 Survey Pro Reference Manual C L shows the current station and offset information for the rover location relative to the selected centerline The type of line segment Data Result CL in the polyline at the current station is also displayed This card is Station 0 62 048 only available if the With
99. station toward the design point lt Back returns to the previous screen Stake Next gt returns you to the second Offset Staking screen without storing a stake point where the Design point is advanced by the Increment value i4 lstake Out Point E 7 8 55 Offset Staking Screen Six ee This screen is used to describe the stake point before itis Description stored and select if the Results screen should be how Feite GEO displayed described next Point is the point name for the stake point being stored Description is the description for the stake point being stored The default description is the station side and distance from the centerline for the design point Show Results on OK When this checkbox is checked a Results screen described next will open after tapping from this screen R 286 Stakeout Menu Note This screen will not appear if the Write Cut Sheet Data Only No Store Point checkbox is checked in the Stakeout Settings screen although the Results screen will still appear if the Show Results on OK checkbox was never unchecked from this screen It is checked by default Offset Staking Stakeout Results This screen shows detailed cut fill values which may be needed when marking a road or offset stake PRE Stakeout Resull a EA T Center Offset 2 000 Right Close returns you to the second Offset Staking Station 0 00 000 ae screen where the Design poi
100. the data collector in server mode where all file transfers are controlled from a PC running either TDS Survey Link or TDS ForeSight Tapping will disconnect server mode Send File will open the Open dialog box where the file that you want to send can be selected Once selected the file is sent from the data collector to the specified device A progress bar will be displayed R 31 Survey Pro Reference Manual that indicates how much of the file has been transferred Tapping will stop the file transfer Note The routine should be initiated shortly after issuing the receive command on the other device Receive File allows you to receive a file from another device This should be tapped prior to issuing the Send command on the other device Tapping will stop the file transfer Register Modules The Register Modules screen is used to upgrade the Survey Pro software Refer to the User s Manual for more information on registering additional modules If no modules have been registered Survey Pro willrun Po ooo 2 y aoe in Demo Mode When running in Demo Mode users are Serial Number able to test and use every routine available in the C513A00930 software Although Demo Mode limits all jobs to no Modules _ Yf Registered more than 25 points Ifa job exists on the data collector nar that contains more than 25 points it cannot be opened Pro while running in Demo Mode Robotics Basic GPS Regis
101. the selected point Feature displays the feature assigned to the selected Description point which can be modified using the button eve Attributes accesses the Point Feature Attributes screen one lly Page R 59 where the feature attributes for the point Feature can be modified lt None gt General Location Geodetic R 58 Job Menu Point Feature Attributes Edit Points Edit General Attributes The Point Feature Attributes screen is available from the above path or whenever a point is stored when Prompt for Attributes is checked in the Surveying Settings screen Page R 44 M Point Feature Attribute Recently Used Monument Type EG Edit Point 380 ef 4 7 56 Northing 5006 995505 ift Easting 5001 781846 ift Elevation 105 44009 ift General Location Geodetic Recently Used when checked will arrange the order of the available features so the most recently used features are listed first Any feature in the current feature file can be selected from the corresponding drop down list The content displayed in the main portion of the window fully depends on the attribute information associated with the selected feature Note Feature files are created using the Survey Attribute Manager included with TDS Survey Link Version 7 2 or later Edit Point Location Job Edit Points Edit Location The Location card is used to modify the northing eastin
102. to a a Inverse Point to PolyLine polyline segment is computed i i CO Inverse Point Elo o Begin Station is the starting station assigned to the Begin Station ooo e beginning of the polyline which is used to compute the Station in the results caro a Polyline to Inverse ta ee Line Tap Polyline allows you to tap an existing polyline from To From a map view Editor accesses the Polyline Editor Page R 62 where a new polyline can be created or an existing polyline can be modified Tap Points rovides a map view where you can tap an p P P y P any Input Results Map a existing points to create a temporary polyline To From provides point selection by entering point names lt _ Store Point o R 346 Inverse Menu M Store Point When checked will store the first solution where a perpendicular offset intersects with a polyline using the specified point name If additional solutions are found the following solutions will be stored using consecutive point names Solve will compute the distance and direction of the offset from the known point perpendicular to the polyline Note There is no solution if a perpendicular offset does not occur within the extents of any selected polyline segments Results Station is the station along the polyline where the offset occurs starting from the Begin station Offset is the horizontal distance of the offset Offset is indica
103. to send or read the instrument s circle optionally confirm the backsight location and optionally store a new point for the backsight location Note The Backsight Solved screen will not open when the Use Classic Backsight Setup checkbox is checked in the Survey Settings screen Page R 44 R 115 Survey Pro Reference Manual Set Backsight Circle Once the circle value of the FSlpacksight Solved fh M 1 43 instrument has been set or read the symbol will be a l Set Backsight Circle replaced with a BS Point 42 Store Backsight Point This button is only available BS Direction 359 59 55 when the backsight is defined by a direction instead of a Bs circle Send Circle Read Circle point and is used if you want to take a shot and store a point for the current backsight Once stored the button will be replaced by the new point name Check Backsight _ BS Circle This is the horizontal angle to set in the instrument This will usually be zero but when Survey with True Azimuths is enabled in the Surveying Settings screen Page R 44 this will be the computed azimuth to the current backsight Remote When connected to a robotic total station this opens the Remote Control screen Page R 157 to remotely aim the total station This is particularly useful when using a fixed backsight with a Smart Target because the Remote Control screen will then automatically reflect the prism configu
104. to that segment extremity Road Slope Stake only Note The Resulty button is only available from the Store Catch Point screen Screen 5 below when using GPS or Remote mode which is accessed after tapping Store gt The button described below selects which information is displayed on the screen from the following options e gt Vertical Map displays a cross sectional view at the current station Note When you tap a map view an expanded view of the same map will fill the screen Note The Vertical Map will show an X at the location of each previous shot This can be useful in determining if the current terrain will never intersect the slope no catch point e gt Horizontal Map displays an overhead view of the job gt Shot Data displays the shot data for the latest shot The button described below selects the type of slope that will be used between the catch point and hinge point from the following options R 291 Survey Pro Reference Manual e Automatic Slope selects the slope that is nearest to the current rod position e gt Force CUT Slope forces all computations to be based on a cut slope e gt Force FILL Slope forces all computations to be based on a fill slope Topo SS will store the last shot taken as a side shot HR is the rod height w opens the Smart Target options Page R 444 lt Back returns to the previous screen Store gt opens
105. type Description is the description for the point that is being stored This field appears prior to storing the new point Note A residual is the difference between a single measurement and the average of all the measurements Note If a residual exceeds the tolerances set in the Repetition Settings screen Page R 51 that value is displayed in bold text R 125 Survey Pro Reference Manual HA zal sD allows you to replace the current repetition data for the corresponding button with new data Once tapped the repetition data for the tapped button will be deleted You will then need to perform all sets defined in the Number of Sets field again where the new data will replace the corresponding deleted data All will open a screen that asks if you want to add an additional set to those already done or start over Toss will delete the corresponding set that has the worst residual Note A set can only be tossed when three or more sets have been collected Side Shot will use the repetition data gathered to create a new side shot point The foresight point will automatically advance to the next available point Traverse will use the repetition data gathered to create a new traverse point The occupy point will automatically update to the previous foresight point and the backsight point will automatically update to the previous occupy point Backsight accesses the Backsight Setup screen
106. vertical parts of the alignment Any location on an alignment where a change occurs is called a node An alignment can contain straight sections grades horizontal vertical and spiral curves The horizontal and vertical portions of an alignment are defined separately and independently but they are both combined within the software to create a single alignment with horizontal and vertical characteristics Add Edit Alignments Job Edit Alignments or Roads Edit Alignments The Add Edit Alignments screen displays a list of all the existing alignments in the current job The right Description POB Attributes portion of the screen shows a graphic of the horizontal se Right Curve PT 7 NO and vertical portion of the selected alignment M Add Edit Alignments New opens the Edit Alignment screen where a new alignment can be created from scratch Edit opens the Edit Alignment screen where the details of the selected alignment can be edited Ra Delete is used to delete the selected alignment SS Ad The power button accesses the following routines H y e Create Points opens the Create Points screen Page R 435 where points can be stored that coincide with the selected alignment R 65 Survey Pro Reference Manual e Import RD5 File opens the Open screen and lists all the RD5 alignment files in the Jobs directory Select the desired file and tap amp e Export RD5 File
107. will appear before any new point is stored from only the routines under the Survey menu Page R 113 This also requires that a feature file be selected from the Files Settings card described above M Detect Duplicate Shots When checked a prompt will appear before attempting to store a second shot to the same location This helps to catch when robotic total stations have lost lock while surveying The distance tolerances set in the Repetition Settings screen are used in determining when two shots are at the same location M Adjust for Earth Curvature Refraction when checked the elevations for new points are adjusted to compensate for the curvature of the earth and refraction M Survey with True Azimuths automates the process of adjusting the circle on the total station when traversing so that you can survey with azimuths rather than horizontal angles see Page R 122 R 44 Pig Settings B lt 4 6 50 Job Menu M Use Scale Factor when checked horizontal distances to all new points will be scaled by the factor entered here Elevations are not affected This defaults to unchecked when a new job is created Compute Scale this button and the following item can only be used with a job that contains geodetic coordinates and a map projection has been configured while in RTK GPS mode This button will compute a scale factor based on the current map projection M Prompt to Reset Scale on New Setups if checked when a ma
108. will enclose the boundary with a specified area using the Hinge Method or the Parallel Method The Hinge Method computes the location of the side of a boundary that can pivot on a fixed point The Parallel Method computes the location of one side of a four sided boundary where the computed side is parallel to a stationary side of the boundary The top left field is used to enter the desired area of the specified boundary In the next field select the units entered from the dropdown list 4 4 hinge i fe 3 2 3 Parallel Method Hinge Method Hinge solves the boundary using the Hinge Method when selected Parallel solves the boundary using the Parallel Method when selected Tap Polyline allows you to tap an existing polyline from a map view to define the fixed sides of the boundary R 364 COGO Menu Note a boundary has two fixed sides and one side defined by a direction when using the Hinge Method It has one fixed side and two sides defined by a direction when using the Parallel Method E Predetermined Area Editor accesses the Polyline Editor Page R 62 where a new polyline can be created or an existing polyline can ee Line be modified To From From Tap Points rovides a map view where you can ta ma pe j 4 j any existing points to define the fixed sides of the gt Store Pt boundary To From provides point selection by entering point singe
109. with a robotic total station The Remote Control screen is described on Page R 157 All shots performed while trigonometric leveling with a robotic total station are performed from the Remote Control screen R 268 Stakeout Menu The Stakeout Menu contains a variety of stakeout routines including offset staking See Page R 329 for a description of the Stakeout Menu if running in GPS mode A Stake Points Stake List of Points Stake to Line Offset Staking Slope Staking Point Slope Staking Line and Offset Curve and Offset Spiral and Offset Show Station Store Offset Points Stake DTM Station Staking Define a Location Where is Next Point Note The stakeout routines behave differently when running in remote control mode For a description of this special mode refer to Page R 157 and the Remote Control section of the User s Manual R 269 Survey Pro Reference Manual Stake Points Stake Points The Stake Points screen allows you to stake a single point or a series of points Design Point is the name of the first point that you Be one te want to stake Increment When advancing to the next point the point F 77 Point we number is incremented by the value entered here A Increment negative integer can be entered to have point numbers ane Onin advance in descending order Next Point gt advances the current Design Point by the HF 5 20 ift E e Increment value If that point does not exist
110. with the specified starting grade unless they are manually modified Azimuth gt Bearing is used to enter a known azimuth or bearing of the line adds the line to the current horizontal alignment R 69 Survey Pro Reference Manual Edit Segment Arc Horizontal Curve Card The Arc card is used to add a horizontal curve to the alignment The curve can be defined by two of the following Radius The distance from the radius point to E J Edit Segment the curve Delta The internal angle from center to e s tangent points Turn Left Right e Degree Arc The internal angle equivalent to a eae 100 ft arc length Degree Chord The internal angle equivalent to a 100 ft chord length Length The arc length The chord length e Tangent The distance from the PC or PT to the PI e Mid Ord The distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curve s length External The minimum distance between the PI and the curve Make this segment tangent to previous Turn specifies if the curve turns to the Left or Right as you face the curve from the beginning M Make this segment tangent to previous When checked the start of the specified curve will be tangent to the ending tangent of the previous segment gt Azimuth gt Bearing is used to enter a known azimuth or bearing at the start of the cur
111. you can switch between them by tapping the button When using the method a large red arrow indicates the direction of travel and always appears at the top of the graphic This arrow will dim when at a standstill or when near the design point A north and south indicator are displayed on the graphic and will rotate depending on your direction of travel along with a blue line that indicates the direction to your reference point or azimuth When you R 330 Stakeout Menu GPS amp Basic GPS Module are near the design point the graphic will change and the N S indicator will stop updating to assist you in more precisely locating the design point as illustrated below n a onol o MOOO aaa 4m es 2 ay 9 20 m as 20m Rover is greater Rover is between 0 3 Rover is within 0 3 m Rover is within the than 3 m 10 ft and 3 m 1 and 10 ft 1 ft of the design horizontal tolerance from the design from the design point point specified in the point stakeout settings When using the method your reference point or azimuth will always appear at the top of the screen and that is the direction you should be facing while navigating Like with the other navigation method the graphic will change as you get closer to the design point Each graphic is shown below 200 m os ee 11 20 mi sy 1 30 mi Rover is greater Rover is between 0 3 Rover is within 0 3m Rover is within the than 3 m 10 ft and 3 m 1 and 10 ft
112. you choose an existing point you will be prompted to rename or overwrite just like RTK data collection If you are storing this point in the receiver file only then the point control is replaced with a simple edit box When storing to receiver only you can reuse an existing point name without modifying that point in the Survey Pro job file Description is where you enter the description for the static session or stop and go point Log Until Stop is where you select to use a Duration or to record until Stop is tapped Duration is where you enter the session length for the next occupation Set HR displays the current antenna measurement and measure to setting You can change the antenna measurement by entering a new value in the edit box This new antenna height will be sent to the receiver with your next control or check point collection You can change both the antenna measurement and measure to setting by tapping on to open the Receiver Antenna screen Page R 181 R 198 Survey Menu GPS Module Note The Set HR button is only available if this is a stop and go post processing session or an RTK rover session Start sets the receiver to mark the beginning of a static point occupation with the entered Site ID and Description Stop sets the receiver to mark the end of a static point occupation Status opens the GPS Status screen Page R 168 R 199 Survey Pro Reference Manual Base Setup The Curr
113. zone Zone Type is where you select what kind of map projection to use for the new zone You can choose e Transverse Mercator e Lambert 1 Parallel Lambert 2 Parallel Stereographic Oblique Stereographic Oblique Mercator Angle Datum Type is where you select what kind of datum to use for the new zone You can choose e Pick from database Choose this option to add a data base datum and ellipsoid to the new zone e Custom Molodensky Choose this option to use a Key In Zone ie Er ad 6 54 fone Type ransverse Mercator Datum Type Pick from Database Grid and Azimuth Parameters North Azimuth D South Azimuth NorthEast Grid O SouthWest Grid custom 3 parameter datum transformation with either a custom ellipsoid or a data base ellipsoid e Custom Similarity Choose this option to use a 7 parameter datum transformation with either a custom ellipsoid or a data base ellipsoid Grid and Azimuth Parameters is where you select the grid azimuth and the positive coordinate direction e North Azimuth is where you set a north azimuth for your new zone e South Azimuth is where you set a south azimuth for your new zone e North East Grid is where you set the coordinates increasing positive in the north east direction R 216 Survey Menu GPS Module e South West Grid is where you set the coordinates increasing positive in the south west direction Key In Zone Mapping
114. 0 straight grade R 388 sun shot 142 R 152 super elevations R 406 surface scan 184 R 138 surveying in azimuths 80 surveying settings R 44 T tangent offset 169 R 379 tape offset R 305 tape OU Iss sstetiteasZiostadees 719 TDS Keyboard See TDS SIP TDS DIP eue 6 TDS Smart SIP 7 templates R 394 add edit 006 R 403 gC Remwre perenne ry nen nen 250 three points on a curveR 373 time formatoetan 10 time date settings R 52 R 53 CPTIN eiecccnseecieeasice 109 R 315 transfe eneen R 31 translate 177 R 425 by coordinates 178 by distance 66 177 Transverse Mercator projection 224 225 traverse sideshot R 120 I 8 remote mode R 124 traverse adjustment R 427 traverse base R 250 traverse now or later R 122 traverse on curve R 382 traverse on spiral R 391 traverse Shot c 008 69 triangle solutions R 360 A i E Cae ner re nee nen nema 250 GUE Osann R 158 tutorial jobs 006 304 existing job 06 306 mapping plane 313 one point localization 305 reuse localization 311 two peg test 60 R 264 U units Settings R 41 V VAM etal eset cieoees 54 R 67 vertical angle offset138 R 131 vertical curve R 3
115. 0 27 Select a design point tor stakeout EE iv BA Stk Point Backsight Point TP 2 1 Elev 100 000 Rod 7 245 HI 107 245 H Dist 45 230 D mm Ff i The Turn to Benchmark screen is used to take a shot at a known benchmark When shooting a benchmark that will not be used as the closing benchmark the procedure is identical to shooting a leveling side shot with the exception that this benchmark will be the backsight in the next setup BM Point is the point name for the benchmark This will usually be a new point when it is a non closing benchmark and will usually be the same point as the starting benchmark when it is the closing benchmark Desc is the optional description for the benchmark This is not applicable when shooting the closing benchmark since the closing benchmark must already exist in the current job Default Location for New Points is where you specify the northing and easting to use when shooting a new point This is not applicable when shooting the closing R 262 Choose a Point to Foresight as a Leveling Benchmark ko I o BM Point Default Location for New Points M 5124 0 ft E 5269 0 ft Backsight Point TP 2 2 Eley 97 245 Rod rl 2 H Dist Leveling Menu benchmark Backsight Point Lists the details for the current backsight If this is the first observation from the current set up most of the details will be unknown Next gt opens the Take Shot scree
116. 37 O7 04 Horz Dist 123 717 wert Dist 0 656 FE to Rod 00 18 14 OCC 1 HE 5 000 BS 0 00 00 Close Settings station so that the angle right reading will be zero when it is facing the current target which can sometimes be easier than turning to an obscure angle value When this button is tapped the following actions will occur 1 Anew backsight circle value is computed sent to the instrument and stored in the raw data R 284 Stakeout Menu 2 The Angle Right value is changed to zero to reflect the change The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the current target location 3 To prevent errors if this button is used the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog A circle zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked Note The button is not available when using a robotic total station lt Back returns to the previous screen Stake gt opens the next screen Offset Staking Screen Five PZlottset staking oP 4 6 54 Height of Rod is the length of the rod Sr neat Rod Elev Design Elev displays the current design elevation L LEFT 0 000 96 177 which can be modified with the button EE FORWARD BACK indicates if the rod must move Design Elev 99 960 Change forward toward the total station or backward away HR 6 201 ift_ S FILL from the total station Shot Data 3 783 Go
117. 81 Post Process opens the Receiver Session screen Page R 197 where you can occupy a point for a post processing only session This allows you log a session in the post processing file using an existing point name without changing that point record in the job file Control opens the Control Points screen Page R 192 Topo SS stores a point with a single epoch of data The current position is checked against the criteria and if acceptable the point is stored Note The function never puts the receiver in static mode so the precision of the rapid side shot will be less than a point occupied in static mode R 187 Survey Pro Reference Manual Feature opens the Feature Collection screen where various automatic and manual data collection options are available Offset opens the Offset Shots screen where a point can be collected and stored at a specified offset Point opens the Occupy Data Points screen Page R 191 used to occupy and store a new point Feature Collection Screen The Feature Collection screen is used when you wish to set up automated continuous data collection Points to be Stored displays the starting point name HF Feature Collection 47 uif C and description of the group of points to be stored Points to Be Stored Starting at Method is where you select the method of continuous data collection The available methods are described mai Method Rosato
118. 84 See parabolic curve vertical curve layout R 386 vertical datums 220 international 220 NA VIDSS siczecseetsis 221 NGVD29 scan eis 220 video card cece eee eee R 160 video display options R 161 video Scan R 141 Settings ccccceeees R 144 video settings R 162 view DTM 0688 R 78 view raw data 0 R 77 W WGS84 1996 0 217 where is next point R 326 R 342 WICENINGS cccceeeees R 404 Windows Networking320 329 WW 15mGH erd 229 Z zone constant 144 A 1 Index 1 9
119. Auto Linework Properties dialog box shown here where when the checkbox is checked the linework command will always switch back to the specified default linework command Switch to Default on Completion after changing and storing a different line type for a particular feature Add allows you to create a new linework command Remove removes the selected linework command Remove All removes all the existing linework commands Note All linework shots require at least two points with a particular linework command before a polyline segment is created If only the initial point has been stored no polyline segment is yet created R 76 Job Menu View Raw Data File View Raw Data The View Raw Data File screen displays the raw data file of the current job and allows you to append a note or current time entry a view Raw Data oe neu i in he din ge ae will as a OC OP6G N 5661 937608 E 5486 17a ookmark n front o t at line le active ookmark 1s BK OP66 BPO 830 0000 6C0 0000 shown as a green or light gray circle An inactive 5P PNES N 5167 212905 E 5528 680 bookmark is shown in red or dark gray See OC OP1 N 5000 0 E 5000 0 EL100 0 illustration amp LS HI5 0 HR5 0 Bk OP 1 BP0 650 0000 8C0 0000 First jumps to the first line of the file 55 0P1 FP69 ARO 0000 2E90 0000 P OR LPE D ARO TRON FArDL0R Last jumps to the last line of the file oo OP 1 FP 1 4R20 0000 2E90 0000
120. C L checkbox was checked in the previous Offset Dist screen 0 589 Offset Right Segment Line Note Tapping anywhere within the map view will open a larger map view which provides zoom controls Where is Next Point Where is Next Point The instructions for the Where is Next Point routine for GPS are similar to the conventional method except that the Backsight button is replaced with a button to configure rover antenna and the backsight information is replaced with rover antenna height information See Page R 326 for details R 342 Inverse Menu The Inverse Menu contains routines that compute the direction and distance between two objects The following screens are available from the Inverse Menu Inverse Point to Point Inverse Point to Line Inverse Point to Polyline Inverse Point to Multiple Points H F QY Inverse Point to Location Point R 343 Survey Pro Reference Manual Inverse Point to Point Point to Point The Inverse Point to Point screen will calculate the distance and direction between two existing points n E Inverse Point to Point Begin Point is the reference point used to compute the A distance and direction to the End Point Begin Point Ea End Point is the point whose relationship to the Begin Fendpont Edle Point is computed Select from Map allows you to quickly select both the Begin Point and End Point from a map view The first point tapped is entered as t
121. Corner amp Angle The Corner and Angle screen is used to store a point that cannot be shot on a reference line using a reflectorless total station where two other points on the same line can be shot Foresight is the name of the point that will be stored E Corner amp Angle a vest 4 M Description is the description for the point that will be stored a ane HR 0 000 shows that no rod height will be used with Angle Right o 00 00 deg this routine since all shots are direct reflectorless zenith g0 00 00 deg Slope Dist 100 000 feet Shoot Line will prompt you to take two shots on a line Point 2 of Line that intersects with the point you want to store a Be la Ly T Oe Note Each shot can be in any location on the line Shot Occ 1 HI 5 000 BS o 00 00 1 can be to the left or right of Shot 2 Input E Result M Aim at Corner will prompt you to aim at the corner the point that you want to store Although no shot is taken the angles to the point will be used to compute its location lt Shot 1 Sine Za it no sno Shot 2 Note After all shots are done the computed elevation is displayed for the new point You can either enter a different elevation or tap amp to accept the computed elevation Backsight accesses the Backsight Setup screen Page R 114 where the current backsight can be modified Corner amp Angle R 135 Survey Pro Reference Manual Corner amp Offset Th
122. Inverse Point to the selected point East is the change in the X coordinate from the Inverse Point to the selected point R 348 Inverse Menu Inverse Point to Location Point The Inverse Point to Location Point screen will calculate the distance and direction from any point or location to another point or location Begin is the reference point or location used to compute En Inverse Point to Location the distance and direction to another point or location 2 End is the other point or location whose correlation to Point the Begin point or location is computed Each location is y defined by one of the following methods aac N e Location When selected the coordinates for any E location can be entered in the appropriate fields Elev Pon 505 254 mile L Point When selected any existing point name can be entered in the appropriate field or selected from a map view M Store Pt When checked will store a point for the location s entered Solve will compute the distance and direction from the Begin point or location to the End point or location Al R 349 Cogo Menu The Cogo Menu contains all of the coordinate geometry routines used to perform computations from the existing job data The following screens are available from the Cogo Menu Point in Direction Intersection Offset Line Offset Points Station Offset Corner Angle Compute Area Triangle Solutions Map Check
123. K 42s deswtdseetabletes 57 key in origin ee ena R 221 file location ccecce ees R 223 Fron er eee ne ese a 35 LTOSUIES cccccccccccccccccce R 223 LAW data eerie 35 scale aaaeneesoooeesseeese R 222 file management R 239 ground to grid 303 file settings R 43 file transfer 064 R 31 H files ip Oe Deen ee nar Ree SES 52 R 66 control anaiss 36 R 26 HAR Norai one eee 219 description ccc eee 37 HD VD to SD ZA R 366 MITC EEEIEE EARTE ETR T 289 hinge method 165 R 364 fixed solution 212 horizontal angle offset137 R float solution 212 130 Foren o hiteni ootenntee 249 horizontal curve layout168 R format settings R 42 378 horizontal curve solutionR 370 G horizontal datums 217 general settings R 54 HARN oaea 219 geodetic N to grid N 304 NAD ea 217 Survey Pro Reference Manual NAD 8S ianen 217 W GS 4s cssitasieemeees 217 WGS84 1996 0 217 I IMDOLU icser tates 247 R 16 CR5 coordinates R 18 GPS coordinates R 18 JOB coordinates R 17 TXT coordinates R 18 LandXML coordinatesR 20 import control 125 import coordinates 120 import GPS control285 R 225 index CALA cceec ees eeeeeees 19 input Meld vices hesiens 17 input shortcuts 20 installation Recon oissiiessgaseduds weeaddiave dose 4 instrument
124. Layer dialog box where a new Topo Yes layer can be added You are prompted for a name and if the new layer should be visible Edit opens the Edit Layer dialog box where the selected layer can be edited The layer name and visibility can be changed Delete will delete the selected layer Note Only layers that contain no objects can be deleted Layer O is required and cannot be deleted or renamed Tip To move several points from one layer to another select the desired points in the Edit Points screen Page R 56 and tap Edit Select the layer you want to move them to and tap amp R 85 Survey Pro Reference Manual Job Information The Job Information screen displays details of the current job and allows you to remove wasted space in the current job file Filename displays the current job file name Feature Code File displays the feature code filename Filename DTM job used in the current job Folder Ses eee Folder displays the directory where the current job file aa is located Points First Size displays the size of the current job Last Alphanumeric Created displays the date that the current job was created Wasted Space Points displays the first and last point names and if 620 bytes 6 alphanumeric point names are being used Lines displays the number of polylines and alignments that are in the current job Roads displays the number of roads in the current job and the filen
125. Loop screen described next where a new loop can be created Create a Mew Loop New Level Loop Leveling Select Create Loop New Loop gt The New Level Loop screen is used to create a new level loop fe pa ie New Level Loop New Loop New Loop is where you enter a name for the new loop CBM is the starting benchmark This point must exist Starting Control Benchmark CBM point in the current job a CBM i Next gt opens the next screen R 256 Leveling Menu New Level Loop Screen Two EG New LevelLoop 4x 10 58 Desc is where you can enter an optional description for the new loop New Loop Name loop six Desc lt Back returns to the previous screen Starting CBM Name 1 Create Loop creates the new loop Description Start Elevation 100 0 ft M 5000 0 E 5000 0 Layer Points Feature lt Mone Level Notes Leveling Level Notes or Leveling Select Create Loop View Level Notes for Selected Loop E oF de 12 03 The Level Notes screen shows the details of every shot taken for the current loop If the loop was closed 1 i additional closure details are also provided The appearance of this screen can be customized by tapping the button to open the Level Notes Settings screen described below TR2 Sum 4 6 6 30 592 Arithmetic 100 000 4 6 7 6 Closure Poi Observed Minus Allowable 0 001 mi Current Lo l O 003 mil
126. M Layer screen displays all the points on the DTM layer and allows you to add points from another layer or delete move points to a different layer Delete will move the selected point s to the Auxiliary layer If the Auxiliary layer is not specified you will be prompted to select the layer to move the points to Note Points on a boundary or break line cannot be deleted GoTo will quickly find and select the specified point Add From To opens the Select Point s screen where a point range can be entered The points will then be moved to the DTM layer Del From To f opens the Select Point s screen where a point range can be entered The points will then be moved to the Auxiliary layer R 82 al Points on DTM Layer Pont _Joes nar esse cl f oh 3 000 000 3033 059 3 035 100 3 035 152 3 034 920 26 5 034 933 lt 1034 926 3 035 050 3 039 956 ay a 145 Job Menu 3D View View DTM 3D view The 3D View screen is used to view the DTM from any angle Settings opens the 3D View Settings screen described below where the information displayed in the 3D view can be configured Bo Volume displays the total cut and fill volume between PI ae the area that has been staked and a reference datum whose elevation is specified in the 3D View Settings screen or the total cut and fill between the area that has been staked and the selected DTM i FES
127. Menu GPS amp Basic GPS Module Obs Slope is the computed observed cut or fill slope based on the last shot and the corresponding hinge point Des Slope is the design cut or fill slope Cut Fill is the cut or fill required for the current rover location to be positioned on the design slope Toward CL Away CL is the computed horizontal distance that the rod must move either toward the centerline or away from it respectively before it is positioned at the catch point Note The computed horizontal distance is based on the observed terrain computed from the last two shots If only one shot has been taken it is assumed that the terrain is level when computing this value On Station Back Sta Ahead Sta informs you if the rod is on the station being staked or the distance it must move parallel to the centerline back or ahead to be on the correct station HD to HP is the horizontal distance from the rod to the hinge point VD to HP is the vertical distance from the rod to the hinge point HD to CL is the horizontal distance from the rod to the centerline VD to CL is the vertical distance from the rod to the centerline Line and Offset The instructions for the Line and Offset routine for GPS similar to the conventional method except that the Backsight and buttons are replaced with a Setup HR button to configure rover antenna and the backsight information is replaced with rover antenna height information
128. PC or PT to the PI R 372 Curve Menu Three Point Curve The Three Point Curve screen will compute the details of a curve when three points of the curve are specified the PC PT and any other point on the curve or the PC PT and radius point E Three Point Curve First point is the first point from the current job that First Point defines the curve The specified point can be either the Pc ORP PC or the Radius Point by selecting the appropriate radio Pc button o w Store RP Note The selection made for the first point determines Ft on Curve lle the available choices in the remaining fields PT Ese m i Pt on Curve is any point that lies on the curve between the PC and PT PC is the point that defines the beginning of the curve Input ES Results s maa Point of Curvature lose 2 PT is the point that defines the end of the curve Point of Tangency M Store RP When checked the radius point will be computed and stored with the name specified here Solve will compute the curve based on the selected points Traverse accesses the Traverse on Curve screen Page R 382 where the curve can be included in a traverse Layout accesses the Curve Layout screen Page R 375 where the location of points on a curve can be computed at any station interval Results Radius is the distance from the radius point to the curve Length is the arc length Chord is the chord l
129. Peg Shots 2 Peg Test Take Shot The 2 Peg Shots screen is used to perform the required shots to whichever observation you are shooting The specific shots you are prompted for depends on which rod you are shooting and the number of sets configured in the Level Settings screen The top line indicates if you are shooting the rod over Point A or Point B and if you are shooting the shots for Shooting the shot al on point A the first or second setup hd The box on the second line tells you which shot to take next The term A1 means to shoot the rod over Point A Bess eae ae for Set 1 If the box showed B3 it would mean to shoot when you are ready the rod over Point B for Set 3 Take Shot takes the shot indicated within the box on this screen Take Shot Peg Test Results The Peg Test Results screen appears after all the Average of Hae required shots are performed for a peg test The screen Ge ase an lists the details for all the shots taken and the computed Dist 30 00003 error All the shots taken and the error are recorded Dist 1 2473 0 000 only in the raw data file Dist 30 000 3 Dist 1 78303 0 000 Dist 1 000f3 Dist 1 94603 0 000 Dist 59 00013 n e oe a bz a2 b1 al HD1 HDZ 0 000 1492222 R 265 Survey Pro Reference Manual Adjustment The Adjustment routine allows you to perform a simple arithmetic elevation error adjustment to an existing closed loop Yo
130. R 205 where control points can be selected and the horizontal and vertical localization are solved Switch to TDS Localization switches the horizontal projection mode from Mapping Plane mode to Ground TDS Localization mode Page R 202 R 213 Survey Pro Reference Manual Select Coordinate System The Select Coordinate System screen is used to choose a mapping plane zone or localized site from the coordinate system database file You can also open the Key In Zone wizard to create a new zone and datum with user specified parameters van Select Coordina E F EESE fj4 Select Coordina 6 Er a 6 51 Database Database Use BONE Select Database Use ZONE Select Database O Use Site Use Site Region Nevo Region US State Plane 1983 fone Nevada Central 2702 Site INevada Site Use Geoid CARIBO Caribbean Use Geoid GEOIDOS Conus Delete Zone Key In Zone gt Delete Site Key In Zone gt Select Mapping Plane Zone Select Mapping Plane Site Database is where you select what type of coordinate system record to choose You can e Use Database Zone will display controls to pick a map projection from the regions and zones in the database e Use Database Site will display controls to pick a localized zone based site from the Site region in the database Region is where you select the region of the map projection zone Zone is where you select the specific map projection zon
131. R 217 Survey Pro Reference Manual is rotated by the azimuth angle of the central meridian of the projection so that grid North lines up with geodetic north at the origin Key In Zone Ellipse The Key In Zone Ellipse screen is used to set or create an ellipse for a new datum This screen is only displayed when Datum Type is Molodensky or Similarity Choose an ellipse for the new zone Bg Key In Zone E en 6 57 Ellipse from Data Base Choose this option to use the selected data base ellipsoid Key In Ellipse Key in Ellipse Choose this option to enter the values for Ellipsoid the custom ellipsoid Values Values is where you enter the values for the custom Ellipsoid a ellipse if you are not using Ellipse from List ee eee Ellipse a is where you enter the semi major axis of the Reciprocal Flattening new ellipsoid 298 257222 Other Parameter is where you select the other ellipse parameter to enter You can use one of Semi minor axis Flattening Reciprocal flattening First eccentricity First eccentricity squared Second eccentricity Second eccentricity squared R 218 Survey Menu GPS Module Key In Zone Datum Translation The Key In Zone Datum Translation screen is used to enter translations when the Datum Type is Molodensky or Similarity BG Key In Zone 6 qo a 6 58 Datum Translate WGS84 to Local Translate amp Translate r Translate 2 Datum Translate From WGS84 To
132. R 251 convergence calculator 304 coordinate system 221 Se H sche EE R 214 coordinate system database Sere E AT 245 coordinate systems horizontal 066088 223 VELbiCall si s 0 8 hoses 228 corner angle R 358 create points screen R 435 curve and offset173 R 302 R 338 curve layout 6 R 378 chord offset 169 horizontal 68 168 parabolic 00008 171 PC deflection 168 PI deflection 168 Ga e REI E eee 172 tangent offset 169 curve solution R 370 cut sheet offset R 47 data collection 63 290 R 187 Basic GPS 66 R 249 date time settings R 52 R 53 da MITS sobesa 215 NONIZON tals sect ousvacees 217 vertical 220 Peelo osana R 153 Decl A ronan R 153 define a location R 324 description file 37 COMES aries eels 38 39 Opening cceecceeceeeeees 40 DGPS skeen 211 Differential GPS 211 distance offset 136 R 129 distance units 008 23 DTM NIE Wo eE R 78 DTM GPS shot R 340 DTM stake109 R 315 R 340 DUT correction R 52 E earth curvature R 44 ECEF XYZ 211 222 edit alignments R 65 create points R 435 edit basemap R 443 edit GPS point flags R
133. Remote Elevation r 2 27 Known Elevation Is Occupy Foresight Elevation is the known elevation for the selected point Bertani bot l Shoot defines if you want to perform a Direct shot only or Direct amp Reverse shots to the foresight anon n or 1 el HI is the distance that the total station is above the E E ground aes HR is the length of the rod r opens the Smart Target options Page R 444 M Store Pt When checked the elevation of the point specified here will be replaced with the computed elevation Take Shot computes the elevation for the point that had an unknown elevation and optionally writes that elevation to the specified Store Pt Results OCC Elevation displays the elevation for the occupy point FS Elevation displays the elevation for the foresight point R 150 Survey Menu Check Point The Check Point screen compares the rod location with an existing point in the project This routine is similar to the Check Backsight routine Page 117 and is used to verify that the rod and or the total station is over the correct point This routine does not store a new point ih d 9 24 Point is the point from the project that will be compared falls to the observed point rod location MERA Or EE Height of Rod is the length of the rod pear Backsight accesses the Backsight Setup screen Page 6 257 545 ft R 114 1 086 ft a aa a Take Shot take
134. S and Basic GPS The Stakeout Menu while running in GPS mode with either the GPS module or Basic GPS module contain the routines used to stake existing points and other known locations Items shown in gray utilize the GPS Staking screen described on the following page and are otherwise identical to the conventional stakeout routines described starting on Page R 269 Stake Points Stake List of Points Stake to Line Offset Staking Slope Staking Line and Offset Curve and Offset Spiral and Offset Show Station Store Offset Points Stake DTM Where is Next Point PASS OA eo oO De Pe R 329 Survey Pro Reference Manual Stake Points Stake Points The GPS Staking screen is used to navigate to a design point with the receiver in roving mode Once the design point has been staked this screen is also used to control static occupations for the most precise measurement to the as built point The first two screens of this routine are similar to the conventional method except that the button on the first screen and the button on the second screen are replaced with a Setup HR button to configure rover antenna The backsight information is replaced with rover antenna height information See Page R 270 for comparison GPS Staking lt d asz GPS Staking lt d 8 38 P Oo Roving using navigation method Roving using navigation method There are two navigation methods available when staking a point and
135. S Datum displays the datum elevation set in the 3D View po Settings screen i SI ae sai wi I 123 esl Toggles to display or hide the point names and descriptions a When this button is activated dragging within the 3D View will result in the image being rotated to any angle e When the button is activated dragging within the 3D View will pan the image R 83 Survey Pro Reference Manual 3D View Settings The 3D View Settings screen is used to configure the information displayed in the 3D View screen v Height Exaggerated to the Maximum When Enl 3D View Settings checked the height exaggeration is automatically set to a high value When unchecked the height exaggeration cle le ni Eek merata Rain can be set manually in the next field Hidden ine Removal Display Difference From Ret OTM Height Exaggeration Ratio is the value that the height apne is multiplied by in the 3D view Higher values mean more exaggeration a value of 1 0 would result in no View Direction from view point to the exaggeration cout gt Azimuth 14 534386 Zenith Direction 115 480482 _ Height Exaggerated to the Maximum Cancel M Hidden line Removal When checked will hide all the lines that occur behind other surfaces in the 3D View The image shown here is identical to the image shown on Page R f i 83 except the hidden lines are not removed 4 M Display the Difference This applies only to D
136. S Module Solve Localization Before the Solve Localization wizard starts the localization is computed using all the control points and then the Detected blunders with the automatic blunder detection routine runs to detect low GPS Backsight Do you want P ta ere ee the quality control points Tapping Yed at this prompt will GPS control point list to automatically disable the horizontal and or vertical control remove blunders that results in a poor solution This can be overridden in the next screen The Solve Localization wizard is used to solve a horizontal and vertical adjustment for a coordinate system The user interface and procedure to solve a localization in Ground TDS Localization mode and Mapping Plane mode are very similar Survey Pro Solve Localization Residuals The Solve Localization Residuals screen is used to display the residuals from the least squares solution and Solution Autonomous to change your control point selections and re solve the Radio O Sv OO HRMS 99 00 i adjustment if desired GPS Backsight _ _ amp Control points are not spaced evenly If Yes is displayed in the H or V column it indicates the cet detection can not run Tap corresponding control point will be included in the inish to apply anyway horizontal or vertical localization solution respectively These can be toggled between Yes included or blank not inclu
137. Shots screen where you will be prompted to pick the direction to the offset point gt Zenith gt Vertical Dist is where you enter the zenith angle or vertical distance from the occupied point to the offset point Slope Dist Horizontal Dist is where you enter the slope distance or horizontal distance from the occupied point to the offset point Occupy GPS is used to occupy the GPS reference point A prompt for the name of the GPS reference point is followed by the Occupy Data Points screen Page R 191 After measuring the coordinate at the occupied point you will return to the Offset Shots screen where new points can be stored with a direction and distance from the occupied point Shoot Laser triggers the selected active conventional instrument to take a shot to the offset You can select from a number of laser ranger finders available on the Job Settings Instrument screen when in conventional mode The active instrument will always return a zenith and slope distance The active instrument may return a horizontal angle which will be treated as an azimuth Note If your laser range finder has a compass azimuth returned will be magnetic Use the Instrument Settings screen to set Magnetic Declination to apply to the angle Store prompts you for a description layer and attribute depending on your survey settings for the new offset point and stores the point for the current location R 190 Surve
138. Stake gt accesses the next screen which is identical to the third Stake Points screen described on Page R 272 R 294 Stakeout Menu Point Slope Staking The Point Slope Staking routine is a simplified version of the Slope Staking routine described on Page R 288 The Point Slope Staking routine determines the location of the catch point from a known hinge point and a specified horizontal direction from the hinge point whereas the Slope Staking routine determines the location of the catch point from a perpendicular offset to a known centerline at a specified station ined Point Slope Staking From Point Ee D eae I Fill Slope Height of Rod OCC 1 HI 5 000 BS 0 00 00 Backsight Stake CP gt The first screen is used to specify the hinge point and horizontal direction from the hinge point to the catch point From Point is the hinge point gt Direction is either another point that lies in the same vertical plane as the hinge point and catch point or the azimuth from the hinge point to the catch point respectively Fill Slope is the desired slope calculated from run over rise between the hinge point and catch point when the area requires a fill Cut Slope is the desired slope calculated from run over rise between the hinge point and catch point when the area requires a cut Height of Rod is the rod height Backsight accesses the Backsight Setup screen Stake CP
139. Switch to GPS Switch to Leveling e Quickly access the Instrument Settings screen Page R 36 Map View A map view of the current job can be displayed by tapping the button See Page R 442 Quick Pick The 7 Quick Pick button is used to quickly access any of a variety of commonly used Survey Pro routines The list of routines available is customizable using the Quick Pick Editor Page R 437 The User s Manual also contains more information on using the Quick Pick button and Quick Pick Editor Battery Level The battery icon at the bottom of the Main Menu displays the condition of the Survey Pro s rechargeable battery The icon has five variations depending on the level of charge remaining 100 m 75 m 50 25 5 and charging Tapping the battery icon is a shortcut to the Microsoft Power Settings screen You can get more information while viewing this screen by tapping ff then R 4 Fa Main Menu Other Command Bar Buttons There are additional command bar buttons available in screens other than the Main Menu Each is described below OK Performs the desired action then closes the current screen x Cancel Red X Closes the current screen without performing the action intended by the screen g Close Green X Closes the current screen Settings Opens the Settings screen Page R 36 associated with the current screen GPS Status This is used to view the
140. TM stakeout When checked the vertical portion z axis of the 3D View screen is computed by the elevation differences between the non reference DTM surface and the reference DTM surface This will result in any objects that occur above or below the reference DTM to clearly stand out as hills and valleys and the volume information provided in the 3D View screen will be between the staked points and the reference DTM ae a E ye When unchecked the Datum field can be set to a reference elevation Cut and fill volumes in the 3D View screen will then be based on the difference of a horizontal plane at the elevation specified here and the non reference DTM surface R 84 Job Menu Datum When the Display the Difference checkbox is unchecked cut and fill volumes will be computed in the 3D View screen based on the difference of a horizontal plane at the elevation specified here and the staked points View Direction from view point to the center allows you to specify the exact horizontal and vertical angle in which to view the DTM Manage Layers The Manage Layers screen is used to manage the layers for the current job All existing layers are displayed along with which layers are visible and how many objects are on each layer E Manage Layers Set Active will set the selected layer as the active layer Layer Visible Objects The active layer is marked with a symbol O Yes Points has New opens the New
141. TM screen Store will store a stake point for the last point that was shot using the point name shown in the Point field and the description in the Desc field A new shot is not taken from this button The Point field is then advanced to the next available point name R 319 Survey Pro Reference Manual Station Staking Station Staking The Station Staking routine allows you to stake the stations offsets and surfaces built into a LandXML file The first Station Staking screen is used to load a LandXML file and view the details of that file The box on the left displays the horizontal view of the F centerline include within the LandXML file and the box Siki 5 GE Ts on the right shows the vertical view Alignment Description alignment in the current job to use as a centerline This will replace any centerline loaded from the LandXML je lt 7 LandXML View Cross Sections opens the Cross Section View screen described below where you can view the station Bagin Station B surface and offset details of the loaded LandXML file Load From LandXML opens the Open screen Page R 14 where you can select which LandXML file to load Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen Page R 114 where you can set your backsight Next gt opens the next Station Staking screen Cross Section Group design Set Center Line allows you to select any polyline or conte tne ros a ea tross Se
142. a and station ID for each point you occupy Post Processing Post Processing a x Start Static O Start Stop Ga ira Post Processing Not Recording Start Recording Recording Settings Rec Interval 1 Mem Threshold Off SY Threshold Off HOOP Threshold Off Last antenna for this receiver Antenna Dema 1 Measured To Bottom of mount Measured Offset 0 236 D i E The Post Processing screen is used to open or close a post processing data file and start or stop logging GPS raw data measurements to the file When you tap the Post Processing menu button you are prompted to choose a receiver to connect to from the list of post processing receivers you have created Recording Status displays the current state of receiver recording Start Recording Stop Recording this button will activate the action which is opposite to the current Recording Status Tap Start Recording to open a new log file begin logging raw GPS measurements for post processing to the file and then open the Receiver Session screen Page R 197 where you can input the station name and description Tap the Stop Recording button to close the open log file Note The location of the file is usually on the receiver s built in memory However some models support collection of post processing data to a file on the data collector For those receivers that support it the location of the log file is spec
143. a name The names do not have to be unique Confirm that the same number of segments exist on each side of the alignment Confirm that each widening start station is less than the corresponding widening s end station Confirm that one widening does not overlap with another widening Confirm that the start station for each super elevation is less than the end station Confirm that no two super elevations overlap Confirm that the start and end of each super elevation either both hinge on the centerline or both hinge on the edge Confirms all templates widening and super elevations are on the alignment Confirms no more than one template exists at any particular station on the same side of the road Confirms the first segment of all templates is greater than 0 Checks for empty templates Checks for widenings with zero width Checks for overlapping parabolic transitions Checks for template widening width matching Checks for template super elevation slope matching Roads Menu Road Profiles Screen Roads Edit Roads New or Eait Road View Profiles The Road Profiles screen allows you to see information about the cross sectional profile of the road at any station after at least one template has been added to each side of the road Es Example Profiles lt lt gt gt these buttons move a circle icon that starts See at the centerline to each node of the template at the ile
144. ad SONDE SOKN aenn a RN 415 Road Station and OFFSEC cccscecssseesssreeessressssesseeneseneees 418 SON EGUI Oan N 421 Adjust M enU vices iccectice cdetite dc recta a aaea araia a apaina e aaan aii 423 S ES EAE EE E AE E AEE TE EAE I EEEE E A E 424 TAN laeua A 425 POLES ee ccrctanipuiacdentiieatevaiacitanaveiteyntesana nineteen ann heveiesioea 426 FrN CAUS n 427 Miscellaneous Screens s s nn 22 433 PASCERE UNG run aa estan anmeeaseaeemneasecaaneet 434 Cree POIN uisa 435 TAMO Sant HR gt H R rnana 436 Convert ant ALTOR aeaa 436 QUICK PICK EQITOD ainoaa aa 437 PON ELSE E GI GOK creron T 438 Map VW scoannitnte as Aeetaractaatantedeatanendnidivciamitedaanbeniaeniesai 439 Map DISDI AY O DU ONS isiin 441 Manage BasemnaD S isusias a uousteiatteatbd 442 EAIC BASEIMADS rii 443 Smart T SUS e het dina bveliarnee 444 Appendix A Transverse M ercatOr ZOMGS cccccssssscsseeessssseceeeeessssseeees A 1 Lambat ZONES sarina O A 2 vii Welcome Congratulations on your decision to purchase a Tripod Data Systems product TDS is serious about providing the best possible products to our customers and know that you are serious about your tools We are proud to welcome you to the TDS family The TDS Survey Pro team is continually improving and updating Survey Pro Please take a few minutes to register your copy so that you will be eligible for upgrades You can do this either by completing
145. ad stakeout R 409 road station and offset R 418 road templates R 394 POAGS cs wet ein iceninGidcess R 397 POUALE ei iacsessceeeus 179 R 426 TOCATION 0 c0000s 282 283 RER oia 257 video scan eesse R 144 data collection 289 settings screen seses 33 stake out seeen 295 setup group seesecsseeecesseese 280 Rx settings sciciionssicaenes R 93 shoot from two ends135 R 145 SNOrte tS accorsa 20 S show station R 310 DAVES AS sisiicutsogetesaeeanctausebs R 15 show station and offsetR 338 SAVE point ee eeeeeees R 148 side Shot ecccceesseeeeeeeeees 68 scale s s s 176 283 R 424 S AEE sacs tte eet 6 scale factor 223 225 R 45 dte ce earnest ste 297 ellipsoid sisirin 303 slant HI R 436 mapping plane 225 303 slant HR ooeec R 436 scale factor calculator 303 slope stakingR 288 R 295 R scroll button 006 19 335 SD ZA to HD VD R 367 Poad sete eased R 415 select point s 22 R 438 smart targets R 444 Server Modea R 31 snapshot cceeceeeeeees R 29 set origin sails tuseal denen see ca 280 soft input panel ete el ee A 6 setting solar observation 142 R 152 Basic GP5S R 106 solve localization 270 R 186 CEO eniin R 90 spiral and offsetR 306 R 338 settings spiral curve cc eee R 389 connections R 106 spiral curve layout 172 d
146. age to refresh Snap Shot results in small images being stored after tapping the button that are equal in size to the live video image Full results in full size digital photos being stored after tapping the button The desired size can be selected from the Size field The Compression setting determines the image quality where less compression will provide more detail but with a larger file size R 162 Settings 56 D 7 6 33 Video Quality Still Pictur Snap Shot Full i Remote Contro E dr si 6 37 Battery 75 Link GOOD a MEASURING i Remote Contro B dr 2 6 38 Battery 74 Link GOOD Oo MEASURING Survey Menu Map Card Survey The Map card displays a live map showing the total station position relative to the current foresight and backsight Aim Card Survey The Aim card is used to precisely aim the instrument Tapping around the total station graphic will turn the instrument to the location corresponding to the horizontal and vertical scale bars gt By Angle gt By Distance toggles between turning by angles or by distances respectively The scales in the scale bars will also switch between angles or distances The scales in the scale bars are calculated using the last distance that was measured R 163 Survey Pro Reference Manual Foresight Card The Foresight card is available only if the backsight is i g Remote Contro gt 4 4 6 36
147. al number of the antenna This information is optional and written as a note in the raw data Next gt opens the next screen which depends on the type of receiver you are connected to and at what stage in the Start GPS Survey routine you are at Start Survey One Matching Base Point This screen will open when the base is set up on a point that potentially matches only one point in the job i Start Survey WO gr WZ 9 15 Solution Autonomous Radio O Sw OF HRMS 16 70 Change gt opens the Next gt opens the Set Up Rover screen Select a Base Point Found base point at 1 Start Survey No Matching Base screen Page R 244 where the base point can be redefined before continuing Next gt opens the Set Up Rover screen R 243 Survey Pro Reference Manual Start Survey More than One Matching Base Point This screen will open when the base is set up on a point that potentially matches more than one point in the job Change gt opens the Next gt opens the Set Up Rover MER 2 ave screen Solution Autonomous Radio O Sw D6 HRMS 4 08 Select a Base Point Base matches one of these points 1 Start Survey No Matching Base screen Page R 244 where the base point can be redefined before continuing Select a Base Point allows you to choose a point from the dropdown list which contains all the matching points found in the job Next gt opens the Set Up Rover scr
148. also O Discard the boundary when a new a point or breakline outside of the be moved to the Auxiliary layer boundary is added ta OTM Layer Discard the boundary will initially move any points that exist outside the boundary to the Auxiliary layer If a point is later stored outside the boundary the selected boundary is automatically unselected Clear will unselect the selected boundary and move it to the Auxiliary layer R 78 Select OTM Layer Select Auniliary Layer Job Menu Breaklines will open the Add Edit Break lines screen where DTM break lines can be added or edited Points will open the Points on DTM Layer screen where the points on the DTM layer can be viewed new points can be imported and existing points can be deleted moved to the Auxiliary layer 3D View will open the 3D View screen where the DTM can be viewed from any angle Layers for Staking DTM View DTM The Layers for Staking DTM screen is used to select the non reference DTM layer and an optional layer where invalid objects are stored Select DTM Layer is the non reference DTM layer used for stake points that are stored and other objects that exist on the surface you are staking These points will be used to generate a DTM surface to compare to the reference DTM surface oI Select Auxiliary Layer if this is checked and a point is Automatically place points or breaklines stored that is located outsi
149. alue or above the prism positive 3_ ft right iene CCS Note multiple offsets can be applied simultaneously Shoot will take a shot to the prism apply the offset s entered and then store the new point Backsight accesses the Backsight Setup screen Page R 114 where the current backsight can be modified is a shortcut to the Surveying Settings screens Page R 44 R 129 Survey Pro Reference Manual Horizontal Angle Offset The Horizontal Angle Offset screen allows you to compute and store the location of a new point that cannot be occupied such as at the center of large tree The routine shoots a prism positioned at the side of the E Horizontal Angle Offset new point and then reads the horizontal angle when a Foresight 2 TA aiming toward the center of the new point to compute on Description the new point s location Foresight is the point name that will be used when storing the new point Description is the description for the offset shot that is doa m Backsight accesses the Backsight Setup screen Page R 114 occ 2 HI 5 400 BS 1 o 00 02 Aim Center will record the horizontal angle from the Ex map Cd j Input E Results Map total station which should be facing the center of the Settings Close E Al new point Shoot Prism will take a shot to the prism which is located at the side of the new point is a shortcut to the Surveyin
150. alue 1 pressing the button will E Where Is Next Point 4 Current Rod ls aws EE A e A access the next existing point Ifthe Increment is greater than one and the next point does not exist a warning is displayed gt Reference Pnt Reference Azm is the reference point azimuth used to determine the direction to the Next FS Point Solve gt computes the direction and distance to the Next FS Point and accesses the second screen R 326 Stakeout Menu Where is Next Point Screen Two This screen shows two graphics that indicate the direction and distance that the rod person must travel to reach the Next FS Point The clock style graphic shows the current rod location at the center a line in the 12 o clock position indicates the direction to the Reference and an arrow shows the direction to the Next FS Point There is also a text indicator that explains the direction to travel in a clock format The second graphic is a map view that shows the Current Rod Point the Reference and the Next FS Point It also shows the Occupy Point if the backsight has been set E Where Is Next Point Orientation 1 O Clock pe men The lower left portion of the screen displays the azimuth ae from the rod to the Next FS Point and the horizontal Azimuth 980 15 00 distance between them lt Back returns you to the first screen Done closes the screen R 327 Stakeout Menu GP
151. ames associated with them Attributes Collected displays the number of point and line attributes used in the current project Total Storage displays the total amount of memory that is installed on the data collector Available Storage displays the amount of free memory that is available to use for jobs Wasted Space displays the amount of empty space that is being used by the current job This space can be recovered as described below Recover Wasted Space Now As you add and remove points and lines in ajob empty gaps can result within the job file These gaps use storage space This button will remove any gaps in the job file thus recovering the wasted space R 86 Job Menu Note Survey Pro checks for low memory situations every minute When the available system memory falls below 256K of RAM a warning is displayed Calculator Calculator or yi Calculator where applicable The Calculator screen behaves exactly like any other RPN format calculator It consists of a stack that can O Deg contain any number of values and buttons that perform Rad various operations When a value is being entered from the keypad it is displayed in a special area called the active area This value is then place in Level 1 of the stack after tapping the Enter key am Calculator Er ax 1 23 o au cL Pf m uw un oy im a wy oe Oy aio tI D wo Tapping a button on the display performs the corresponding op
152. and class can be loaded R 49 Survey Pro Reference Manual FGCS Defaults The FGCS Defaults screen is used to load the default FGCS tolerances in the Level Settings screen for the order and class of level loop specified here PF FGCS Defaults Er a x 9 05 Order indicates the order of the level loop that you want to load the default tolerances for Load FCGS tolerances for Three Wire leveling with the selected Class indicates the class of the level loop that you want order and class to load the default tolerances for Tapping will load the tolerances into the Level Order C First Settings screen based on the FGCS specifications for the Second order and class selected These tolerances can still be K Third manually changed later a Cll Note It is important to recognize that Survey Pro can only display a warning if tolerances are not met It is up to the surveyor to determine if the level loop meets the criteria for a particular standard R 50 Job Menu Repetition Settings The Repetition Settings card contains the settings that control how repetition shots are performed and acceptable tolerances aa Horizontal Tolerance a warning message will be oPTUNGS i e z displayed if a horizontal angle exceeds the tolerance Horizontal Tolerance sec entered here during a repetition shot Zenith Tol 30 0 l i l oE EEE Zenith Tolerance a warning message will be displayed Distance Tolerance ji if
153. ar removes the current polyline Screen Three Polyline Editor Once the initial points are selected for the current polyline the third screen allows you to modify the polyline and define any curve and grade information for the polyline sections Selecting any point in the left column of the screen will EIJI Polyline Editor select that point and the line segment that follows it up to the next point The selected section is then highlighted in the map portion of the screen Any edits will occur on the selected section Remove will remove the selected point and the line segment that follows it The previous line segment will be automatically joined to the following point The change will only be saved if you then tap amp Tapping Cancel will return to the previous screen without saving the changes Clear All will completely remove the current polyline The change will only be saved if you then tap amp Tapping amp Cancel will return to the previous screen without saving the changes Curves Accesses the fourth screen described below where a horizontal vertical or spiral curve can be added to the selected polyline segment z 4 a 6 Horizontal Vertical toggles between showing the map in a Horizontal overhead view or a Vertical side view lt Insert f allows you to insert a point or a group of points in front of the selected point The change will only be saved if you then tap
154. at will be used when locating the catch point in a situation where the existing terrain is below the level of the hinge point Note To add a segment to the end of all existing segments furthest away from the centerline be sure lt End gt is selected from the Edit Template screen prior to tapping Insert Edit opens the Edit Segment screen where the details of the selected segment can be edited Note The selected segment is shown with a thicker line in the map view in the lower portion of the Edit Template screen R 395 Survey Pro Reference Manual Remove removes the selected segment and automatically joins the previous segments to the following segments Note When a segment is removed the existing segments toward the centerline will not change Only those on the side of the removed segment away from the centerline are adjusted Edit Segment Roads Edit Templates Eait LInsert or Roads Edit Templates Eait Edit or The Edit Segment screen is identical to the New Template screen and is used to create a new template or edit an existing one Segment Name is the name for the segment A name is required but it does not have to be unique Edit Segment Segment Mame Horizontal Dist is the horizontal length of the offset na e A Slope 2 00 e Slope V Offset is the slope of the segment or the vertical length respectively When defining a vertical offse
155. ate time R 52 R 53 spiral layout 00 R 390 EI EEE EE R 43 stake curve and offset R 302 formatene i R 42 stake DTM109 R 315 R 340 general E EREE E R 54 stake line and offset R 299 instrument R 36 stake list of points SONN R 275 job E piaine nace aceeseunaaies 12 stake offset R 281 level Nobesin R 258 stake points 00 R 270 leveling EL Or me re R 48 remote mode R 274 measure mode R 102 stake spiral and offset R 306 post processing 257 R 104 stake to line R 277 FAAO font sisi Aanilautaabestost R 109 remote mode R 279 receiver 254 341 R 90 Sta K COW U nenna 72 repetition 127 R 51 road ecfescosierinlscussacuges R 409 RI BR ae ee eee ERSTE 257 stakeout settings ere R 45 IR Gant ous Saab TEE TEA R 93 start Basic GPS surveyR 242 stakeout cc cece R 45 start Basic GPS survey wizard SUPVEY ING nainii S E ere eer ren R 249 MMS ate itot ee a R 41 start GPS survey 258 R 174 WIE Oranas R 162 1 7 Survey Pro Reference Manual base Setup c0cc00 262 choose base setup260 R 176 choose one point setup 258 choose projection mode258 R 175 connect to receivet 261 YOver Se tuP 0000 264 station and offset R 310 POA een i R 418 station equation 106 R 421 station offset R 357 stereographic projection 225 226 store offset pointsR 312 R 34
156. ate system Readjust with Current Projection f into locations in another coordinate system You can O Geodetic To Plane Hold LLH Adjust NEE choose the source and destination coordinate systems O Plane To Geodetic from the database This mode has two options Hold NEE Adjust LLH e Adjust all selected points all eligible points will be adjusted Points with plane only locations will be G f i E transformed into a temporary WGS84 geodetic location using the source coordinate system and then into a new plane location using the destination coordinate R 231 Survey Pro Reference Manual system Points with a geodetic location will be transformed into a new plane location using the destination coordinate system e Adjust only geodetic points only points with geodetic locations will be adjusted All eligible points with geodetic locations will be transformed into a new plane location using the destination coordinate system Readjust with Current Projection use this mode when you want to readjust locations using the current coordinate system This mode has two options e Geodetic to Plane Hold LLH Adjust NEE use this option to adjust the plane location of selected points with a geodetic coordinate The plane location of selected points with a geodetic location will be recalculated using the current coordinate system set in the job e Plane to Geodetic Hold NEE Adjust LLH use this option to adjust o
157. ate system selected and solved R 173 Survey Pro Reference Manual Start GPS Survey The Start GPS Survey wizard is used to complete the setup necessary for any RTK GPS Survey The Start GPS Survey wizard is opened from the main menu or any time you try to access data collection or stake out functions The steps to complete the Start GPS Survey wizard will depend on what you have already done in the job Each possible screen is shown below aE Choose One Point Setup One Point Setup This is a new job Use One Point The Start GPS Survey Choose One Point Setup screen is 5 tuP to set the base and rover and begin collecting data in a new ground used to select one point setup mode This screen shows coordinate system for this location when you have a new job with only one point and when you have not yet selected a coordinate system Use one Start Survey with One Point Setup gt point setup when you want to start a new survey at ground level with no extra steps required to solve the ee coordinate Sy stem Use Regular Setup to choose a projection mode set base and rover and solve the projection One Point Setup displays a description of one point setup mode Start Survey With One Point Setup gt opens the Choose Base Setup screen which will guide you through go A starting the survey with the default ground coordinate system Regular Setup gt Regular Setup displa
158. ati 2 qr 2 5 54 Largest H Error displays the name of the point with the largest horizontal error if a horizontal solution was calculated A point list of all control points is displayed along with the residual or misclosure for each point depending on least squares solution or unique solution You can change the points used in the solution and re solve on this page to display the new residuals or misclosures lt Back returns to the Solve Localization Control Points screen Solve gt is displayed when the point list has changed Tapping solve will recalculate the parameters and display new residuals or misclosures for the control point list Next gt advances to the Solve Localization Results screen Solve Localization Manual Parameters The Solve Localization Manual Parameters screen is used to input localization horizontal and vertical parameters by hand This can be done to copy a localization solution between data collectors in the field or to recreate a localization solution from a raw data printout R 207 Survey Pro Reference Manual Horizontal Card The Horizontal card is used to manually enter the six HG solve Localizati g A 5 54 parameters of the horizontal localization solution oroni cerca Scale is where you enter the scale factor Status Control points solution Rotation is where you enter the rotation angle l l l Scale 1 000006523 Translation N E is where
159. ation Description M Specify Missing Elevation Threshold if the source file was created from coordinates with no elevations but the file contains an elevation column with values such as 0 check this box and indicate the value in the field that will appear to the right i Preview opens the ASCII Import Preview window containing all the point data that will be imported This is useful to check for errors before actually importing new data lt Back returns to the previous screen Finish imports the new point data into the current project _ Specify Missing Elevation Threshold R 19 Survey Pro Reference Manual Import LandXML Coordinates Points alignments polylines and parcels can be imported from a LandXML file The way the LandXML data is imported depends on how the data is stored in the source file and how the settings are Al tmport LandXML Fil gi 4x 9 59 configured in the two screens described below F IY Please specify layers which the Consult the User s Manual for more information on the objects will be imported to conditions that affect how the data is imported Layer Options On specified layer will import all the data on the specified layer O On specified layer er FSCS On different layers by groups will import points alignments and parcels to layers named by the group name for the data in the source file If the group name is an invalid layer name e g it is empty
160. ation Equation When checked the current station equation will be applied to the road Equation Settings opens the Station Equation screen Page R 421 where a station equation can be configured Backsight accesses the Backsight Setup screen Page R 114 Next gt takes you to the next Stake Road screen where a specific point on the road can be selected to stake R 409 Survey Pro Reference Manual Stake Road Screen Two The second Stake Road screen displays a cross sectional profile view of the road at the current station Any particular point on this view can be selected and staked Station I nterval is the value that is added to the Stake Road Station to Stake after the Next Station button is pressed sen ooo A Next Station advances the Station to Stake by the E Station Interval Right 1 Roadbed Note If the Stake Corners option is selected in the Eou Stakeout Settings screen the Next Station button will also stop at any horizontal or vertical alignment node and the beginning and end of any widening and super elevation that falls within the interval Y lt Back Next gt lt lt gt gt These buttons are used to select the Settings Close particular node or an offset to it from your road profile that you wish to stake The segment name at the selected node is also displayed If staking the centerline with an offset the side of the road that the offset occu
161. ation can be modified Delete Deletes the selected data modem configuration Modem Serial Comms Screen The Modem Serial Comms screen is used to change the settings for communication between the base or rover receiver and the data modem GPS Receiver Port is where you select the serial port the receiver will use to communicate with the modem Communications GPS Receiver Port Baudrate is where you select the baud rate the receiver will use to communicate with the modem 9600 Baudrate Parity is where you select the parity the receiver will use to communicate with the modem This setting l Parity Mone disabled for receivers that do not support user defined ay ees parity setting Defaults automatically sets all the selectable values to their defaults based on the current receiver hardware Receiver Set sets the selected modem communication settings for the specified port on the receiver oO Oo E Note The modem communication settings are also set in the receiver during the base and rover setup procedure Therefore you will not usually have to use the button on this page Radio Settings Screen The Radio Settings screen is used to configure settings of the base or rover radio modem All settings available are described below However not all radios support all of the described settings so if you do not see one of these fields it is because the radio type does not s
162. ation of the initial point Description is the description of the initial point lt Back returns you to the previous screen R 12 File Menu Finish stores a new job file and raw data file using the specified information amp Cancel cancels the creation of a new job and brings you back to the main menu Create a New Job 5 External or No Control File Point Name is the name of the initial point PH lCreateaNew Job 7 ax 9 48 Northing is the Y coordinate of the initial point Enter First Point a Easting is the X coordinate of the initial point Paint Mame oo Elevation is the elevation of the initial point ing 5000 0 ee ee see a Description is the description of the initial point Easting 2000 0 mi lt Back returns you to the first screen Elevation 100 0 m CEST Finish stores a new job file and raw data file using the Be CPE aE eani specified information Cancel cancels the creation of a new job and brings you back to the main menu R 13 Survey Pro Reference Manual Open The Open screen is used to open any existing job and is required to open a job that is not listed in the Recent J ob list in the Open New screen A list of all the jobs in the current directory is displayed Simply tap on the job name that you want to open and then tap amp Note TDS CR5 files can be opened just like any Survey Pro JOB file When a CR5 fil
163. available Begin CBM Pt This item is only available when Adjust Loop From a Specific Point To End is selected above and allows you to select an alternative benchmark starting point in the loop for the adjustment Any setups prior to the selected benchmark will not be adjusted The description and elevation for the selected benchmark are displayed at the bottom of the screen R 266 Leveling Menu Next gt opens the Adjustment Preview screen Adjustment Preview Screen The second adjustment screen allows you to preview the details of the adjustment before applying it lt Back Returns to the previous screen without Hg Adjustment 4f 10 18 applying the adjustment so changes can be made to the EEE Dreyjey 2 configuration Adjustment Settings Sen S Genies Note If you do not want to apply the adjustment and do Not to adjust 5 pointis not want to make changes to the configuration simply tap 3 to cancel and close the screen Known Eley of Closure Pt Observed Eley of Closure Pt Elevation to Adjust of Setups Adjust Performs the adjustment and opens a screen Eley Adj Per Setup that details the results Point Elev Note If the selected loop has already been adjusted or if the computed error is negligible the button will be inactive R 267 Survey Pro Reference Manual Leveling Remote Control The Remote Control screen can only be accessed in leveling mode when trigonometric leveling
164. ay a pop up list with the following items R 158 Survey Menu e Sky Plot opens the Sky Plot screen Page R 164 e Settings opens the GeoLock Settings screen Page R 165 e Reset Resets the GPS localization solution e Sats is an output only field that will display one of the following messages which will change along with the color of the satellite icon o green icon On Ready GeoLock is active and a localization solution exists o WB yellow icon On Collecting Data GeoLock is active but a localization solution does not yet exist o red icon No GPS Data or GeoLock requires Backsight set No NMEA data is available or the backsight has not yet been set o gray icon Off GeoLock is not enabled Results Card Remote Control Results The Results card shown above displays live angle data from the total station and live distance data is displayed depending on the current EDM mode Toggles the data displayed from the total station between HA HD and VD or HA ZA and SD R 159 Survey Pro Reference Manual Video Card This feature is only available when using a supported total station with a USB or supported radio connection and only on data collectors running Windows Mobile 5 The Video card displays a live video image from the total e o 2 ean station and allows you to adjust the camera video Battery 25 Link GOOD settings take a photo or turn the total station IDLE Tapping a
165. backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog if this button has been used A circle zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked 4 The first time is used during a stakeout session a dialog will appear to warn that the original backsight reference will be lost Note The button is not available when using a robotic total station lt Back returns to the previous screen Stake gt opens the final Station Staking screen used to perform the shots to stakeout the point This is identical to the third Stake Points screen described on Page R 272 R 323 Survey Pro Reference Manual Define a Location Define a Location The Define a Location screen is used to manually enter the distance and direction to a new point from any existing reference point and then stakeout the new point From Point is the reference point that the specified E Define a Location angle and distance information is applied to for locatin the new point Pp is dad null ke e Damm lo II Bearing is the direction from the reference Angle i222 point to the new point Horz Dt szat lt Angle is the angle to be added to the specified vert Dist besst v azimuth or bearing thus modifying the direction to the Height of Rod new point Gnesi a sels Note To subtract an angle from the specified azimuth or bearing enter a negative Angle value Close Settings
166. before restoring an older archive TDS job TOS RAW lt Back will return to the previous screen Warning Files will be overwritten Restore will restore the backed up job from the selected archive The current job is then deleted and replaced by the backup job Close Settings e R 30 File Menu Transfer The Transfer screen allows you to transfer files between the data collector and another device running TDS software ALARE Connecting to specifies which device you are communicating with from the following options Connecting to e HP48 if you are connecting to a Hewlett Packard Communications Settings HP48 calculator COM Part e Husky if you are connecting to a Husky FS series Sere ee data collector l e Ranger TSCe ACU Pocket PC if you are Parity connecting to any of the devices listed e Windows PC if you are connecting to a personal computer that is running Windows CE Services e Geodimeter 600 if you are connecting to a Geodimeter 600 series total station running TDS onboard software COM Port specifies which COM port you are using on the local machine Baud Rate specifies the communications speed The baud rate must match in both units for successful communications Parity specifies the parity The parity must match in both units When in doubt select None here All transfers are controlled from the PC when in this special mode Enter Server Mode places
167. cannot be tossed Del permanently deletes the most current observation if it is selected allowing you to shoot that shot again Reset permanently deletes all observations A warning prompt will appear before the observations are deleted R 154 Survey Menu The Enter Shot Data Screen a Horizontal Angle displays the horizontal angle E Enter Shot Data J measured by the total station This value is updated Horizontal Angle with the button described below Current Date Time o4fo7 2001 ro Current Date Time displays the current date time and DUT These settings can be changed from the Date Time Settings screen Page R 52 MM DO Bree 2 Date if incorrect the current date should be entered Hrs To GMT here m Time is where the precise time that the observation 555 loo occurred is entered l2 45 00 000 Hrs to GMT is the number of hours that the time at the Take Shot Get Local Time current location differs from Greenwich Mean Time DUT 0 0 Note The hours to GMT will be between 5 and 8 when in the continental United States Take Shot records the horizontal angle from the total station Get Local Time fills in the Time field with the current time that is set in the data collector This function is not available when shooting the backsight sun Shot Procedure Summary 1 Point the telescope ahead of the path of the sun and lock the horizontal movement of the total station
168. catch point e gt Horizontal Map displays an overhead view of the job Shot Data Aer tat gt Shot Data displays the shot data for the last shot Slope Dist 50 300 The button described below selects the type of slope that will be used from hinge point to the catch point from the following options e Automatic Slope selects the slope that is nearest to the current rod position R 297 Survey Pro Reference Manual e gt Force CUT Slope forces all computations to be based on a cut slope e gt Force FILL Slope forces all computations to be based on a fill slope HR is the rod height Rae opens the Smart Target options Page R 444 Topo SS will store the last shot taken as a side shot Shot takes a shot lt Back returns to the previous screen Store gt opens the next screen Point Slope Staking Screen Three The third Point Slope Staking screen is identical to the fifth Slope Staking screen and is described on Page R 292 R 298 Stakeout Menu Stake Line and Offset The Stake Line and Offset screen is used to stake stations on a line or at an offset to it at fixed intervals Grate lme Ani oike Start Point defines the first point of the line to be staked Define a Line Start Point fxjl4 Direction defines the second point of the line or the direction of the line to be staked respectively Be e Begin Station defines the station assoc
169. ce that can occur between all the shots to any specific point from a single setup If this value is exceeded a warning will occur M BS FS Sight Length lt Per Shot When checked a warning will occur whenever the horizontal distance of each leg in any given setup differs by more than this value M BS FS Sight Length lt Per Loop When checked the sum of the horizontal distances measured to all the backsight shots are R 48 Job Menu compared to the sum of the horizontal distances to all the foresight shots If the difference exceeds this value a warning will occur M Max Sight Lengths When checked a warning will occur whenever the horizontal distance measured to any point exceeds this value vM Min Ground Clearance When checked a warning will occur if a shot is taken at a location on the rod that is within this distance to the ground M Max Loop Misclosure When checked the error computed after a level loop is closed will be surrounded with exclamation points in the Close Loop screen and Level Notes screen if the error exceeds this value M Upper Lower Wire Reading lt When checked a warning will occur if the difference between the upper stadia and crosshair exceeds the difference between the crosshair and lower stadia by this value This only applies to the Three Wire level method Load FGCS Defaults Opens the FGCS Defaults screen described below where the default tolerances for a specified level loop order
170. cesses the Backsight Setup screen Page Seo ae aoO Next gt takes you to the next Road Station and Offset screen where the slope staking parameters are set up R 418 Roads Menu Road Station and Offset Screen Two The second Road Station and Offset screen is used to take a shot to the prism and view the data from various cards Height of Rod is the length of the rod E Road Station and Offset Height of Rod EDM This button can be toggled to shoot in various Coarse EDM Fast Shot EDM modes The options available depend on the total Alignment Cross Section Shot Data station being used Consult the total station s Station 1 12 281 documentation for more information on the EDM modes Offset Dist 26 003 that it supports Eley 99 927 a E Shot takes a shot to the prism Template t1 lt Back returns to the previous screen Right of Arc H Store stores the stake point Close Settings Alignment Card Station displays the station at the rod position Template displays the name of the template that is used at the rod position Segment displays the name of the template s segment at the rod position Elev displays the elevation at the rod position Offset Dist displays the perpendicular offset from the centerline to the rod position Right of Line Left of Line On Line displays if the rod position is to the right of the centerline left of the centerline or on
171. cified perpendicular offset to an existing set of points a polyline or an alignment Tap Line allows you to tap an existing polyline or alignment that the offset will be computed from Offset en OL Wr pe To From allows you to enter a range of points that define the line where the offset will be computed from Offset defines the offset distance and which side the A offset occurs The right or left side is referenced from the Description first point that defines the specified line Choose a Center Line to Offset from pm i ar H ers you to Hee resulting line in e ap view witnout Saving en anything Enl Offset Line Wiew result only e Save to job as an alignment when checked Input Es Mmao o the computed offset line will be saved as a new alignment under the name specified in the Description field e Save to job as a Polyline when checked the computed offset line will be saved as a new polyline under the name specified in the Description field Note Spiral curves cannot be generated in a new offset alignment If the original centerline contains any spiral curves they will be treated as straight sections in the offset alignment that is created The Offset Staking or Offset Points routine should be used to stake offsets from a spiral curve Description is the description that will be given to the new alignment or polyline Solve computes and optionally stores the new offse
172. ck opens the Roads Report screen and displays any errors see Page R 399 fy Mirror to Right New opens the New Template screen which is New identical to the Edit Template screen where a new Cancel template can be created see Page R 395 opens the Edit Template screen where the selected template can be modified see Page R 395 although accessing the templates editor from here will not allow inserting or removing of segments R 403 Survey Pro Reference Manual The Widenings Card Edit Roads New or Edit Widenings The Widenings card of the New Road screen is used to add or edit widenings A widening is a section of a road that changes in width E Edit Road ok but does not necessarily require any new templates The edit Check Remove road width is adjusted by changing only the width of the pam pec somo first segment of the template that leads into the 0 25 z 1 25 00 beginning of the widening Any additional segments lt End gt like those that may describe a sidewalk or ditch are not adjusted The following rules must be considered when adding a widening to a road a e A widening must have a starting station and an ending station or a length es 20 S e Left and right widenings are separate and Widenings Supd 4 gt independent of each other Cancel e The start and end stations must occur within the boundaries of the alignment e The start
173. control file will be imported into the new job Use External Control File When selected the control points in the control file will be accessible from the new job but will not be imported Control File displays the path and control file name selected with the button Browse will open the Open screen Page R 14 where an existing job can be selected as a control file lt Back returns you to the previous screen Next gt opens the next screen R 10 File Menu Create a New Job 3 Azimuth Type specifies if you are surveying with a fig Create a New Job 4x 9 47 North Azimuth or South Azimuth Azrnuth i i iess l Type ahia Units for Distances specifies if your distances will be entered in International Feet U S Feet or Meters Distances ee Degrees Note You can enter a distance in any distance field in E Ea tGii eee units other than what is set for the job by appending the LT Refraction distance value with the following characters L n 1 0 e for ftor ift International Feet e usf or usft US Survey Feet e iorin Inches em Meters lt Back Next gt een NG even emm Millimeters e Cor ch Chains Once the cursor leaves that field the distance will be converted automatically A space between the value and the unit abbreviation is optional Units for Angles specifies if angles will be entered in Degrees or Grads M Adjust for Earth Curvature Refraction When checked the elevations recorde
174. creen although the Results screen will still appear if the Show Results on OK checkbox was never unchecked from this screen It is checked by default Stake Road Stakeout Results This screen shows detailed cut fill values which may be needed when marking a road or offset stake Slope Close returns you to the second Stake Road screen ies where the Design point is advanced by the Increment value Station Design Actual Hinge Point H Cut Center Line HD Fill Template Segment 1 HO R 414 0 00 000 R 20 0 Es Stakeout Results Right Cut 2 000 19 610 O 00 000 0 00 016 2 175 0 111 28 175 0 589 T Roadbed 8 175 Roads Menu Road Slope Staking The Road Slope Staking screen is used to locate the catch point of the road at any station fi Road Slope St 7 q 10 03 ior f JB H v Mame Example Begin Station 0 00 000 End Station 3 76 540 Use Station Equation Equation Settings OCC 1 Hi 5 000 BS 0 00 00 Backsight Tap Road opens the Tap on a Road screen where you can tap on any road in the job to select it Name displays the name of the selected road Begin Station displays the station assigned to the beginning of the road End Station displays the final station in the road Use Station Equation When checked the current station equation will be applied to the road Equation Settings opens the Station Equation scre
175. ct Left Edge of Center Center or Right Edge of Center R 152 E Select Method Select an Observation Method cy Find Azimuth Using Enhemeris Data O Find Azimuth Using Date and Time Enli Solar Observation Lat B7 2700 Lng 98 3108 O Aim Left Edge of Center GHA24 Deco Decle4 Solar Semi Diameter Corrections Non Linear Declination Y State Grid M Input Results Settings Close Survey Menu Note Typically Left Edge of Center is selected when performing a sun shot in the northern hemisphere and Center is selected for star shots a E Corrections displays which corrections are currently selected with an N for no or a Y for yes When tapped the Corrections screen opens where the following C Correct to Grid corrections are configured Center Meridian Non Linear Declination Correction e M Non linear Declination Correction applies a correction for the linear interpolation of the declination of the sun for the time that an observation is taken This error is usually negligible but is removed when this is checked This should only be checked when performing sun shots e M Correct to State Grid When selected the computed azimuth is referenced from the local State Plane grid rather than true north _ Use Zone Constant e Center Meridian Zone Constant these values are used to adjust the computed azimuth to the local State Plane grid Appendix A lists these values fo
176. ctions R 320 Stakeout Menu Cross Section View The Cross Section View screen is used to view the station surface and offset details of the loaded LandXML file The upper portion of the screen lists the Station Northing 0 20 000 Easting and Elevation at the selected node 7 428 167 m 38 516 309 m The larger graphic area displays the cross sectional view 412 762 of the selected surface The smaller graphic area displays the horizontal view of the centerline ba Zoom Extents will zoom so the entire cross section will fit inside the frame Zoom In Button will zoom the current screen in by approximately 25 H Surfaces Ea Zoom Out Button will zoom the current screen out ot B5 by approximately 25 oe R E expands a list where you can select to zoom to a window zoom up vertically or zoom down vertically Stations allows you to scroll through and view all the stations in the LandXML file Surfaces allows you to scroll through and view all the surfaces in the LandXML file Offset allows you to scroll through and view the details of the node at the selected offset Tap amp Close to exit from this screen R 321 Survey Pro Reference Manual Station Staking Screen Two Station Staking Next gt The second Station Staking screen is used to configure which Station Surface and Offset you want to stake Use the corresponding and buttons to scroll the available Station Surface and
177. curacy M Use Manual Updating Remote Control When this is checked a Shot button in the stakeout screens must be pressed to take a shot When this not checked shots are continuously taken in the stakeout screens This is only valid when running in remote mode using a robotic total station R 45 Survey Pro Reference Manual M Design Elevation from Offset Segment Determines where the cut fill value is computed from in the Offset and Road Stakeout screens when the Offset checkbox is checked and a non zero offset is entered When checked the cut fill value is calculated from the design elevation of the node you are staking to When unchecked the cut fill value is calculated from the design elevation at the specified offset location Note If the specified offset extends beyond the end of the road profile the cut fill value is always computed from the design elevation of the node you are staking to M Write Cut Sheet Data Only No Store Point When checked as built points are not stored to the JOB file when staking points only the raw data is written to the RAW file M View from Gun to Rod non remote When checked the move left or right information will be presented from the rod person s point of view When unchecked it will be presented from the total station s point of view This option only applies when a robotic total station is selected in the Instrument Settings M View from Rod to Gun remote When c
178. current station Information for the selected segment is Northing displayed in the right portion of the screen The name for Suen the selected segment is shown between these buttons Bbvation Go opens a dialog box where a specific station can be entered Once amp is tapped the profile at the entered location is shown in the Road Profiles screen Prof opens the Details screen and lists several details mens H about the road s cross sectional profile at the current station Roadbed iia Seg opens the Details screen and lists information related to the selected segment at the current station R 401 Survey Pro Reference Manual Road Alignment Properties Screen Roads Edit Roads New or Edit Road Set POB The Road Alignment Properties screen is used to change information about the current alignment En Road Alignment Props Description is the name of the current alignment A Description new name can be assigned to the alignment from this field KE gt Point Location depending how this button is E toggled you can change the POB of the alignment by Elev entering a new point number or new coordinates M Start Station replaces the existing starting station of start Station 00 A the alignment with the starting station entered here The Templates Card New or Edit Templates The Templates card of the New Road screen is used to add e
179. current status and access the settings for a GPS receiver when using the GeoLock feature Page R 157 It is only available from the Remote Control and Remote Shot screens when using a Trimble or Geodimeter robotic total station File Menu The File Menu contains routines to transfer files between the data collector and another device Open New Save As Import Export Control File Backup Restore Job Transfer Register Modules About Survey Pro Exit 77 FT OARS Oe PS Survey Pro Reference Manual Open New The Open New screen is used to open a recent job or create a new one This screen also appears when Survey Pro is first started Open opens the job selected in the Open a Recent J ob mr ah ade 11 01 list Fie Open a Recent Job EEEE will open the 0 eRe T Browse will open the Open screen Page R 14 where E 3 15 2004 LL an existing job to open can be selected OTM 3 12 2004 12 job1 3 11 2004 2 3 New will open the New screen Page R 9 where a job2 3 11 2004 2 2 Stake Test 001 2 2 2004 10 3 new job can be created Open an Existing Job Browse Create a New Job R 8 File Menu New Job New The New Job wizard is used to create a new job Create a New Job 1 ia Create a New Job 7 f 2 59 New Job Name Directory Built in Storage Survey Pro Jobs Job Mame Wise or Import a Control File Press the Next button to select which control fle to imp
180. d allows you to disable tracking specific satellites which is useful if the receiver is tracking a noisy satellite SNR Plot This card lists all the satellites that are in view and shows a bar graph that indicates the signal to noise ratio A longer bar indicates more noise and a lower quality signal USI is the universal identifier number of the satellite that you wish to disable or re enable For GPS satellites this will be the Pseudo Random Noise PRN number and will be between 1 and 37 For GLONASS satellites this will be the Frequency Channel Number FCN 45 and will be between 45 and 70 Enable ALL enable all the satellites that were disabled Key a Sy sedi 7 S Lock 8 Elev Mask 10 Inside Circle Sky View Sat Info Position al gt Qo gt E SV Control us Enable ALL Deabie sv Enable sv Sky View Sat Info Position a o gt Al Disable SV disables the USI entered above This satellite will then no longer be used in any solution until it is re enabled Enable Sv re enables the USI entered above SV List This card lists signal quality information for each satellite being used which is reported by the receiver The columns available depend on the receiver being used R 172 Solution Fixed Survey Menu GPS Module Consult your receiver s documentation for more information Position The Position card d
181. d from all shots will be adjusted to compensate for earth curvature and refraction M User Scale Factor When checked all horizontal distances when taking shots will be adjusted by the scale factor entered here Next gt opens the final screen which can be one of two different possible screens depending on if a control file is being imported amp Cancel cancels the creation of a new job and brings you back to the main menu R 11 Survey Pro Reference Manual Create a New Job 4 Imported Control File This screen will only open when a control file is being imported ian Create a New Job gi a x 3 49 halCreate a New Job go a x 3 50 _ Enter First Point Enter First Point Job points will be imported Point Mame from control file Built in Storage Survey Pro noe Jobs job job Northing Easting 5100 0 ft Elevation 100 0 ft Description Start Screen when checkbox is Screen when checkbox is unchecked checked Enter First Point When this box is checked the additional fields will appear allowing you to create a new point Note Although all new jobs must have at least one point creating a new point when importing a control file is optional since points are already being loaded into the job in the form of control points Point Name is the name of the initial point Northing is the Y coordinate of the initial point Easting is the X coordinate of the initial point Elevation is the elev
182. d is a series of screens that allow you to adjust a closed traverse for angular error and or perform a compass rule adjustment on a closed or open traverse Tap Polyline AE Angle Adjustment Polygon Rule Compass Rule Bowditch Adjustment _ Adjust Elevations Adjust Sideshats Choose Your Traverse is used to select a traverse to adjust from the following options e Tap Polyline is used to tap an existing polyline from a map view e To From provides selection of points by point name M Angle Adjust When checked will perform an angle adjustment to the closed traverse An angle adjustment will apply the angular error equally among all of the angles of the closed traverse and adjust the coordinates for all but the first two traverse points The first leg of the traverse is not adjusted M Compass Rule When checked will perform a compass rule adjustment on the selected traverse R 427 Survey Pro Reference Manual M Adjust elevation When selected the elevations for the traverse points are also adjusted from the compass rule adjustment M Adjust Sideshots When checked any side shots that were stored while occupying the traverse points in the selected traverse will also be adjusted The side shot locations will be recomputed using the original angles and distances stored in the raw data file along with the adjusted locations of the occupy and backsight points The user cannot explici
183. d origin Scale displays the ground scale factor R 223 Survey Pro Reference Manual Remote Elevation The Remote Elevation screen is used to compute and store a new base point elevation and vertical site by occupying a known vertical benchmark at the rover Note The Remote Elevation screen is only available when a geoid model is used for the vertical projection the horizontal projection is already solved and the base and rover are set Base Point displays the current base point number and fF Remote Elevation gt dx Solution Fixed Radia 99 Sv OF HRMS 0 02 elevation details Info opens detailed information about the base point Base Point 1 Add Benchmark Elevation When checked a new point Elipse h 64 999 m will be created in the job file with the entered elevation Old oe oe 100 000 m We will calculate N E from the GPS New Elevation m measurement lat lng and store the new point with the fee Banc heaaL entered Elevation L Elevation Elevation When Add Benchmark Elevation is checked Select Point Es cHae_ f this is the elevation of the new point Select Point New Point is the existing or new esc a benchmark point name that you will occupy PO wv E Set HR displays the current antenna measurement and measure to setting You can change the antenna measurement by entering a new value in the edit box This new antenna height will be sent to the receiver with your next
184. d with this receiver e Selected Antenna is displayed when you have entered new antenna measurements using the Receiver Antenna screen Page R 181 Measured is where you enter the measured antenna height for the specified measure to mark Offset is the reduced offset slant correction plus phase center offset for the currently selected antenna type and measure to mark Setup HR opens the Receiver Antenna screen Page R 181 where you can change the antenna type measure to mark and offsets R 196 ae Static Receiver Sessi 4r ix T Sw OG HOOP 1 80 Store pt in Receiver and job file Log Until Stop min o__ sec Survey Menu GPS Module Note The Post Processing screen is used to start logging with post processing receiver types only If you wish to record post processing data simultaneous with RTK then you should set the recording interval on the Job Settings Post Process screen and then start the base and rover using the Start GPS Survey wizard When you tap the Post Processing menu while connected to either the RTK base or rover you have only two options If the RTK receiver is already recording data you are prompted if you wish to close the open logging file If the RTK receiver is not logging data you are prompted if you wish to clear the RTK setup and proceed using this receiver for post processing data collection only Static RTK Rover Receiver Session or Post Processing
185. d x is the number of total points to set in this sequence Coordinate Type is where you select the type of coordinates being entered Grid Local LLH or WGS84 Latitude __ LLH The selection made here determines the format for Longitude OOOO O O the following three fields Latitude North The Latitude Northing of the control point source Longitude East The Longitude Easting of the control point source Height Elevation The Height Elevation of the control point source Next gt Restarts the wizard if more control points need to be set or opens the final screen if all control points are set Review Results and Finish The final screen of the wizard shows a preview of the control point coordinates to be created If there is only one point selected the Single Point Results page will open If there are multiple points selected the Multiple Points Results page will be open R 227 Survey Pro Reference Manual Single Point Results This page displays the values to be used to create the new GPS control point New GPS Control Point to be Created This shows the new NEE location for the selected point the existing LLH location the existing NEE location and the deltas between the new and old locations This will also include data sheet details if the control point source comes from an NGS data sheet or an OPUS Solution Report file Tap Finish to determines what will occur after tapping
186. data collection point You can change both the antenna measurement and measure to setting by tapping on to open the Receiver Antenna screen Page R 181 Accept Updates the projection with the vertical solution calculated from the control point observation and opens the Adjust with Projection wizard to update all job file points including the base point with the latest vertical solution R 224 Survey Menu GPS Module Occupy Benchmark opens the Occupy Control Point screen Page R 194 where the measurement is taken by the rover on the remote benchmark The New Elevation field of the Remote Elevation screen will then display the calculated elevation for the base point to be set on tapping Accept Import GPS Control The Import GPS Control wizard is used to merge an accurate NEE location control point source with a GPS collected point in the job file This point will then be designated as a GPS control point and can be used to solve a localization adjustment Solving the localization adjustment can be done automatically at the end of this wizard manually after the end of this wizard or at a later time There are three methods to import the control point source e Import from a text format OPUS Solution Report email e Import from a text format NGS Datasheet file e Key ina coordinate in NEE LLH WGS84 or LLH local J GPS Import Control 6 25 Select Points and Import Source Select one or more GPS
187. data for post processing Use Remote Base gt opens the Rover Setup screen Use this option when an RTK base is already set and broadcasting corrections or when connecting to an Ntrip server when using VRS and you will start by connecting to a rover to begin the survey R 176 Survey Menu GPS Module Select Geoid Model The Select Geoid Model screen is used to select a geoid model to use with your coordinate system This screen will open when or Use Remote Base is selected in the previous screen and you have not previously selected a Geoid Model HG Select Geoid Mo 4 9 08 Geoid Model is where you select a model to use from the Geoid Model drop down list Geoid Model GEOIDS9 conus File Name is where you view the descriptive name from the geoid data file header for the File selected File Name pare of Geoid9 Conus File is where you view the name of the GGF data file for the selected geoid or pick from a list of GGF files if more File than one data file is found for this geoid Oregon G99 got x Accept f accepts any change to the Geoid Model selection and returns to the previous screen Note The geoid for the mapping plane zone and the ground localization zone is the same Changes to the D Eaj i i geoid for one record will occur in both Connect To Receiver The Connect to Receiver screen will prompt you to choose and connect to the receiver required for the next step of GPS set
188. de shot before taking the necessary shots to record it Choose a Point to Foresight as a Leveling SS Point is the name for the new point Side Shot a SS Point Zz Jl Desc is an optional description for the new point Desc Default Location for New Points is where you specify Default Location for New Points the northing and easting to use when the new point is N stored since the leveling procedure cannot compute these Backsight Point TP 2 1 Backsight Point Lists the details for the current Blew 100 000 backsight If this is the first observation from the Rod 7 245 HI 107 245 current set up most of the details will be unknown H Dist 45 230 Next gt opens the Take Shot screen Page R 260 where the required shots are performed Om R 261 Survey Pro Reference Manual Leveling Stakeout The Leveling Stakeout screen is used to measure the elevation at an existing point and compute a cut fill value Stk Point is the point in the current job that you want to shoot to determine the cut fill value The location for this point must be known in advance since the leveling routine cannot compute horizontal coordinates Backsight Point Lists the details for the current backsight If this is the first observation from the current set up most of the details will be unknown Next gt opens the Take Shot screen Page R 260 where the required shots are performed Turn to Benchmark an ax 1
189. de the selected DTM unsuitable for TIN generation on the boundary the point is automatically stored on the selected auxilary layer Auxiliary layer If left unchecked a prompt will appear when storing a point outside the boundary where you must specify the layer to store the new point Layer Auxiliary is the layer that all points will be stored to if they cannot be stored to the DTM layer R 79 Survey Pro Reference Manual Choose Polyline The Choose Polyline screen is used to select an existing polyline that defines a boundary for your non reference DTM surface All the polylines in the current job are displayed Select the appropriate polyline and tap amp Add Edit Break lines The Add Edit Break lines screen is used to select edit create or delete the break lines that will be used when computing the DTM The break lines that will be used when computing the DTM are listed in this screen Edit opens the Edit Polyline screen where the selected polyline can be modified or a new polyline can be created Delete will move the selected polyline to the Auxiliary layer Add Existing will display all the polylines in the current job Selecting a polyline and tapping amp will move the selected polyline to the DTM layer R 80 E Choose Polyline Boundary 435 441 440 h CE 441 699 Polyline miete e am pa Stream 299 255 360 Enli Add Edit Break lines Add Existing
190. ded by tapping them If the blunder detector i Ae a 112 26 44 detected any poor quality control it will automatically CORY Yes Yes 1 29 7 turn off that control before this screen opens aa pa Occupy Additional Check Point The possible outcomes of the solve localization and blunder detection are e Green Light If the localization solved and no blunders were detected you will see a green light and the status line will show the root mean squared RMS error of the horizontal and vertical solution j Start survey WoO gr f 8 12 Eer e fF Yes Yes 1 92 1 32 e Yellow Warning Triangle If the localization solved and no blunders were detected but some of the points used have a large residual error you will see a yellow triangle and the status line will show the point with the largest horizontal and or vertical residual R 247 Survey Pro Reference Manual Red Stop Sign If the localization solved and blunders were detected that could not be clearly identified or if you were prompted to remove blunders and you said no then you will see a red stop sign and the status line will indicate there are possible blunders in the solution Yellow Arrow If the localization solved but the control points are not spaced far enough apart to run the automatic blunder detection then you will see a yellow arrow and the status line will indicate the poor geometry of the control points or if the localization fails to solve
191. detic coordinates 7 Do not adjust job O Do not adjust job gt gt Projection readjust with select new gt Projection readjust with select new gt gt Readiust Transformer Method gt gt Readiust Transformer Method H Readjust from projection Oregon H Readjust with change of calibratic Horizontal locations will be update Horizontal locations will be update Y Readjust from projection GEOIDO W Readjust with change of calibratic Vertical location will be updated Vertical location will be updated QO E Prompt choose points Prompt geodetic points only Adjust job with new projection is where you choose to adjust the job file points with the change of coordinate system Adjust Horizontal and or Vertical is where you choose how to update the horizontal and vertical coordinates in the job There are two choices Adjust All Points use this setting when you want to adjust all points The method used to adjust plane and geodetic points is described on the Select Points page Adjust only points with geodetic coordinates use this setting when you want to update only geodetic points The method used to adjust geodetic points is described on the Select Points page Note The display of these controls will vary depending on the difference between the old and new coordinate system First if you change the coordinate system in only one dimension the display title will indicate which dimension the setting is for Second
192. distance from the Occupy Point to the Foresight Point Vert Dist is the vertical distance from the Occupy Point to the Foresight Point Point is the name of the stored point Desc is the description of the stored point Location N is the Y coordinate of the stored point Location E is the X coordinate of the stored point Location Z is the elevation of the stored point R 121 Survey Pro Reference Manual Traverse Now or Later After taking a shot with the button the Traverse Now or Later dialog box will open where you can specify if you want to traverse now or later Traverse Now expects you to move your total station to the next occupy point before any additional shots are taken The occupy foresight and backsight points will be updated accordingly Traverse Later allows you to take additional side shots before moving the total station to the next traverse point This is useful is you want to take side shots from the current occupy point but perform the traverse shot as the first shot of the current set up to ensure the highest accuracy When you have finished taking side shots tap the M Traverse Now or Later fou can either traverse to the new point now or later by pressing the Traverse button again Traverse Point 4 Traverse Now Traverse Later button again You can then select and set up on the next occupy point or select Shoot New Traverse to re shoot the
193. dit Segment Vertical Curve The Vertical Curve card is used to enter a parabolic vertical curve to the alignment Length is the horizontal length of the vertical curve Start Grade is the starting grade of the vertical curve End Grade is the ending grade of the vertical curve Get Previous Grade will automatically enter a Start Grade equal to the grade at the end of the previous segment R 72 E Edit Segment iV Get Previous Grade Vv Grade Cancel E Edit Segment Length 250 0 ft End Grade 2 a Y Get Previous Grade Y Curve Cancel Job Menu Auto Linework Auto Linework Enli Auto Linework Description Cod On End Props ce poe e Fee a DS fer e a b gt Remove collection will generate the specified polyline segment linework The Auto Linework screen is used to set up custom descriptors that can be used to generate various polylines between points as they are shot These features can than be exported and used in the TDS ForeSight software Note The auto linework information described below is not written to the raw data file If using a conversion routine that only uses a raw data file all linework commands must be manually entered into the raw data file in the form of a note by using the Add Note Quick Pick See the User s manual for details on customizing the Quick Pick list Description lists the descriptions defined from u
194. dule Rover Setup The Rover Setup screen is used to set an RTK rover to begin receiving differential corrections and to configure or check the base reference position in Survey Pro The Rover Setup screen is described as part of the Start GPS Survey wizard Projection Projection ia Projection B lt P 12 41 HF Projection B er qf 12 42 Ground TDS Localization Mapping Plane Localization Solved Tap Select Zone to setup a mapping plane Ground distances ath 619 m Yertical Localization Show Details Show Details Select Zone 18582 EIU ao Mapping Plane Ground Solve Localization _Solve Localization Solve Localization Switch to using a mapping plane fom the coordinate system database Switch to using Ground TOS Localization mode Switch to Mapping Plane Switch to TDS Localization Ground TDS Localization Mode Mapping Plane Mode The Projection Information screen is used to select and solve the horizontal and vertical projections which are used to transform GPS measured WGS84 coordinates latitude longitude height into local coordinates North East EKlevation The upper portion of the screen displays the status and details on the current projection mode The screen is also used to switch between mapping plane and localization mode The buttons available will vary depending on the current projection mode TDS Localization mode is described in R 201 Survey Pro Refe
195. e Datum is where you view or select the horizontal datum for this zone R 214 Survey Menu GPS Module Note Some zones in the database may not have a default datum attached In this case the datum control is a list box and you must select from the data base datums before you can set the zone Use Geoid is where you choose to use a geoid model with this zone You can pick a geoid model from the database using the drop down box Select Database opens the Select Database screen where you select the coordinate system database to use Delete Zone Deletes the currently selected site or zone Note This delete function cannot be undone Also you cannot delete system database records If you select a protected record you will be prompted that the record cannot be deleted Key In Zone gt opens the Key In Zone screen where you can create a custom map projection zone ellipsoid and datum accepts the currently selected zone and opens the Adjust with Projection wizard After the preview of the adjustment results the new coordinate system is set and the raw data is written Select Database Select Zone Select Database The Select Database screen is described on Page R 205 R 215 Survey Pro Reference Manual Key in Zone Key In Zone Setup The Key In Zone Setup screen is used to pick the zone and datum type for the new zone as well as set the azimuth orientation and grid direction for the new
196. e When selected the points are exported 3 LandxML xML File to an ASCII text file that is comma delimited and the file Next gt is automatically given a CSV extension Next gt opens the next screen which is determined by the selected file type R 22 File Menu Export Screen Two The second Export screen will open for any file type that was selected in the previous screen except LandXML This screen is used to select the points from the current project that you want to export to the selected file type Exporting to a LandXML file is described later To From allows you to specify a range of points to export Select the Points ta Export D points selected Tap Points allows you to select the points to export by To From From tapping them from a map view H byl The power button provides additional point selection options which include selecting all control points all non control points and selection by description lt Back returns to the previous screen Next gt opens the next screen which is determined by the selected file type Export JOB Coordinates When exporting to another JOB file the Save As screen is opened where the file name and location is entered for the new JOB file Export Old JOB Coordinates This option functions exactly as the Export JOB routine described above only the resulting file is written to be compatible with
197. e Corner and Offset screen is used to store a point using a reflectorless total station for a point that cannot be shot directly but the offset s to the point can be measured from a reference line that can be shot Foresight is the name of the point that will be stored Description is the description for the point that will be stored HR 0 000 shows that no rod height will be used with this routine since all shots are direct reflectorless Horiz Offset is the horizontal distance on the line from Shot 1 to the new point Select Lif the new point falls to the left of Shot 1 or select R if it falls to the right Perpendicular Offset is the horizontal distance perpendicular to the reference line from the line to the new point see diagram A positive value extends away from the total station where a negative value is closer to the total station Elevation Offset is the vertical offset from the line to the new point See diagram A positive value will result in a new point above the reference line and a negative value results in a new point below the reference line Shoot Line will prompt you to take two shots on the horizontal reference line Note Each shot can be in any location on the reference line Shot 1 can be to the left or the right of Shot 2 but the Horiz Offset is always measured from Shot 1 E Corner amp Offset pI o Foresight Desc HR 0 000 Left right Direction From GUM to P
198. e Scan HR 0 00 ift ae ae Eq Select Type of Surface Scan Select the type of surface scan to perform here The option selected will determine how you will define your perimeter and distance intervals Distance Grid Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Are the point names that will be used when storing the upper left upper right and lower points that define the surface perimeter R 138 Survey Menu Note If any points defining your perimeter already exist the point names can be entered in these fields without re shooting them Shoot 1 Shoot 2 Shoot 3 Shoots and stores the corresponding point Horizontal Distance Interval is the horizontal distance between each shot taken during the surface scan Vertical Distance I nterval is the vertical distance between each shot taken during the surface scan Angle Grid gt Point Allows you to define the corners of your perimeter by taking a shot to measure the horizontal and zenith angles to each corner or enter them in by hand or by selecting existing points from the current job respectively Horizontal Angle I nterval is the horizontal angle that will be turned between each shot taken during the surface scan Vertical Angle I nterval is the vertical angle that will be turned between each shot taken during the surface scan HR is the rod height which should typically be set to zero since all shots taken are reflectorless no rod Show Out
199. e Time Interval After accepting the first point PERRE a additional points will automatically be stored E S eee after the specified time interval in seconds has layer and attributes for the first point elapsed Each successive point name is ema t wil be stored with incremented to the next available name Start A Description e Distance Interval 2D 3D After accepting the first point additional points will automatically be stored after traveling the specified horizontal ors AF or 3D distance Each successive point name is _ incremented to the next available name e Hold Still For After accepting the first point additional points are automatically stored when the pole is held in the same spot for the specified interval of time in seconds e Manual prompt once stores points in the same way as tapping Topo SS from the Data Collection screen incrementing the point name after each stored point e Manual prompt every point performs the same function as the Manual Prompt Once routine above except you are R 188 Survey Menu GPS Module prompted for a new description layer and attribute with each point stored Interval is where you enter the interval criteria used for continuous collection modes The Interval field is not available if either of the manual methods is selected Update Rate is where you set the receiver to One Hz or Five Hz mode When Five Hz is selected the receiver will compute positions fi
200. e been stored and when the next point will be stored Enl Auto Collect Store Point 14 In 0 885 ft Battery 02 Locked Points Stored Elapsed Time Distance Speed AR 338 17 11 24 90 OS 47 sD 42 067 Close Settings The box in the upper left corner displays the direction and distance the total station is aiming relative to the backsight The upper right corner displays the next store point number and when the next point will be stored in either seconds or distance The lower left corner is a graphic that shows the current total station position the current prism position and when collecting by distance the approximate location of the next store point represented by an X based on the speed and direction the prism is moving from the previous store point Previous stored points are also displayed as dots in this part of the screen The lower right corner of the screen displays the number of points that have been stored and the speed and direction the prism is traveling Store Now stores a point at the current prism location even if the time distance criteria is not yet met lt Back returns to the previous Auto Collect screen Stop toggles between starting or stopping the Auto Collect routine R 133 Survey Pro Reference Manual Corner amp 2 Lines The Corner and 2 Lines screen is used to store a point at ae M Corner amp 2 Lines the corner of a structure using a
201. e computed mapping plane scale factor on the selected mapping plane at the reference point Ellipsoid Scale Factor displays the computed ellipsoid scale factor at the reference point Combined Scale Factor displays the Mapping Plane Scale Factor multiplied by the Ellipsoid Scale Factor This is the ground to grid scale factor Inverse Combined Factor displays the inverse of the Combined Scale Factor This is the grid to ground scale factor and is the value used in the localization solution lt Back returns you to the previous Projection Calculator screen Accept copies the two computed values to past results and returns you to the Main Menu R 238 DF Projection Calculator 47 x C Mapping Plane Scale Factor 0 9999571 Elipsoid Scale Factor 0 99999135 Ground to Grid Combined scale factor 0 9999433 Grid to Ground Inverse combined factor 1 000056 7 Oo 7 x E Survey Menu GPS Module File Management The File Management routine is used to manage post processing files on a supported GPS receiver The routine can delete post processing files from the receiver or recover files that were recently deleted The files can also be copied or moved from the receiver to the data collector for more convenient transfers to a PC Active Files The Active Files page lists the details of all the post processing files that are currently on the receiver Files File Name can be selected from this list t
202. e conventional method except that the button is replaced with a button to configure rover antenna and the backsight information is replaced with rover antenna height information See Page R 312 for details stake DTM Stakeout Stake DTM The Stake DTM routine allows you to stake an area and get cut fill and volume information based on a reference DTM or specified elevation datum The first screen of this routine is similar to the conventional method except that the Backsight button is replaced with a Setup HR button to configure rover antenna and the backsight information is replaced with rover antenna height information See Page R 315 for details DTM GPS Shot Stake DTM The DTM GPS Shot screen displays all relevant information on the current rover position and a graphic that shows the rover location the occupied TIN triangle and the rectangular DTM corners of the DTM boundary R 340 Data Result Mi 5 072 525 E 5 096 654 EL 82 745 Point 3002 Desc HR 1 657 ee aa Li T LI ia ee e z a Stakeout Menu GPS amp Basic GPS Module Note the DTM boundary corners and TIN triangle may not be visible depending on the current scale of the screen OCCUPYING gt ROVING switches from ROVING to OCCUPYING mode When ROVING the receiver is in dynamic mode and will calculate your position as you move to the point When OCCUPYING the receiver is switched to
203. e current connection settings Bluetooth or serial for the base and MAES G ef d 8 29 rover receivers Bluetooth connections are represented by a icon and a serial connection is shown with a green icon when the connection is active and a grey icon Current Connection Settings when the connection is inactive Rover BtRx01007 Change Settings Opens the Change Settings screen 3 Base Serial Cable described below Change Settings Bluetooth Setup Wizard Opens the Bluetooth Setup Wizard where you can detect and configure any Bluetooth EPOCH 25 receivers as described below Connections Radio Settings Mead 4 p R 106 Job Menu Basic GPS Module Change Settings Settings Connections Change Settings The Change Settings screen can be used to quickly switch the base rover receiver between serial and Bluetooth and access other Bluetooth tools 5 connection set G g gt A 7 44 Windows Bluetooth Settings Opens the Windows Boye Bluetooth Settings screen where Bluetooth devices can C serial be configured You will typically only use this screen Bluetooth when configuring a Bluetooth cellular phone for Internet base corrections as described in the Radio Settings Base screen on Page 109 2 Serial Verify Bluetooth Choices f Opens the Verify Bluetooth Bluetooth BtRxO1i20 0008ac026257 Choices screen described below Verity Bluetooth Choices AE LNS ae e J ob Set
204. e file is automatically overwritten when logging traffic on a date that is different from the previous date R 55 Survey Pro Reference Manual Edit Points The Edit Points screen allows you to add edit and delete any points in the current job Edit if only a single point is selected this will open E Edit Points the point in the Edit Point General screen Page R 58 Point bescrston Northing where the details of the point can be modified If more START than one point is selected the next Edit Points screen PT2 5 710 236 will open where the description and layer for the selected PT3 5740 539 l l PT3 5 654 969 points can be modified simultaneously PTS 5 159 295 PTO 3 196 240 PT7 4 970 510 CLOSET 3 000 076 PT SU 3341 933 ah anes 152 ei mon oc mon E OW fh ie Note Multiple points can be selected by tapping the first point in a range then tap the shift key from a soft input panel such as the TDS Keyboard and lastly tap the last point in the point range Individual points in a point range can be selected unselected by tapping the control a a key from a soft input panel and then tapping the desired find Find Next GoTo points A Note Double tapping on a point will open that point in the editor Note The current occupy and backsight points cannot be edited Insert opens a screen where a new point can be added Delete wil
205. e go cut fill information Stake Next gt returns you to the second Stake Road screen without storing a stake point where the Design point is advanced by the Increment value Topo SS stores a side shot using the data from the last shot taken This will not take a new shot Store Tape accesses the Stake Out Point Tape Offset dialog box Page R 305 where the staked point can be stored that includes a specified offset The default value is the appropriate distance correction to the design point Turn Gun available with robotic total station turns the total station toward the design point lt Back returns to the second screen Store opens the next screen R 413 Survey Pro Reference Manual Stake Road Screen Five This screen is used to describe the stake point before it is stored and select if the Results screen should be displayed described next Point is the point name for the stake point being stored Description is the description for the stake point being stored The default description is the station side and distance from the centerline for the design point Show Results on OK When this checkbox is checked a Results screen described next will open after tapping from this screen o Point Description Show Results on OK Note This screen will not appear if the Write Cut Sheet Data Only No Store Point checkbox is checked in the Stakeout Settings s
206. e is opened it is automatically converted and stored to a JOB file with the same name If a matching RW5 raw data file exists it too will be converted and saved to a Survey Pro RAW file with a note inserted indicating that the conversion took place When a job is being opened the Loading JOB file screen will open briefly and display the status of the loading process R 14 Job Files JOB SJ Built in Storage Survey Pro Jobs Mame 03 30 2004 job 103 30 2004 job ee FA Basemap job E Loading JOB file Loading DTM job Progress LL lt lt Points A E Polylines DE Alignments D n m77 Status Loading points Cancel File Menu Save As The Save As screen allows you to save a copy of the current job under anew name The copy that is created will then become the current job The Save As dialog box is identical to that found in the operating system Simply enter a new name for the Pig Save As a a 10 40 current job and then tap the button Type aJ Built in Storage Survey Pro Jobs Note It is not necessary to include the J OB extension Name since it will automatically be added for you oq 07 01 2008 job eq TosTopo eg 08 29 2005 job EJ vrs job Pq Radial Sideshots job EA Smith JOB RA Stake to Line job R 15 Survey Pro Reference Manual Import The Import screen is used to add the points from another source into the curre
207. e local origin East Longitude is where you enter the easting longitude of the local origin Elevation Height is where you enter the vertical coordinate of the local origin Ground Coordinates Scale The Ground Coordinates Scale screen is used to compute the scale factor to convert grid to ground coordinates for the reference height This screen is used when you select either Key in coordinates to define origin or Pick point to define origin on the first page Reference Point Location Local displays the local Latitude Longitude and Height of the ground origin point pami Ground Coordi ie ao af 11 48 Reference Point Location Local Latitude 44 33 08 16360 W Scale Factor displays the inverse combined scale factor Longitude 123 16 05 95157 W for this ground setup This scale factor is automatically Height 64 999 calculated based on the local ground origin Scale Factor Override scale factor is where you can over ride the _ Override scale calculated from scale factor Check this control to enable the scale factor Bii edit field and enter any other scale factor Ground Scale R 222 Survey Menu GPS Module Ground Coordinates Location The Ground Coordinates Location screen is used to define the local rae Ground Coordi 6 Er af 11 49 Reference Point Location Grid North 6 546 441 793 Fast 4 677 020 453 Desired Local Ground Coordinate Morth 5000 0 m East 5000 0 m ground coordinate
208. e the distances of a range of points relative to a specified base point This is useful to correct a survey where a scale factor was inadvertently applied during data collection Tap Points allows you to select points by tapping them from a map view To From allows you to select points by typing in a point range Base point The distances to all the selected points will be scaled relative to this point The coordinates for the base point will not change Scale factor is the scale factor that is applied to the distances from the base point to the selected points M Include Elevation in Adjustment When checked the elevations to the selected points will also be adjusted by the scale factor relative to the Base point Solve will perform the adjustment on the selected points and change the coordinates accordingly R 424 5 points selected Tap Points MERPH Base Point fal Scale Factor 0 99873 e Include Elevation in Adjustment CE Adjust Menu Translate The Translate screen will move a group a points horizontally and vertically by a specified distance and direction Enli Translate 4 points selected Tap Points 5223 3277 ft East 6141 3551 ft Elev 157 2344 w Coords E Translate 4 points selected Tap Points gt Azimuth 32 2512 Horizontal Dist 515 22 ft Vertical Dist 8 2514 ft Trans L by Coords Solve Tap Point
209. ecific recommendations on field procedure R 103 Survey Pro Reference Manual Post Process Settings or Connect to Receiver Receiver Setting The Post Process card is used to configure the settings for logging post processing data and the collecting and storing of post processing points in Survey Pro Recording Interval is where you set the period for ee logging GPS raw data for post processing Set it to Off to W5 kiii O oF e114 disable post processing data collection in Survey Pro pecorelma Interval RTK Autonomous Points is where you specify action to RTK Autonomous points take when accepting autonomous points during RTK prompt for layer data collection There are three options Layer Autonomous e Donot store this option will prohibit acceptance Bean a of autonomous points in RTK data collection C Warn me if routines Less than Si e Prompt for layer this option will prompt the HDOP is above user whenever an autonomous point is accepted Rx memory is below 0 KB The layer specified will be the default layer to store autonomous points but the user can over Meas Mode Post Process Units p ride at the prompt e Store on selected layer this option will automatically store autonomous points accepted during RTK data collection routines on the specified layer Layer displays the layer selected to store autonomous points Select Layer opens up a layer prompt to allow you to select an exis
210. ed after returning to the Input card gt lt Point 1 Point 1 Point 2 Direction Direction Direction Distance Distance Distance Intersection Intersection Intersection P ie tine a Ezz Point 1 is an existing point that the first line is referenced from Eaa e Point 2 is an existing point that the second line is omnes ne fei referenced from ae R E gt Distance Azm or Brg is the length or direction of Dir i A pats the specific line tangent to the specified point som e M Store l Sect 1 2 These items are only available after solving the screen Once solved the computed Intersection KA C Store I Sect 1 eke a L Store I Sect 2 a W intersections can be viewed from the Map card where you can decide which intersecting point s to store in the Input card Input E Results fs Manj Store Stores the intersecting points checked above which were computed after solving Solve will compute the intersecting point s and open the Results card R 353 Survey Pro Reference Manual Map The Map card is used to determine which Intersection intersection points were computed and are labeled with a and 2 You can then return to the Input card to select which of these points to store ndug W JJ a 2 F dew D R 354 COGO Menu Offset Line The Offset Line screen is used to view store a polyline or store an alignment that is at a spe
211. een Start Survey No Matching Base Point i Start Survey W C g a2 7 57 This screen will open when the base is set up on a point n Solution Autonomous that does not match any point in the job Radio 0 Sv O8 HRMS 16 58 Base is set on a new job point Select this if the base is Select Base Point set up on a point that is not already stored in the job Base is set on a new job point Base is set on an existing job point The next screen will then require that you connect to the O ea rover receiver and occupy control points to perform a M resection for the base position Base is set on an existing job point Select this when the base is set up on a point stored in the job Base Point specifies the name of the base point This is a new point name when the base is set on a new point or R 244 Survey Menu Basic GPS Module an existing point name when the base is set on an existing job point GPS Backsight Resection i Start Survey W qo oe 2 37 i Start Survey W ao 2 43 Solution Float Solution Float Radio 100 Sv OF HRMS 7 69 Radio 100 Sv 06 HRMS 9 52 GPS Backsight __ GPS Resection Occupy a known point to create GPS Occupy 2 known points to create GPS control to orient the setup control for the resection Occupy Control gt Occupy Control gt Base Point 1 The local coordinate NEEleyv of point ee geo ge a vertical benchmark
212. eft or Right Angle Right 90 00 00 Horz Dist 20 000 Wert Dist 0 400 FE to Rod 91 08 45 side of the road and the specified offset if any Angle Right is the horizontal angle from the backsight to the stake point Horz Dist is the horizontal distance from the total station to the stake point OC 1 HE 5 000 BS o 00 00 Vert Dist is the vertical distance from the total station to the stake point Settings Close ZE to Rod is the zenith angle from the total station to the stake point Circle Zero is used to modify the circle on the total station so that the angle right reading will be zero when it is facing toward the design point which can sometimes be easier than turning to an obscure angle value When this button is tapped the following actions will occur 1 Anew backsight circle value is computed sent to the instrument and stored in the raw data R 411 Survey Pro Reference Manual 2 The Angle Right value is changed to zero to reflect the change The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the design point 3 To prevent errors the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog if this button has been used A Circle zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked Note The button is not available when using a robotic total station lt Back returns to the previous screen Stake gt accesse
213. en Page R 421 where a station equation can be configured Backsight accesses the Backsight Setup screen Page R 114 Next gt takes you to the next Road Slope Staking screen where the slope staking parameters are set up R 415 Survey Pro Reference Manual Road Slope Staking Screen Two The second Road Slope Staking screen is used to set up some slope stake parameters prior to slope staking the road fa Road Slope St 7 q 10 05 Station is the station to be slope staked tn ooo e Station I nterval specifies how far to advance from the Station Interval current station to the next station Next Station advances the current station by the H Map v Map Slopes Fil HingeL Le Segment Type Station Interval Note If the Stake Corners option is selected in the Stakeout Settings screen the Next Station button will also stop at any horizontal or vertical alignment node and the beginning and end of any widening and super elevation that falls within the interval Backsight accesses the Backsight Setup screen Page R 114 lt Back returns to the previous screen H Map Card The H Map card displays information about the horizontal details of the road at the current station Segment Type displays the type of horizontal section at the current station Left Right is the description of the left and right templates that are being used at the current station V Map
214. en where a new vertical segment can be inserted prior to the selected segment Edit opens the Edit Segment screen where the selected vertical segment can be modified SME Ue Remove removes the selected segment and Ele 106 000 ae automatically joins the next segment with the previous segment 150 000 6 4 Note The station and elevation at the beginning of the selected vertical segment are displayed at the bottom of R 67 Survey Pro Reference Manual Edit Alignment Screen POB Tab The POB Point Of Beginning tab in the Edit Alignment screen is used to define the starting location of the alignment The first horizontal and vertical segment will always begin at this location gt Location the starting location for the horizontal and vertical alignments will be at the specified North East and Elev coordinates gt Point the starting location for the horizontal and vertical alignments will be at the specified Point Start Station is the station on the alignment that corresponds with the starting location or point Edit Alignment Screen General Tab The General tab in the Edit Alignment screen is used to describe the alignment and select the layer where it is located Description is the description of the alignment Layer is the layer where the alignment will be located Attributes accesses the Point Feature Attributes screen Page R 59 where the feature attributes
215. ength R 373 Survey Pro Reference Manual Delta is the deflection angle Tangent is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI Mid Ord is the distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curve s length External is the minimum distance between the PI and the curve Deg Arc is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft arc length Deg Chord is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft chord length Segment is the area between the arc length and the chord Sector is the area between the arc length and the two edge radii Fillet is the area between the arc length and the tangents R 374 Curve Menu Compute Radius Point The Compute Radius Point screen is used to compute and optionally store the radius point for a curve when certain parts of the curve are known Es Compute Radius Point PC Point is the point that defines the beginning of the BC Point He M curve Point of Curvature PT Point Ee PT Point is the point that defines the end of the curve Tum Left C Right Point of Tangency Arci Smal C Large Turn specifies if the curve turns to the Left or Right as Ra i oort if you face the curve from the PC X LI Store RP Arc specifies if the arc is Small less than 180 or Large greater than 180 AEREE The final part of the curve is defined by one of the Traverse Traverse following choices Results fx man Radius is the distance
216. ent GPS Base screen displays the position of the current RTK base reference position used by Survey Pro It can be used to open the Base Setup wizard which can set an RTK base receiver to begin broadcasting differential corrections and configure the base reference position in Survey Pro When you tap the Base Setup menu item the Current GPS Base Station information screen is displayed Base Point displays the current base point name if set 44 33 08 16360 N e Latitude displays the current latitude of the Se eee ese w base point set in Survey Pro Height l 213 252 feet e Longitude displays the current longitude of the base point set in Survey Pro Antenna i ela i Measured 5 200 Offset 0 236 Height displays the current height of the base a a point set in Survey Pro Antenna displays information about the antenna if it is available Set New Base prompts you to choose a base receiver to Egl connect to and opens the Base Setup wizard where you can set the RTK base and configure the base reference position in Survey Pro The Base Setup wizard is described as part of the Start GPS Survey wizard Page R 179 Clear clears the existing base setup This is usually not done but may be required if you wish to edit the base point using the Edit Points screen from the Job menu You will have to reset the RTK base and rover in Survey Pro before you collect more data R 200 Survey Menu GPS Mo
217. entical to the third Stake Points screen described on Page R 272 Stake Spiral and Offset Screen Summary Screen One is used to define the primary spiral curve used to determine the location of the curve to be staked and the station associated with the Start Point Screen Two is used to define the offset distance and location the station to be staked and the station interval Screen Three provides the distance and direction information to the current station to be staked from the occupy point Screen Four is used to stake the current station R 309 Survey Pro Reference Manual Show Station Show Station The Show Station routine allows you to take a shot to a prism that is positioned anywhere near a polyline a range of points that define a line or an alignment to see where the prism is located in relation to the line Tap Line allows you to tap an existing polyline or a Show Station and Offset alignment that the station and offset will be computed from Tarom To From allows you to enter a range of points that H v define the line where the station and offset will be computed from Begin Station 0 00 0 Begin Station is the station assigned to the beginning OCC 1 HI 5 000 BS 6 65 39 35 of the line Backsight accesses the Backsight Setup screen Page R 114 Next gt takes you to the next Show Station screen where the slope staking parameters are set up Cl
218. eration on either the last value in the display or the last two values depending on the operation Each button is explained below where the value in Level 1 is x and the value in Level 2 is y Adds x and y o a fo ipo E 33 Sy 4 iD ool e iL I w a Ww GI pm w gm el Bio Heel EET GGG A Divides y by x Subtracts y from x x Multiplies x and y Moves the active value to Level 1 of the stack or duplicates Level 1 if there is no active value Swap Swaps positions of x and y in the stack Drop Drops removes x from the stack Edit Moves the value in Level 1 to the active area where it can be edited Changes the sign of x 1 x Inverse of x R 87 Survey Pro Reference Manual mt Enters 3 141592654 to the stack Cir Clears the stack Vx Square root of x Sin Arc sine of x Cos Arc cosine of x Tan Arc tangent of x gt dms Converts x in decimal degrees to degrees minutes seconds x Raises y to the power of x x Squares x Sin Sine of x Cos Cosine of x Tan Tangent of x dms gt Converts x in degrees minutes seconds to decimal degrees Ln Natural logarithm base e of x Log Common logarithm base 10 of x gt R Converts x in decimal degrees to radians G gt R Converts x in Grads to radians P gt R Converts the polar coordinates y x to rectangular coordinates dms Subtracts x
219. ere a name is entered for the new backup archive being created Once created an empty archive will be listed in the main Backup Restore screen which can then be selected to backup the current job Delete Archive opens a prompt asking if you are sure If you select Yes at the prompt the archive selected from the main Backup Restore screen will be deleted Properties opens the Archive Properties screen Backup When selected tapping Next gt will begin the backup routine where the data for the current job will be stored to the selected archive Restore When selected tapping will begin the restore routine where the data from the selected archive will be restored overwriting the current job Next gt accesses the next screen R 27 Survey Pro Reference Manual Backup Restore Archive Properties Backup Restore The Archive Properties screen lists the files stored within the selected archive along with other information The file sizes listed in this screen are in bytes Since all backup archives are compressed the file sizes displayed represent the compressed files or the amount of space actually being used by the file s on the data collector View Snapshot will display the snapshot from the selected archive if one was included when the archive was originally created R 28 Enli Archive Properties Archive name TOSbackup Archived on 4 17 7001 6 18 pm Files arc
220. ered to perform a side shot Turn to Turning Point gt Stakeout gt opens the Stakeout screen Page R 262 where the required information is entered to perform a stakeout shot Turn to Benchmark gt opens the Benchmark screen Page R 260 where the required information is entered to shoot either a closing or non closing benchmark Turn to Turning Point Opens the Take Shot screen described next where you can immediately begin taking the necessary shots for a turning point Notes displays all the notes for the current level loop R 259 Survey Pro Reference Manual Leveling Shots This screen is also accessed when taking shots for any other observation type The Leveling Shots screen is used to perform the required shots to whichever observation you are shooting The specific shots you are prompted for depends on the observation type the number of sets and the shooting sequence You will only be prompted to shoot a backsight while Shooting the BS Pt TPI shooting the first observation from any given setup BS gt F1 F5 The top line indicates if you are shooting your backsight or foresight and which point you are shooting in relation Press the Take Shot button to the entire loop when you are ready The box on the second line tells you which shot to take next The term B1 means to shoot the backsight for Set 1 Ifthe box showed F3 it would mean to shoot the foresight fo
221. esults Zenith is the computed zenith angle from the occupy point to the foresight point Slope Dist is the computed slope distance from the occupy point to the foresight point R 366 COGO Menu SD ZA to HD VD The SD ZA to HD VD screen will convert a slope distance and zenith angle to an equivalent horizontal distance and vertical distance Slope Dist is the slope distance to be converted Eg SD 2AtoHD WD et M 2 33 Zenith is the zenith angle to be converted Slope Dist hoort l HI is the distance that the total station is above the zerth som ground HI HR is the length of the rod HR 5 18 t E e Ra opens the Smart Target options Page R 444 M Earth Curvature Adjust When checked the computed horizontal distance and vertical distance will account for the curvature of the earth and refraction Earth Curvature Adjust Oo 2 AF R 367 Survey Pro Reference Manual AU Conversion The AU Architectural Units Conversion screen will convert distances with fractional inches to decimal distances If the job is configured for International Feet or US Survey Feet it is assumed that the distance entered in this screen is in the same units as the job If the job is configured for meters it is assumed that the distance entered in this screen is in International Feet See Input Shortcuts in the User s Manual for more information on entering architectural units ha Conversion ao af 2005 Co
222. eted or activated My Reflectorless Reflectorless Prism l Add Opens the Edit Smart Target screen described next where a new custom target can be created Edit Opens the Edit Smart Target screen described next where the selected Smart Target can be modified Delete Deletes the selected Smart Target Activate Activates the selected Smart Target The active smart target is marked with the symbol Note It is not necessary to access the Manage Smart Targets screen to activate a different Smart Target You can quickly activate a Smart Target by tapping B next to any HR field and then tap the desired Smart Target from the list that appears R 445 Survey Pro Reference Manual Edit Smart Target y Manage Smart Targets or The Edit Smart Target screen is used to edit an existing Smart Target or create a new one Name is the desired name for the Smart Target Target Type defines the type of target as being a Prism Reflectorless Long Range which increases the EDM power or On Gun which uses whichever EDM settings are configured on the total station for Leica total stations only HR is the default HR for the Smart Target Prism Type Add Offset to HR When checked the offset entered will always automatically be added to the HR entered for the Smart Target Use Target ID 4 Prism Constant is the prism constant for the Smart Use For Searching Target Use Always Note If a pr
223. etic Coordinates displays the geodetic coordinates measured at the current local point Solution Quality displays the quality of the current measurement the solution type the number of satellites used and the horizontal and vertical precision computed by the receiver These values are explained with the GPS Status screen Page R 168 Control Point is where you select if the current point is to be used for Horizontal control and or Vertical control by tapping the appropriate checkboxes Session Time 4 41 Count Status Measuring Session Time displays the total occupation time so far for this measurement GPS Status Count Status displays Measuring when you have current amp o 5 Al coordinates from the receiver and the screen is updating nnn with the latest measurement If you are using Epoch Averaging Averaging is displayed after you tap while the number of epochs is averaged in Survey Pro Suspended is displayed if you are not receiving valid data from the receiver GPS Status opens the GPS Status screen Page R 168 Accept adds the measured GPS coordinates to the point record in the job file and returns to the Control Points screen R 194 Survey Menu GPS Module Post Processing Post processing data collection involves two steps First you must open a file and begin logging GPS raw data for post processing Second you must measure the antenna height and enter the antenn
224. f of a unit or agency of the United States Government the Program and Documentation are provided with Restricted Rights Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 70138 and to all other regulations restrictions and limitations applicable to Government use of Commercial Software Contractor manufacturer is Tripod Data Systems Inc PO Box 947 Corvallis Oregon 97339 United States of America Should you have questions concerning the License Agreement or the Limited Warranties and Limitation of Liability please contact in writing Tripod Data Systems Inc PO Box 947 Corvallis Oregon 97339 United States of America TRADEMARKS The TDS triangles logo the TDS icons and Survey Pro are trademarks of Tripod Data Systems Inc Windows CE ActiveSync the Windows logo and Pocket PC are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Bluetooth and the Bluetooth symbol are registered trademarks of Bluetooth SIG Inc USA Socket is a registered trademark of Socket Communications Inc CompactFlash is a registered trademark of SanDisk Corp All other names mentioned are trademarks registered trademarks or service marks of their respective companies This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group 900 0033 XXQ 090407 Il
225. g and elevation of the selected point R 59 Survey Pro Reference Manual Edit Point Geodetic The Geodetic card applies primarily to Survey Pro with GPS users Refer to the GPS Reference Manual for more information on this card am A E ET M Has Geodetic Data when checked this allows you to edit the geodetic coordinates for a point Has Geodetic Data WGS 84 LLH Local LLH Advanced will open the Edit GPS Point Flags screen to select the advanced settings for the selected point Latitude Edit GPS Point Flags Screen maa The Edit GPS Point Flags screen is used to select the advanced settings for the selected point General Location Geodetic Set Up Group is the set up group of the point See the User s Manual for more information on set up groups GPS Control Point When checked will include the selected point in the list of localization control points Use for Horizontal Localization When checked will use the point for horizontal control in the localization solution Use for Vertical Localization When checked will use the point for vertical control in the localization solution Use as localization calculator grid origin When checked identifies the selected point as the local grid origin for computing rotation in localization calculator solutions See the GPS User s Manual for more information on localization calculator Accept accepts the screen selectio
226. g Settings screen Page R 44 Note The new point will have the same elevation as the point occupied by the prism Note The prism only needs to occupy the location at the side of the new point A prism is not necessary when shooting the location directly in front of the new point R 130 Survey Menu Vertical Angle Offset The Vertical Angle Offset screen allows you to compute and store the location of a new point that exists directly above or below the rod location but cannot be occupied such as the top of a utility pole The new point will have the same coordinates as the rod location but with a different elevation Foresight is the point name that will be used when storing the new point E Vertical Angle Offset a roest EG A Description is the description for the offset shot that is stored Shoot Prism will take a shot to the prism Aim Zenith will read the vertical angle measured by the total station which should be facing the new point s F location Backsight accesses the Backsight Setup screen Page OCC 2 HI 5 400 BS 1 0 00 02 R 114 Input E Results Map Oo l i is a shortcut to the Surveying Settings screen Page R44 R 131 Survey Pro Reference Manual Auto Collect The Auto Collect screen allows users with robotic total stations to automatically collect points either at a specified time interval or after the rod has moved a specified h
227. g or searching Turn To opens the Turn To screen below where the total station can be turned to a specified direction or quickly flipped between face one and face two EDM Mode allows you to select from various EDM modes The options available depend on the total station being used Consult the total station s documentation for more information on the EDM modes that it supports Turn To Survey Remote Control Turn To The Turn To screen is used to turn a robotic total station toa specified horizontal and zenith angle or to a specified point Horizontal Angle is the horizontal angle that the total E Turn To station will turn to l Horizontal Angle booo l Zenith Angle is the zenith angle that the total station l zenith Angle booo l will turn to Turn to Angles turns the total station to the specified horizontal and zenith angles Existing Point Fal Existing Point is the point from the current job that the total station will turn to Turn to Point turns the total station to the specified point Turn to Backsight turns the total station to the backsight point Flip quickly rotates the total station from face one to face two or vice versa Aim opens a screen where the instrument can be aimed more precisely Page R 163 The satellite icon in the Command Bar indicates the status of the satellite connection when using GeoLock Tapping this icon will displ
228. ge of 1 2 Road Width eer ayment See diagram below mae est liar X Slope is the Left and Right slope of the road R Height respectively from the centerline to the edge of payment y slope cay L Offset From Edge of Road Note A negative slope will result in water running from F the centerline toward the edge of payment M Stake Curb Ditch When checked a curb or ditch and an offset can be defined beyond the edge of the pavement Close Settings gt Shape 1 gt lt 2 4 1 3 Fed When staking a curb ditch this button allows you to select the shape of the curb ditch or slope beyond the edge of pavement so cut fill information can be computed on this surface if a random offset is specified The selected shape is displayed by an icon next to the button as well as with a bold line in the road s cross sectional profile at the bottom of the screen Note The selected Shape is irrelevant if a random offset is not specified since the nodes are always in the same place for each shape that uses the same Height and Offset values Height is the height of the curb ditch or slope in feet or meters A positive value is considered a curb and a negative value a ditch Offset From Edge of Road is the distance that the curb or ditch extends from the edge of pavement R 282 Stakeout Menu Note The specified curb or ditch height and offset will be applied to both sides of the road
229. gging GPS raw data for post processing Second you must measure the antenna height and enter the antenna and station ID for each point you occupy The Post Processing routine is described starting on Page R 195 Projection The Projection Information screen is used to select and solve the horizontal and vertical projections which are used to transform GPS measured WGS84 coordinates latitude longitude height into local coordinates North EKast Elevation The screen is also used to switch between mapping plane and localization mode The buttons available will vary depending on the current projection mode This screen and the screens accessed from it are nearly the same as those found in the GPS module which are described on Pages R 201 to R 223 The Solve Localization screens vary slightly and are described on Page 247 R 252 Survey Menu Basic GPS Module Receiver Information The Receiver Information screen displays the serial number firmware version and other information about the current receiver j d Receiver NA EEF s 7 56 Serial Number displays the serial number of the current Receiver Type receiver Spectra Precision z Firmware Version displays the firmware version of the Serial Number OF 10354371 current receiver Firmware Ver 00240 Record in Raw Data records a note to the raw data file May Process 00231 e ver OOOOD containing the information displayed on the screen Recardin Faa Daca
230. ginning of the curve Point of Curvature Bearing is the direction of the tangent at the beginning of the curve Turn specifies if the curve turns to the Left or Right as you face the curve from the PC R 382 Curve Menu M Store PT When checked will store the computed PT point with the specified point name M Store RP When checked the computed radius point will be stored with the name specified here Solve will compute and store the PT and if desired the radius point Results Radius is the distance from the radius point to the curve Length is the arc length Chord is the chord length Delta is the deflection angle Tangent is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI Mid Ord is the distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curve s length External is the minimum distance between the PI and the curve Deg Arc is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft arc length Deg Chord is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft chord length Segment is the area between the arc length and the chord Sector is the area between the arc length and the two edge radii Fillet is the area between the arc length and the tangents R 383 Survey Pro Reference Manual Parabolic Curve The Parabolic Curve screen provides detailed information on a vertical parabolic curve when certain parts of the curve are known Known The PVC or PVI radio button is selected t
231. gs to the total station This is particularly useful with robotic total stations after the total station has been reset NOTICE The settings that are available after tapping the button in non leveling mode directly control the settings that are built into the selected total station Since total station manufactures release new models every year TDS cannot maintain the necessary set up documentation for every existing model and the models that are not yet available The set up procedure for your particular total station is better handled by the total station manufacturer or your instrument s dealer If you have specific questions on the set up of your total station you should refer to the documentation that was included with your total station The numbers listed below are provided for your convenience Trimble 800 538 7800 Zeiss 800 538 7800 Geodimeter 800 538 7800 Leica 800 327 4773 Nikon 516 547 8500 Pentax 800 729 1419 Topcon 800 223 1130 R 39 Survey Pro Reference Manual Level Method J od Instrument select Manual Mode Instrument Settings The Level Method screen is used to select the leveling method you want to use while using Manual Mode while running in leveling mode This will affect the type of data you are prompted for when taking shots Three Wire Prompts for shot data will require upper PB levelMethod x 11 01 center and lower wire readings i i 5 Manual Entry Mode Leveling Method
232. h localization coordinate systems current record before you can save Zone Site Name displays the name of the current initialized localization zone or the solved localization site Site Mame Vegas Ground Setup Group is where you enter the set up group of the Setup Group 1107165143 reference stereographic mapping plane Origin Latitude Origin Latitude is where you enter the origin latitude of Origin Longitude the reference stereographic mapping plane This is usually set at the latitude of the first base location Origin Longitude is where you enter the origin longitude of the reference stereographic mapping plane This is usually set at the longitude of the first base location Use Geoid CARIBS Caribbean Origin Height Origin Scale is where you enter either G lt E the height or the scale factor used to reference the localization system to ground level Same as Base updates the values with the coordinate and set up group of the GPS base station R 203 Survey Pro Reference Manual Use Geoid is where you choose to use a geoid model with this zone When this box is checked you can select a geoid model from the dropdown list to use with the coordinate system When this box is unchecked no geoid will be used with the coordinate system You can pick a geoid model from the database using the drop down box Pick from Database opens the Select Coordinate System screen
233. h the next available point name Start At is the point name assigned to the imported point when using the IRename or Rename All functions R 21 Survey Pro Reference Manual Compare Coordinates will open a dialog box showing the coordinates for the duplicate points to assist in making a decision of how to handle the new point Stop Importing will not import the current duplicate point and will stop importing any remaining points All previous points will still be imported into the current job Export The Export screen allows you to export selected points from the current job to a new job or to a coordinate file in another format You can also export all the objects in the current job to a LandXML file This first screen is used to specify the type of file that you want to export data to J ob J OB File When selected the points are exported to a TDS JOB file Select the Type of File to Export Old J ob J OB File When selected the points are Job JOB File exported to a TDS JOB file that is compatible with a Conte versions of Survey Pro for Windows CE earlier than 3 0 ee Compatible with Survey Pro 1 x Coordinate CR5 File When selected the points are leo exported to a TDS CR5 coordinate file format Coordinate CRS File O Text TXT File Text TXT File When selected the points are exported gt csv csv File to an ASCII text file Comma Separated values CSV CSV Fil
234. he Begin Point and the second as the End Point Solve will compute the distance and direction from the Begin Point to the End Point Input E Results Esma Results Azimuth is the azimuth from the Begin Point to the End Point Horz Dist is the horizontal distance from the Begin Point to the End Point Vert Dist is the vertical distance from the Begin Point to the End Point Slope Dist is the slope distance from the Begin Point to the End Point North is the change in the Y coordinate from the Begin Point to the End Point East is the change in the X coordinate from the Begin Point to the End Point Elevation is the change in elevation from the Begin Point to the End Point Grade is the slope from the Begin Point to the End Point R 344 Inverse Menu Inverse Point to Line The Inverse Point to Line screen computes the perpendicular offset distance and direction from a known point to a continuous line defined by two points or one point and a direction En Inverse Point to Line Inverse Point is the known point that the offset Sree pene HE cr information to a specified line is computed Begin Station 000 Begin Station is the beginning station value that Define the Line corresponds with the Start of Line which is used to start of Line Ese compute the inverse station in the results Pee A Start of Line is the first point that defines the line from J Store Point which
235. he two above angles R 118 Survey Menu Backsight Circle Circle The Backsight Circle dialog box is used to modify the horizontal angle read from a total station so that the resulting angle is an azimuth This routine can also be performed from the Backsight Solved screen Backsight Circle is the angle that will be subtracted from all horizontal angles read from the total station or entered manually when data collecting in manual mode Set Sets the value entered in the Backsight Circle field as the backsight circle and returns to the previous screen Note Closing this dialog box without tapping the button will result in no changes made to the original backsight circle Read from Instrument Reads the current horizontal angle from the total station and puts that value in the Backsight Circle field where it can then be as the backsight circle This is typically performed when it is known that the total station is facing a direction with a zero azimuth R 119 Survey Pro Reference Manual Traverse Sideshot The Traverse Sideshot screen is the main screen used for data collection Foresight is the point name that will be used for the Ba traverse Sideshol 2 08 next stored point o Foresight Description is the description for the next stored point HR is the height of the rod Description e opens the Smart Target options Page R 444 feat Right EE Ta ith 90 47 39 deg Side Shot
236. hecked the move left or right information will be presented from the rod person s point of view When unchecked it will be presented from the total station s point of view This option only applies when a non robot total station is selected in the Instrument Settings M Prompt for Layer When checked a prompt to select a layer will appear before any new point is stored from only the routines under the Stakeout menu M Prompt for Attributes When checked a prompt to select feature information will appear before any new point is stored from only the routines under the Stakeout menu This also requires that a feature file be selected from the Files Settings card described earlier Note There is no Prompt for Description checkbox as in the Surveying Settings card because you are always prompted for a description when storing a point from a stakeout routine R 46 Job Menu Use Perfect Stationing When checked staking locations will be computed at perfect stationing intervals For example if your starting station was 0 15 and your station interval was 100 your next stakeout location will occur at 1 00 instead of 1 15 Point Tolerance this setting affects the Remote Staking routine Page R 274 When performing Remote Stakeout the final graphic screen that is displayed when you are near the stake point will occur when you are within the distance to the stake point specified here Line Tolerance this setting affects the Stake t
237. his be sure to select the same distance units for the source file as those set for the current job Store Point is the starting point number if points are stored during the staking process Future points are stored with the next available point names HR is the rod height Rae opens the Smart Target options Page R 444 M With Centerline When checked offset and stationing information from the selected centerline to the stake point is also provided in the DTM Shot screen Choose a Centerline will open the Select Line screen described next where an existing polyline or alignment can be selected that describes a centerline M Generate DTM with Staked Points will add any staked points to the non reference DTM layer and generate a DTM surface for all the objects on this layer This DTM surface will be updated when a new point is stored to it You can also view this surface with live cut fill volumes at anytime from the 3D View screen Page R 83 Note Viewing the DTM during DTM Stakeout is a useful quality assurance technique to determine where additional points are needed Setup View DTM accesses the Setup DTM 3D screen Page R 78 where the non reference DTM layers are configured and optionally viewed from the 3D View screen Page R 83 R 316 Stakeout Menu Backsight accesses the Backsight Setup screen Page R 114 where the current backsight can be modified Next gt opens the next screen Ch
238. his is unchecked only the points will be exported Export polylines on the specified layer as parcels will export the polylines on the selected layer as parcels Polylines on other layers will still be exported only not as parcels Export point description as allows you to select to export the point descriptions as LandXML descriptions or codes R 25 Survey Pro Reference Manual Import Control Points The Import Control screen is used to manage a control file for the current job Import opens the Open screen Page R 14 where an existing job can be selected as a control file The control points will then be imported into the current job and stored to the CONTROL layer External Control File displays the path and file for the current external control file if one is used Clear clears the current external control file Browse opens the Open screen Page R 14 where an existing job can be selected as an external control file If any point names in the external control file are also used in the current job the control file cannot be used Backup Restore Job The Backup Restore wizard consists of a series of screens that are used to backup or restore all the files associated with the current job The routine also gives you the option of storing a snapshot of a customized map view to the archive This can then be used to visually identify an archive Any number of backups can be created f
239. hived 2 Archive size 15969 Has Snapshot Yes View Snapshot Job 12712 Raw Data 1230 File Menu Backup Restore Backup When performing a backup all the files associated with the current job are listed and will be included in the archive M Create Snapshot When checked the next screen will prompt you to create a snapshot of the current job s map SUEY To val ee een Tp view which will then be included in the archive TDS job eee lt Back returns to the previous screen Backup accesses the next screen M Backup Restore TDS3 TDS Jobsi TOS job ATOS Jobsi TOS RAW _ Create Snapshot Close Settings The Create a Snapshot screen is a map view that is used to configure the map as desired and the resulting image will be saved in the archive as a snapshot along with the job files OK will create the archive along with a snapshot of the map as it is configured on the screen Cancel will create the backup archive without a snapshot R 29 Survey Pro Reference Manual Backup Restore Restore When restoring the job files from an archive the archived files will replace the existing files of the current E Backup Restore job Survey Pro will now Restore TOS job with archive Warning If you do not want to lose any new data that TDS2 was collected after the archive being restored was created you should first backup the current job to a new archive
240. hord defines the P e M radius degree arc or degree chord of the curve Turn Left Right respectively P y Begin Station 0 00 0 e Turn defines if the curve turns to the Left or Right from the point of view of the PC OCC 6 HI 5 000 BS 0 00 00 Begin Station is the station assigned to the PC Point Backsight accesses the Backsight Setup screen Page R 114 Settings Close Next gt takes you to the second Stake Curve and Offset screen described below i accesses the Stakeout Settings screen Page R 45 R 302 Stakeout Menu Curve and Offset Screen Two Stake Curve And Offset Station to Stake is the desired station on the curve that Station ooo A you want to stake Station Interval Station I nterval is the value that is added to the Station Offset to Stake after the button is pressed oft oe Next Sta advances the Station to Stake by the Station gobon M Interval Height of Rod Offset is the horizontal distance of the offset from the specified curve The offset occurs on the left while viewing the curve from the PC when the Lis selected or on the right when the R is selected OCC A HI 5 000 BS 0 00 00 Settings Close Note An offset of zero would result in the specified curve being staked gt V Offset will result in the elevations for the design points to be adjusted by the value entered here and will change the cut fill values accordingly
241. horizontal distance between the Foresight Point and the Middle Point R 358 COGO Menu Compute Area Allows you to compute the area of a selected boundary a eee Tap Line allows you to tap an existing polyline from a map view Choose a Boundary for the Area eS R To From provides selection of points by point name To From From Solve will compute the area of the selected boundary Results Area is the area that the boundary encloses If the boundary is not closed the area is computed as if a line joined the two ends was is Length is the length of the selected boundary Perimeter is the length of the selected boundary plus any additional length between the two ends of an open boundary R 359 Survey Pro Reference Manual Triangle Solutions The Triangle Solutions screen will solve for the unknown parts of a triangle after providing three known parts Triangle Solution is where you select the parts of the triangle that are known You can select any of the following from the dropdown list Triangle Solution e Side Side Side The lengths of all three sides are Side a oot W known cdot OR e Angle Side Angle Two angles and the side between them are known Side c hoot l e Side Angle Angle Two angles and one side that b does not lie between those angles are known Dg e Side Angle Side Two sides and the angle between L them are known Enl Triangle So
242. hots 136 R 189 distance 136 R 129 horizontal angle137 R 130 vertical angle 138 R 131 offset staking R 281 one point setup 282 OPEN OD ceia R 14 open new job 06 008 R 8 orthometric elevations 228 output fields eee 17 Pp parabolic curve R 384 parabolic curve layout 171 parabolic layout R 386 parallel method 166 R 364 past results 08 R 434 PC deflection 168 Peg teSt cccceecceeeceees R 264 DLOCCO UTE sacks 205 PI and tangents R 372 PI deflection 168 R 379 POD esras R 68 point feature attributes R 59 point flags 1 5 Survey Pro Reference Manual OCIUING esi shevstoschederssves R 60 point in direction R 352 point list 22 R 438 point symbols 066 19 point to line inverse R 345 point to location inverseR 349 point to multiple points INVEYSE 0ccceeeceeees R 348 point to point inverse R 344 point to polyline inverseR 346 points on DTM layer R 82 DOYE anana ee Re 49 polylines R 61 post processing257 295 R 195 file management R 239 office procedure 298 Settings R 104 power button 006 18 predetermined areal65 R 364 hinge method 165 parallel method 166 projection siisiecdersnceevess R 201 La
243. i Fillet is the area between the arc length and the tangents R 371 Survey Pro Reference Manual Known PI and Tangents The PI and Tangents screen is used to compute and store the PC PT and radius points when the PI point and the direction of both tangents are known along with one other curve attribute PI Point is the PI point E Known PI and Tangents Brg PI gt PC is the direction of the 4 PI Point mie W tangent from the PI to the PC Meme ery Azm PI gt PT Brg PI gt PT is the direction of the ramper e6 1215__ fy tangent from the PI to the PT pRadiuss oor fy The remaining curve attribute can be defined with one of x I Store Pc fs the following selections spe bea Se pe Estee fT Radius is the distance from radius point to curve Delta is the deflection angle Degree Arc is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft arc length A Results fs map Al Degree Chord is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft chord length M Store PC When checked will store the computed PC point with the specified point name M Store RP When checked will store the computed radius point with the specified point name M Store PT When checked will store the computed PT point with the specified point name Results Radius is the distance from the radius point to the curve Delta is the deflection angle Tangent is the distance from the
244. iated with the Begin Station boo l Start Point OCC 1 Ue S o BS oen gasont accesses the Backsight Setup screen Page Next gt opens Screen Two ii accesses the Stakeout Settings screen Page R 45 Backsight Close Settings Stake Line and Offset Screen Two Station to Stake is the desired station that you want to Stake Line And Offset stake stn food Station I nterval is the value that is added to the Station Station Interval 25 0 ft Next St ices to Stake after the Next Sta button is pressed Ab OL R zi Bd Next Sta advances the Station to Stake by the Station 028 aj en Offset defines the offset distance and if the offset occurs Height of Rad to the right of the line when R is selected or left when occ 1 HI 5 000 BS 0 00 00 Lis selected The right or left side is referenced while viewing the line from the Start Point Close Settings R 299 Survey Pro Reference Manual gt Vertical Offset is the offset distance that is below the design location when Dis selected or above the design location when U is selected specifies a slope from the specified line to the parallel line that is being staked When this is a non zero value the elevation for the staked points will increasingly differ from the design elevations as the Offset value increases Height of rod is the length of the rod Backsight accesses the Backsight Setup screen lt
245. ico Cent America MADCON Alaska Key In Zone Results The Key In Zone Results screen is used to review the values you input for the zone to be created I ia 1m Fa Store opens a prompt to enter the region and zone of bigKeyInzone A 7 10 the new map projection zone stores the named zone in Zone Parameters the data base and sets the zone as the current projection al A rigin Lat record Origin Lng Origin North Origin East North Parallel South Parallel gt Datum Parameters Datum Name Translation Translation Y Translation R 220 Survey Menu GPS Module Ground Coordinates Mapping Plane Ground The Ground Coordinates screen is used to toggle between grid and ground coordinates and to select how to define the origin of the ground coordinate system Projection Definition is where you choose how to represent the mapping plane coordinates There are two options e Use Grid Coordinates WGS84 geodetic coordinates will be transformed into mapping plane zone coordinates Horizontal distances on Bg Ground Coordi Er af 11 43 Projection Definition O Use Grid Coordinates Use Ground Coordinates Ground Coordinates Origin O Origin at mapping plane origin as B F the ground are usually scaled to the grid e Use Ground Coordinates WGS84 geodetic coordinates will be transformed into ground scaled coordinates translated to a local origin Horizontal distances on the ground
246. ident abuse misuse or misapplication has been modified without the written permission of LICENSOR or if any LICENSOR label or serial number has been removed or defaced the limited warranties set forth above do not apply and you accept full responsibility for the product The warranties and remedies set forth above are exclusive and in lieu of all others oral or written express or implied Statements or representations which add to extend or modify these warranties are unauthorized by LICENSOR and should not be relied upon by you LICENSOR or anyone involved in the creation or delivery of the Program or Documentation to you shall have no liability to you or any third party for special incidental or consequential damages including but not limited to loss of profits or savings downtime damage to or replacement of equipment and property or recovery or replacement of programs or data arising from claims based in warranty contract tort including negligence strict liability or otherwise even if LICENSOR has been advised of the possibility of such claim or damage LICENSOR S liability for direct damages shall not exceed the actual amount paid for this copy of the Program Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you U S GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS If the Program is acquired for use by or on behal
247. ields Beeo When Storing Points Beep On Control Activation Prompt for Description M Allow Alphanumeric Point Names When checked Prompt for Layer numeric or alpha character can be used for point names Prompt for attributes If unchecked only numeric point names are valid Always Prompt for Backsight Check When cere checked you will be prompted if you tap amp from the Oo 7 Backsight Solved screen without first performing a backsight check You will also be prompted if you cancel out of the Backsight Solved screen and then tap amp from the Backsight Setup screen Note You will never be prompted to check your backsight when running in Manual Mode M Use Classic Backsight Setup When checked the backsight setup routine functions as it did in versions of Survey Pro before 4 0 Basically the Backsight Solved screen will not appear after solving your backsight The Check Backsight and Backsight Circle screens can still be accessed manually from the Backsight Setup screen M Beep When Storing Points When checked a beep will sound whenever a new point is stored M Beep On Control Activation When checked a beep occurs when any button checkbox or other control is tapped R 54 Job Menu M Prompt for Description When checked a prompt for a description will appear before any new point is stored from any routine other than those included in the Survey and Stakeout menus M Prompt for Layer When checked
248. ified on the Receiver Settings General screen Start Static use this setting if you want to start a log file in static mode where the receiver will remain over a single point for the duration of the session R 195 Survey Pro Reference Manual Start Stop Go use this setting if you want to start a log file in stop and go mode where the receiver will rove around In stop and go mode the GPS raw data is continuously logged to the file to maintain the initialization while roving around this is the go part Then static Sessions are marked when the receiver is stationary over a point this is the stop part Recording Settings this area displays values from the Job Settings Post Processing screen Change opens the Job Settings Post Processing screen where you can modify the settings relevant to post processing data collection Rec Interval displays the current recording interval for new logging files Mem Threshold displays the current minimum memory on disk available before a warning is issued SV Threshold displays the current minimum number of satellites tracked before a warning is issued HDOP Threshold displays the maximum HDOP allowed before a warning is issued Antenna displays antenna setup for this receiver It will be in one of two states e Last Antenna for this receiver is displayed when you have not yet set this receiver in Survey Pro This value is the previous antenna measurement you use
249. ight is the height of the curb or ditch in feet or meters A positive value is considered a curb and a negative value a ditch Offset From Edge of Road is the distance that the curb or ditch extends from the edge of pavement Note The specified curb or ditch height and offset will be applied to both sides of the road lt Back returns to the previous screen Next gt accesses the next screen R 313 Survey Pro Reference Manual Store Offset Points Screen Three The third Store Offset Points screen is used to define which offset points will be stored From Station is the station where the stored offset points will begin Store Offset Points From Station 0400 0 To Station 34 76 539816 To Station is the station where the stored offset points will end Station Interval Station I nterval is the distance between the stations ees where offset points are stored D Description Note If the Stake Corners option is selected in the Center Line Stakeout Settings screen offset points will also be stored ae Right Fe a where ever the horizontal or vertical section of the road Pavement a changes Curb Curb Start Point is the point number that will be assigned to Close Settings the first offset point that is stored Each stored point that follows will be assigned the next available point number Description is the description that will be assigned to all the offset points that are stored
250. ight side of the line or is on the line The LEFT and RIGHT side is determined as if occupying the Start Point and facing the Foresight Point or Direction of the line specified in Screen One ON LINE is determined if you are within the Horizontal Distance Tolerance specified in the Stakeout Settings screen Page R 45 Results He 6 200 ft EE Results Meas Offset Dist is the perpendicular offset from the specified line to the rod This is the minimum distance that the rod must travel to occupy the line Station is the station on the specified line where the offset occurs relative to the Start Point R 278 Stakeout Menu Cut Fill displays the required amount of cut or fill to bring the stake point to the elevation of the reference line at the nearest perpendicular Graphic when prism is Graphic when prism is Graphic when prism is Graphic when prism is greater than 10 feet between 1 foot and within 1 foot of the line on the line or within the from the line 10 feet from the line Horizontal Distance Tolerance specified in the Stakeout Settings screen Page R 45 Note If staking beyond the end points of the reference line or if the reference line is defined by a 2D point no vertical data is computed Meas contains the information measured by the total station during the previous shot Shot takes a shot to the prism lt Back returns to Screen One Store opens the Store Poi
251. in degrees minutes seconds from y in degrees minutes seconds e Raises 2 718281828 to the power of x 10 Raises 10 to the power of x R gt Converts x in radians to decimal degrees R gt G Converts x in radians to Grads R gt P Converts the rectangular coordinates y x to polar coordinates dms Adds x in degrees minutes seconds and y in degrees minutes seconds R 88 Job Menu GPS Only the Settings menu item in the Job Menu is unique while running in GPS mode with the standard GPS module compared to running in Conventional mode All the remaining Job Menu items are covered in the Job Menu description for conventional surveying starting on Page R 35 See Page 105 for a description of the Settings menu item when running in GPS mode with the Basic GPS module Settings Edit Points Edit Polylines Edit Alignments Auto Linework View Raw Data File View DTM Manage Layers Job Information po ee el Gee el es a a Calculator R 89 Survey Pro Reference Manual Settings The Settings screen provides access to several individual screens that control all hardware and software settings The screens are provided in an index card format Note Only the cards that are available when running in GPS Mode with the GPS module are covered in this section For details on cards shared by both GPS mode and Conventional Mode refer to Page R 36 Receiver Settings or Connect to Receiver Receiver Setting
252. ine color of the basemap Fill Color is used to select the color for the 2D objects in the basemap Point Symbol is used to select from a variety of symbols for the points in the basemap these will not affect the appearance of the points in the current job R 443 Survey Pro Reference Manual Smart Targets Tap a hd power button next toa E indicating a prism Smart Target is currently selected or indicating a reflectorless Smart Target is currently selected This item is available from any screen where the rod height can be adjusted Target Smart Targets provide a convenient way to work with different My Reflectorless prisms and or target types on the same job See the User s y My Prism Manual for more information Manage Smart Targets Quickly change to any available user configured smart target by eS eae R tapping it from the upper portion of the list The active Smart Target is marked with a v Manage Smart Targets Opens the Manage Smart Targets screen described next where a custom target can be configured R 444 Miscellaneous Screens Manage Smart Targets l Manage Smart Targets The Manage Smart Targets screen is used to edit existing custom targets or configure a new custom target type The upper portion of the screen lists all the custom targets that are currently available To select a target tap it from this list The selected target can then be Targetl Prism edited del
253. ing Delta is the deflection angle Length is the arc length e Chord is the chord length Tangent is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI Mid Ordinate is the distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curve s length R 380 Curve Menu External is the minimum distance between the PI and the curve PC Station is the starting station assigned to the PC M Interval When checked all necessary information for each station at the specified interval on the curve will be computed Start station When not computing by interval above only the information for the particular station entered here is computed Solve will solve and display all the details of the specified curve without the layout information Sta decreases the current station by the station interval Sta increases the current station by the station interval Layout will solve and display the layout information for all the stations of the specified curve Results Radius is the distance from the radius point to the curve Length is the arc length Chord is the chord length Delta is the deflection angle Tangent is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI Mid Ord is the distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curve s length External is the minimum distance between the PI and the curve Deg Arc is the deflection angle that results in
254. ing a float solution Antenna is where you set the source for antenna input There are two choices e Internal e External Note This setting is only available when your receiver model is Hiper Set Rx To OFF mode Disables all RTK operation base and rover and puts the receiver into a standalone autonomous position mode R 101 Survey Pro Reference Manual Measure Mode Settings The Measure Mode card is used to configure the RTK data collection settings Receiver Dynamics is where you control the receiver Settings er d 8 28 dynamics for point occupations There are two choices Receiver Dynamics e Static on occupy On starting a point Static on occupy occupation receiver is put in static mode where Accept Solution Quality it calculates position assuming no motion and Fixed RTK only 7 applies advanced averaging techniques for the Acceptance Criteria most precise solution e Dynamic always Receiver is left in dynamic mode for all point occupations Accept Solution Quality is where you control the solution quality acceptable for storing measurements You have two options e Fixed RTK only Allows storage of fixed solution only e Code Float or Fix Allows storage of any differential solution Use Acceptance Criteria is where you select to apply criteria to measurement acceptance When checked only measurements with RMS and or PDOP values below the threshold will be accepted To use less tha
255. ing station must occur before the ending station e The beginning of a widening must match the width of the previous widening or template e The end of a widening must match the next template or widening unless it is the last element in the road e The beginning or ending of a widening cannot occur within the boundaries of another widening but the beginning of one widening can occur at the same station as the end of a previous widening e Widenings are always positioned by their start station Add When a widening or lt End gt is selected from the Lor R columns in the Widenings card this button opens the Add Widening screen which allows you to add a widening to the same side of the road that was selected R 404 Roads Menu Edit allows you to edit the selected widening in the Edit Widening screen which is identical to the Add Widening screen Remove removes the selected widening from the list Check checks the road for errors and displays the results in the Roads Report screen described on Page R 399 Add Edit Widening Screen Roads Edit Roadg New or Edit Wideningg Ada or Edit The Add Edit Widening screen allows you to add a widening to the road or edit an existing widening E Add Right Widening ai Start Station is the location of the beginning of the Aa ws l widening on the alignment mLength fioo f D Length gt End Station is the length of the widening
256. ion Status displays the status of the current vertical HF Solve Localizati amp 4 7 44 solution This will be one of the following ress SED e Control points solution is displayed when the Status parameters were calculated from the selected Control points solution control points Slope M 14 621 e Current vertical site is displayed when there is a Slope E 3 286 vertical solution and Solve V was not selected on 55PSration 10 013 m Origin N 9 062 967 m this pass Origin E 3 169 255 m e Unadjusted geoid model is displayed when there is a geoid model selected but no vertical adjustment e No vertical site is displayed when there is no vertical solution and Solve V was not selected on this pass Slope N displays the slope of the inclined plane along the local north grid axis in parts per million Slope E displays the slope of the inclined plane along the local east grid axis in parts per million Separation displays the separation between the inclined plane and the local elevation Origin N E displays the origin of the inclined plane This is in local coordinates and it will be the local coordinate of the first control point used in the solution or your manual input location Accept opens the Adjust with Projection wizard where the latest coordinate system adjustment will be applied to your job file points and you can review the results When you accept the results the coordinate sys
257. ion displays the type and quality of solution It will be one of the following values e No Communication we are not receiving a response to commands e No Data we are receiving an unknown or a bad response to commands e No RTK Solution we are receiving a response but the receiver is not computing a solution e Autonomous we are receiving a stand alone solution accuracy is about 100 meters R 168 Survey Menu GPS Module e Code the receiver is calculating a code differential solution precision is about 1 to 10 meters e Float the receiver is calculating a carrier phase differential solution with float ambiguities precision is typically within 0 1 m to 0 5 m e Fixed the receiver is calculating a carrier phase differential solution with fixed ambiguities precision is typically within 15 mm H Precision displays the root mean squared RMS error of the horizontal solution reported by the receiver It is displayed in project units V Precision displays the RMS error of the vertical solution reported by the receiver It is displayed in project units Note This value is supplied by the receiver and Survey Pro displays the receiver s value without modification Most manufactures report this value at the 2 or 3 sigma level However since different manufacturers use different statistical methodology it is not necessarily valid to compare the RMS values between brands or even between models with
258. iption MapCheck1 equeqa bees Wei RoW STOR IESE gt Location can be used to manually enter the Location Point COGO Menu Mid Ordinate The distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curve s length External The minimum distance between the PI and the curve Bearing defines the direction of the curve tangent at the PC Turn defines if the curve turns to the Left or Right while viewing the curve from the PC Point appends the curve to the list Add to Map Add to Map The Add to Map screen is used to add the existing line and curve data to the current job as a polyline Description is the name that will be assigned to the new polyline that will be added to the project coordinates for the first point of the polyline gt Point can be used to define the starting location of the first point of the polyline by an existing point be Store Points is the first point name that will be used for Start Storing Points at the new points that are needed to add the figure to the a e current job All additional points will be incremented from this point adds the figure to the job at the specified location Cancel closes the screen without adding any new data to the job R 363 Survey Pro Reference Manual Predetermined Area The Predetermined Area routine will take a boundary with one open side and compute the location of a line that
259. is directory displays the path to look for OPUS or NGS txt files Browse opens a new screen where you can select a different path to search for OPUS or NGS txt files On all txt files in the specified directory are read and any valid data sheet points that are within 100 meters are then put into the drop down list below Select the RINEX file or NGS data sheet point Allows you to select any valid data sheet point found from the drop down list Details opens a screen that lists the selected OPUS Solution Report or NGS data sheet point details Next gt Opens the final screen R 226 Bi GPS Import Contre n 10 54 Select an OPUS solution report to Create control for Point 1 i 1 Search this directory for files Built in Storage Survey Pro Jobsi Browse Select the RINE file for this control point 3991514 060 Bia GPS Import Control 47 9 12 Enter 3 coordinate to create contral for Point 1 1 1 Coordinate Type Survey Menu GPS Module Enter Control Coordinate Key In The purpose of this screen is to manually input the control point coordinates This is the second screen that appears when Key In Coordinate was selected in the first screen Point n x displays the name of the selected job point that the control point source will be merged into A counter is included where n is the number of points set so far including the one you are working on an
260. ism constant is entered for a Smart Target while a prism constant is also set in the total station the prism constant will be applied twice resulting in incorrect distance measurements for every shot Be sure the prism constant is set to zero in the total station if entering a value for a Smart Target or vice versa Prism Type This option allows you to choose one of the following three types of prisms when using a supported Trimble total station e Generic Select this option if using a generic non Trimble 360 prism It is up to the user to enter the correct prism constant and manually angle the prism vertically toward the total station before taking any shots to avoid introducing error e Trimble 360 2mm Select this option when using a Trimble 360 prism This selection will apply the appropriate vertical angle correction constant for this prism to correct the error R 446 Miscellaneous Screens that is introduced when taking a shot to the prism at an extreme vertical angle The 2 icon is displayed to help the user identify that the correct prism is selected and the Prism Constant is automatically set to 2 millimeters e Trimble MultiTrack 10mm Select this option when using a Trimble MultiTrack prism The Fo icon is displayed to help the user identify that the correct prism is selected and the Prism Constant is automatically set to 10 millimeters See note below Note When using a Trimble MultiTrack prism in pas
261. isplays the parity the receiver will use to communicate with the modem Configure is where you can configure the channel the radio will use to communicate with the other radio and the sensitivity of the radio Set sends commands to the radio firmware to configure the settings selected on this screen Note some settings on the radio cannot be modified with Survey Pro To fully program the radio modems you need to PC software that should be supplied with the radio R 110 Job Menu Basic GPS Module Measure Mode Settings See Page R 102 Post Process Settings See Page R 104 Units Settings See Page R 41 Format Settings See Page R 42 Files Settings See Page R 43 Surveying Job Settings Surveying See Page R 44 Stakeout Job Settings Stakeout R 111 Survey Pro Reference Manual See Page R 45 Date Time See Page R 52 Buttons See Page R 53 General See Page R 54 R 112 Survey Menu The Survey Menu contains the routines used for collecting data Backsight Setup Traverse Sideshot Repetition Shots Multiple Sideshots Distance Offset Horizontal Angle Offset Vertical Angle Offset Auto Collect Corner amp 2 Lines Corner amp Angle Corner amp Offset Corner amp Plane Surface Scan Video Scan Shoot From Two Ends Record Mode Resection Remote Elevation Check Point Solar Observation CHRP ONOZZSHY RUM TORRY Ow D
262. isplays your current position as well as your course and speed information if you are moving The Position card will display one of three coordinates WGS84 latitude longitude height Local latitude longitude height or Grid north east elevation Solution see the Receiver card on Page R 168 Latitude Longitude Height or North East Elevation Latitude 44 99 08 03030 N displays the location of the receiver Longitude 123 16 08 76053 W Height 183 366 ft Heading Speed Heading displays your course over ground if you are moving If your coordinate display is geodetic this heading is with respect to geodetic north If your coordinate display is grid then this heading is with respect to grid north Speed displays your horizontal speed over ground if you are moving WGS84 is where you set the position display to show Sky View Sat Info position aT WGS84 latitude longitude and height This option is o s always available Local LLh is where you set the position display to show Local latitude longitude and height This option is only available when you have a coordinate system selected and solved Note Local LLh numbers make sense when in mapping plane mode When using Ground TDS Localization mode you should not use Local LLh display Grid is where you set the position display to show Grid north east and elevation This option is only available when you have a coordin
263. ist of Points screen where you can begin staking the point The points are advanced in the same order that they were defined when the polyline was created or when the point range was defined Height of Rod is the length of the rod Backsight accesses the Backsight Setup screen Page R 114 Solve gt opens the next Stake List of Points screen where the current Design Point can be staked R 275 Survey Pro Reference Manual Note The screens available after tapping or Next Point gt are identical to Screens Two and Three in the Stake Points routine and are described on pages R 270 through R 272 i accesses the Stakeout Settings screen Page R 45 Edit Point List Stakeout Stake List of Points Change Design Point or Stakeout Stake List of Points Edit List The Edit Point List screen is used to modify the existing point list Remove removes the selected point from the point list Clear All removes all the points from the point list To Closest is available only when the screen is accessed with the Change Design Point button This will automatically select the point in the point list that is nearest to the previously staked point which is the selected point when the screen if first accessed lt Insert lt Append will insert the point specified in the corresponding field above the point selected in the point list When lt End gt is selected the point
264. ith Projection The Adjust with Projection wizard is used in three different cases It is automatically opened to update job file points any time you change the coordinate system site such as solving a localization adjustment or switching from grid to ground It is automatically opened to provide the option of updating job file points any time you change the coordinate system definition such as selecting a new mapping plane zone or switching horizontal projection modes Finally it can be opened by the user from the Survey menu to select and update points with a projection adjustment The screens displayed will vary depending on the action that opened the Adjust with Projection wizard All of the screens are described below Adjust with Projection Select Points The Adjust with Projection Select Points screen is used to select points to be adjusted and how to adjust them This screen is only shown when the wizard is opened from the menu To From opens the Select Point s screen where you 4 adjust With Projectio 47 x C can select points by specifying a point range 20 points selected p Tap Points opens a map view where you can select 4 H points by tapping them on the screen Source to Destination Projection Au all selected ponts There are two adjustment modes C2 Adjust only geodetic points Source to Destination Projection use this mode when you want to adjust locations in one coordin
265. l R 257 Survey Pro Reference Manual Level Notes Settings The Level Notes Settings screen is used to customize what and how the information in the Level Notes screen is displayed M Station Point Name displays the Station column where the name of each point and the number of each Columns to Display turning point shot is listed This column cannot be Station Point Name turned off BS M BS is the column that lists all the backsight _ BS Dist readings This column cannot be turned off HI C ISt Column Widths M BS Dist When checked a column is displayed that oe lists the horizontal distances measured from the ls sl tc ee instrument to each backsight ae yie C FS Dist Compact M HI is the column that lists the elevations computed P 7 Double Spaced for the instrument at each setup This column cannot be turned off L Desc M IS When checked a column is displayed that lists the readings for all intermediate shots Intermediate shots include side shots and stakeout shots which are not included as legs of the level loop M IS Dist When checked a column is displayed that lists the horizontal distances measured from the instrument to each intermediate shot Intermediate shots include side shots and stakeout shots which are not included as legs of the level loop M FS is the column that lists all the foresight readings This column cannot be turned off M FS Dist When checked a co
266. l coordinates to use for horizontal control when localizing ae Wi This point has a good vertical Elev location V Check this if the point has a good elevation to use for vertical control when localizing Start Control Point Occupy Opens the Occupy Control Point screen described on Page R 251 Occupy Control Point The Occupy Control Point screen is used to add geodetic coordinates to an existing project point and is described on Page R 251 Resection for New Base Point Occupy Check gt f opens the Collect Check Point Prompt EE T screen to select an existing job file point and initiate an P Solution Float occupation to check the localization solved with the Sache ITP OR Give IS PAN Ge ar minimum amount and then create an extra GPS control check Gps Resection point which will be used to re solve the localization and Occupy a benchmark to create a GPS run the blunder detection routine control point to check the setup Occupy Check gt Start Now gt starts surveying without checking the ea localization In this case the localization solved with the resection Point 2 minimum control points will be set in the job file and Resection Point 3 the projection readjust mechanism will run to update Start Surveying Now any job points as required You must remember that the Start now and check YJ P q the setup later solution has not been checked for quality R 246 Survey Menu Basic GP
267. l delete the selected point Find will search for a point by its description Find Next will find the next point that contains the description entered when using the Find button Go To opens a dialog box where any point can be quickly located by the entered point name R 56 Job Menu Edit Multiple Points General Edit Points Edit General This screen is accessed after pressing Edit when more than one point is selected The change made in this screen will be applied to all the selected points 3 Edit points ef AETS Change Descriptions When checked allows you to E change all the selected point s descriptions to the Description entered in the next field Description is the new description that will replace the _ Description existing descriptions for the selected points Change Layers When checked allows you to move the L_ Layer selected points to the layer selected in the next field Points e Layer is the layer where the selected points will be moved General Location Geodetic R 57 Survey Pro Reference Manual Edit Point General The General card of the Edit Point screen is used to modify the description layer and feature information for the selected point Point Name displays the selected point s name fGledit Point 380 ef d 7 55 Description is the description for the selected point Point Mame Layer is the layer for
268. l open where you select how to handle the new point EJ Point Exists Overwrite Existing will overwrite the existing point with the new coordinates ee The specified point already exists ee Do you want to overwrite it use the next available point or store an Use Next Available will store the coordinates using the additional observation to the next available point name existing point Z Store Additional Observation will write an observation 732 record to the raw data file with the new coordinate values without changing the existing point in the job file This button is not available when shooting an existing Overwrite Existing traverse shot Use Next Available Store Additional Observation Cancel Hest T33 R 123 Survey Pro Reference Manual Remote Shot Remote Mode Traverse or Side Shot When running in remote mode tapping the or Side Shot button from the Traverse Sideshot screen will open the Remote Shot screen shown here The Remote Shot screen is identical to the Remote Control screen Page R 157 except it has an additional button that allows you to trigger the total station to take a shot Take Shot after the total station is properly aiming 2 Remote Shot toward the prism this will trigger the total station to Link take a shot If you are performing a side shot you will Locked remain in the Remote Shot screen once the shot is completed If you are
269. l separate screens where each individual screen accesses different types of settings Instrument Settings The Instrument Settings screen is actually the first of multiple screens used to identify and configure the instrument s you are using with Survey Pro The COMI Topcon correct settings must be configured for successful COML Trimble Dire communications between the data collector and the instrument The upper portion of the first Instrument Settings screen lists the names of all the instrument profiles on the data E ea Reate collector The other columns list the COM Port Brand E EAE and Model of the instrument defined in each profile GeoLock Manual Mode is a special profile that cannot be deleted Import When activated all surveying is performed without being connected to an instrument and all shot data must peme putto Sere A z be entered manually Note When running in leveling mode the nstrument Settings can be selected for Manual Mode to open the Level Method screen described on Page R 40 Instrument Settings opens the next Instrument Settings screen where the settings in the selected instrument profile can be modified R 36 Job Menu Note When editing an existing instrument profile you cannot modify the instrument brand or model Create New Instrument opens the next Instrument Settings screen where you can configure the settings for a new instrument and create a new instrument
270. layer from the dropdown list If using a DTM or DXF file toggle the button to gt File and then a StorePoint 44 fw tap the power button and Browse then select the appropriate file er ae With Centerline Warning If importing a DXF or DTM file where the ee Tee cee distance units in the source file are different than the distance units for the current job the imported coordinates will be converted to the current job s distance OCC 1 HI 5 20 BS 42 359 59 55 units when they are imported This is normally the desired result but it can cause a problem if the distance units for the imported data or the current job were set incorrectly This situation can most commonly occur when working with International Feet and US Survey Feet where the conversion from one to the other is not always obvious R 315 Survey Pro Reference Manual Usually the difference between International Feet and US Survey Feet is negligible 2 parts per million but when dealing with State Plane or UTM mapping plane coordinates which are often very large in magnitude the difference can be considerable if the coordinates are converted from one format to the other If importing coordinates from a source where you are not sure if the units are in International Feet or US Survey Feet into a job that is set to International Feet or US Survey Feet you will usually just want to import them without any conversion being performed To do t
271. le Line to R Crv prior to storing the first point of the curve Once the second point of the curve is stored the curve is defined and appended to the FENCE polyline This routine is enhanced with the Props command described below M On When checked activates the associated linework command If a particular polyline is created and then this is unchecked for that linework command future points stored with the same description would not result in any change to that polyline But if this is then activated again later all future points collected using the same linework command will be appended to the original polyline End toggles between the following two functions giving you control in collecting data for two or more separate features that use the same linework command IN When the map icon is displayed for this button a polyline has been created for the associated linework command Tapping the button will then allow you to detach future points using this linework command from the current polyline resulting in future points being added to a new polyline E If the button is blank and the current job contains at least one polyline you will be prompted to select an existing polyline Once R 75 Survey Pro Reference Manual selected future points stored with this linework command will be appended to the selected polyline Props A single polyline can contain different line types AETA in alsa The Props command will open the
272. lignment to use for the road If an alignment has not yet been created refer to Page R 65 for information on creating an alignment Road Name is the name assigned to the road The name must not Edit Road be the same as any existing road name Road Name Alignment Description displays the name of the selected alignment Alignment Description 8 Roadway Choose Alignment opens the Choose Alignment screen where an existing alignment can be selected Check checks the road for errors and displays the results in the Roads Report screen View Profiles opens the Road Profiles screen where you can see information about the cross sectional profile of _set Pos the road at any station Templates Widenings suoj gt Set POB opens the Road Alignment Properties screen Cancel where information about the current alignment can be changed Roads Report Screen Roads Edit Roads New or Edit Road Check The Roads Report screen displays a list of any errors after performing the following tests e Confirm that the alignment contains both a HAL and a VAL e Confirm that the horizontal length of the VAL is greater than or equal to the HAL e Confirm there is at least one template for each side of the road e Confirm the first template coincides with the starting station R 399 Survey Pro Reference Manual R 400 Confirm that all template segments have
273. line This will cause the total station to scan the perimeter of the defined surface This is useful to visually check the perimeter of your surface when the laser pointer is activated on the total station Show Unit This will cause the total station to scan a single horizontal vertical interval This is useful to visually check your interval settings when the laser pointer is activated on the total station Next gt Opens Surface Scan Statistics screen R 139 Survey Pro Reference Manual Surface Scan Statistics The Surface Scan Statistics screen displays details about the surface that was just defined Store Pts This box should be checked to store the points that are shot during the surface scan Enter the starting point number in the corresponding field Back Returns to the previous screen Go gt Opens the Surface Scan Results screen Surface Scan Results The Surface Scan Results screen contains two cards that detail the progress of the surface scan The Map card shows the points that were shot in green points that have not yet been shot in gray and rejected points in red Stop Results card will stop the surface scan gt XY View gt XZ View Map card Changes the orientation of the current view an Surface Scan Re 6 ar af 2 44 R 140 ia Surface Scan St er q 2 38 Rectangle Dimension Battery 97 o CAS 1 551 ift x H 1 800 ift Total Number of Poin
274. line and they should not be grouped close together Shot1 Shot2 Aim at target a hot i o4 no shot Aim at Corner will prompt you to aim at the corner the Shot 3 point that you want to store Although no shot is taken the angles to the point will be used to compute its location Note After all shots are done the computed elevation is displayed for the new point You can either enter a different elevation or tap amp to accept the computed elevation Corner amp Plane R 137 Survey Pro Reference Manual Backsight accesses the Backsight Setup screen Page R 114 where the current backsight can be modified Surface Scan The Surface Scan screen takes advantage of a robotic reflectorless total station to automatically take a sequence of shots of a surface PC software can then use the data to generate a 3 D raster image of the surface or a DTM surface to compute volume information Consult the User s Manual for more information on performing a surface scan BG Surface Scan Se E Fea PERE Bi Surface Scan Se 6 Er aff 2 35 Type Distance Grid ki Type Angle Grid ki pont 1 Eslfe 7 shoot 1 Shoot 1 ontzie gt gt I shoot a Ha ZA ip point 3 Ex 4 gt Shoot 3 shoot 2 HA i 3 FAR Horiz Dist Interval 2 feet EE Horiz Angle Interval i d Vert Dist Interval bz feet Vert Angle Interval deg ME g Tow Al Distance Grid Surface Scan Angle Grid Surfac
275. ll zoom the current screen out by approximately 25 Zoom Window Button allows you to drag a box across the screen When your finger or stylus leaves the screen the map will zoom to the box that was drawn Zoom To Point Button prompts you for a point name and then the map view will be centered to the specified point with the point label displayed in red Turn To Point Button Tap this button and then tap a point in the map view to automatically turn the total station to the selected point This is only available when a robotic total station is selected and Remote Control is active in the Instrument Settings Increase Vertical Scale is only available when viewing a vertical profile Each time it is tapped the vertical scale of the view is increased Decrease Vertical Scale is only available when viewing a vertical profile Each time it is tapped the vertical scale of the view is decreased Zoom Preview Button will display only the points that are currently in use only available from certain map view screens A Map Display Options accesses the Map Display Options screen described below Manage Basemaps accesses the Manage Basemaps screen described below only available from the main map view accessed from the command bar button R 440 Miscellaneous Screens Map Display Options From the Map View tap 4 The Map Display Options screen is used to configure the information that is displayed in the Map View
276. located at bottom of list The Quick Pick Editor is used to customize the list of routines available from the Quick Pick button Menu Items Is a dropdown list containing the menu items you would normally see in the Main Menu Hl Quick Pick Editor 7 s x 12 54 ee gues Selecting a menu item from this list will display all of the Traverse Sides al routines from that menu item that can be included in the Repetition Shots i Quick Pick list Routines listed in bold are already in the Quick Pick list Distance Offse e rel z l Add gt will add the routine selected in the left column Auto Collect to the bottom of the Quick Pick list which can then be Corner amp 2 Lines moved elsewhere in the list Corner amp Offset no Defaults will revert the Quick Pick list back to the defaults A prompt will first ask you if you are sure before the changes occur O Af Quick Picks is the list of routines available from the current Quick Pick list Move Up will move the routine selected in the right column up one level toward the top of the list lt Remove will remove the selected routine from the current Quick Pick list Move Down will move the routine selected in the right column down one level toward the bottom of the list R 437 Survey Pro Reference Manual Point List Editor Tap from a variety of screens The Select Point s screen is used to define a Select Point s simple list
277. log a session in the post processing file using an existing point name without changing that point record in the job file Check opens the Check Control Point screen where the local coordinate computed from the measurement is compared to the local coordinate s known value Control opens the Occupy Control Point screen where geodetic coordinates are measured at a point with local coordinates and added to that point record in the job file R 192 Survey Menu GPS Module Check Control Point Screen Check Point or Data Collection Check Point The Check Control Point screen is used to check a control point This is done when you want to verify the quality of the coordinate system solution Coordinates displays the local coordinates computed using the cudrrent measurement and the latest projection solution HF Check Control Point 4r i G Coordinates Northing 4 995 899 Easting 4 946 616 Elevation 67 601 Solution Quality displays the quality of the current measurement the solution type the number of satellites used and the horizontal and vertical precision computed by the receiver These values are explained with the GPS Status screen Page R 168 Solution Quality Solution Fixed Num SV T H Precsion 0 015 0 020 Session Time Errors displays the differences between the computed E5 local coordinates and the known coordinates for the Count Status control point VW P
278. lose Level Loop closes the current level loop and opens the Level screen where no additional shots can be taken 2 Peg Test The 2 Peg Test screen is used to check that the line of sight through the level is horizontal when the bubble is properly centered The graphic of this screen shows the current setup and indicates which shot you will be shooting next with a red square The first line of text also indicates which shot must be taken next Check H Dist This button only appears after shooting the initial shots to Point A This will measure the horizontal distance to Point B and compare it with the distance already measured to Point A Come go information is then provided so the rod over Point B can be moved until it equals the horizontal distance to Point A Use of this button is optional and the results are not used for computing the error Take Shot takes the required sets of shots to the point indicated on this screen R 264 he Close Loop ar ax 3 43 Loop Mame Starting CBM Point Mame Description Elevation Point To Close Upon Description known Elevation Observed Elevation Starting Closing Elev Longest BS Sight Length Shortest BS Sight Length Longest FS Sight Length Shortest FS Sight Length IMa BS FS Sight Lengths Per Set H Dist 30m H Dist Shooting the shot al on point 4 fat jaz Press the Take Shot button when you are ready Take Shot Leveling Menu 2
279. lumn is displayed that lists the horizontal distances measured from the instrument to each foresight M Elev is the column that lists the elevation computed for every point shot This column cannot be turned off M Desc When checked a column is displayed that lists the description for each point shot that exists in the current job Turning R 258 Leveling Menu points are not stored in the job and therefore do not have descriptions Column Width When M Auto Resize is checked the column widths are automatically sized so the content of each column is visible Style When set to Compact the backsight data for a particular setup is displayed on the same row as the foresight data from the previous setup When set to Double Spaced the data for each backsight and foresight shot are displayed in separate rows Level The Level screen provides information about the current level loop and is used to specify which of the four possible observation types to shoot next Current Loop Details displays details about the current Current Loop Details ia Last E foe Backsight Point displays details about the current ane a backsight Most of these details will only be available BS FS Sight Lengths 0 000 m after shooting an intermediate shot side shot or stakeout Total BS FS Lengths 0 000 m shot rites oi Pomi Sideshot gt opens the Sideshot screen Page R 260 Rod HI where the required information is ent
280. lutions e Side Side Angle Two sides and one angle that is not between those sides are known will solve for the unknown parts of the triangle Results Side a b c displays the length of each side Angle A B C displays the corresponding angle Area displays the area of the triangle in square feet and acres or in square meters and hectares R 360 COGO Menu Map Check The Map Check screen is used to manually enter boundaries from a map to check for closure and other information related to the boundary Edit accesses the appropriate editor screen where you can edit the selected line or curve from the list En Map Check az 0 00 00 L 100 g Az 45 00 00 R 328 Delete deletes the selected line segment az 45 00 00 L 50 0 Az 0 00 00 R 328 0 Clear clears all line entries Closure accesses the Results page Add Line accesses the Add Edit Line screen Page R 362 where a new line can be added prior to the select segment Add Arc accesses the Add Edit Curve screen Page R 362 where a new curve can be added prior to the selected segment Add to Map accesses the Add to Map screen Page R 363 where the map data entered in the list can be added to the current job as a polyline Results Area is the area that the boundary encloses If the start and end points are in different locations the area is computed as if a line joined these two poi
281. ly the Data Collection function will behave differently based on the receiver type that is active A GPS Status Start GPS Survey Data Collection Control Points Post Processing Base Setup Rover Setup Projection Remote Elevation Import GPS Control Receiver Info Adjust with Projection Projection Calculator 42Zernrsr Tost eBoeo amp File Management R 167 Survey Pro Reference Manual GPS Status The GPS Status screen contains several index card format screens providing real time status of the active receiver Receiver The Receiver card displays information about the receiver mode and GPS solution quality Mode displays if the receiver is set to Off Base Rover or Post Processing mode Memory displays the amount of memory remaining in the receiver s internal storage card Battery displays the remaining battery charge in the receiver Satellites displays the number of satellites e Used by the receiver for the current GPS solution e Locked Tracked by the receiver er ax 3 05 Receiver Mode Rover Memory 1 KB Battery 99 o Satellites Used OF Reset Locked 08 Ambiguities Position Quality Solution Fixed H Precision 0 066 Y Precision 0 098 HOOP 2 50 WOOP 3 50 PDOP 4 00 Receiver Data Link Post Process 4 gt oO vw E Reset Ambiguities is used to reinitialize the receiver s RTK engine Solut
282. mation for the rod location relative to the centerline yo Station 0 91 319 selected from the previous screen The type of line Segment N A segment in the polyline or alignment at the current Righ 42 634 station is also displayed This card is only available if the With Centerline checkbox was checked in the first Stake DTM screen R 318 Stakeout Menu Note Tapping anywhere within the map view will open a larger map view with zoom controls Point is the point name that will be assigned to the next stored stake point Desc is the description that will be assigned to the next stored stake point HR is the height of the rod Rae opens the Smart Target options Page R 444 EDM This button can be toggled to shoot in various EDM modes The options available depend on the total station being used Consult the total station s documentation for more information on the EDM modes that it supports Take Shot triggers the total station to take a shot to the prism View accesses the 3D View screen Page R 83 where a 3D view of the non reference DTM surface can be viewed from any angle as well as cut fill volume information between two selected surfaces Note The View button is only available when Generate DTM with Staked Points is checked in the first Stake DTM screen and at least three stake points have been stored that do not lie on a straight line lt Back returns to the first Stake D
283. mbert Conformal Conic EEEE RAEES 224 Oblique Mercator 224 stereographic 225 226 Transverse Mercator 224 projection calculator R 236 POCALION sessie R 237 projection mode 232 projection utilities 299 Q quick pick editor R 437 R radio settings R 96 radius point COMPUTE 25s iceesies R 375 raw data TOUS suse E eed R 78 VIEW aeti EE R 77 raw data file 6 35 receiver antenna R 181 receiver information R 230 Basic GPS iciisisiiiieiscss R 253 receiver settings254 341 R 90 data modem card R 94 general card R 99 receiver card R 93 Thales Ashtech R 100 Topcon Javad R 100 Trimble 0800e R 99 receiver Setup 06 R 91 record mode 04 R 146 PEIVACHION eenia R 44 register modules R 32 VECUSEEPING haseinio 4 remote control 147 R 151 R 157 video Card 0 008 R 160 remote elevation283 R 150 R 224 remote mode stake points R 274 stake to line R 279 traverse sideshot R 124 LUT LO R 158 repetition wicscsicesieiiceca nese 127 repetition settings 127 R 51 repetition shots R 125 resection 668 139 R 147 restore job R 26 road profile R 401 road report 000s R 399 road slope staking R 415 ro
284. n Page R 260 where the required shots are performed If the shots are taken to an existing point such as when shooting the closing benchmark the Point Exists screen described next will open where the loop can be closed Point Exists The Point Exists screen will appear after shooting a benchmark that is already stored in the current job and is used to overwrite the point create a new point or access the Close Loop screen to close the loop AF Point Exists E dx 3 36 Overwrite Allows you to overwrite the coordinates of A Tisa leveling control benchmark the benchmark with the new coordinates This option It can not be overwritten What will not be available when the benchmark entered in the do you want to do Turn to Benchmark screen was the same as the starting Store New Point benchmark Existing Use Next allows you to create a new point using the coordinates entered in the Turn to Benchmark screen and the elevation measured from the previous shots This option should not be selected when shooting the closing benchmark Glove Laop dn Control Benchinark Close Loop By Existing Point opens the Close Loop Close Loop By Existing Point screen described next Next 37 R 263 Survey Pro Reference Manual Close Loop The Close Loop screen lists the notes for the current level loop and allows you to close the current loop This is the only screen that can be used to close a loop C
285. n Li gps reciever if communicating with Bluetooth Bluetooth Available only when using a Bluetooth GPS receiver and Bluetooth is selected for the Serial Port accesses the Bluetooth configuration screen that comes with the Bluetooth driver software where you can quickly check or change the virtual COM port and favorites See the User s Manual for more information on configuring Bluetooth Baud Rate 4800 i Parity Mone ha Baud Rate is the speed that communication takes place This must match the baud rate set in the GPS receiver Parity This must match the parity set in the GPS receiver usually None Use 3D GeoLock When checked the GPS elevation will also be used to compute your location and adjust the vertical angle of the total station accordingly GPS is generally less precise vertically than horizontally so unless you are using GeoLock while in very steep terrain this item should remain unchecked R 165 Survey Menu GPS The Survey Menu while running in GPS mode with the GPS module contains the routines used for RTK data collection and post processing data collection The menu items are the same regardless of the type of data collection However some functions such as Control Points and Remote Elevation will only allow you to start when connected to an RTK receiver Other functions such as Post Processing will only allow you to start when connected to a post processing receiver Final
286. n Traverse gt Opens the Occupy Data Points corrections from new location screen Page R 191 and allows you to first occupy a new point and then move the base to that point before starting the Start GPS Survey wizard described on Page R 242 Occupy then Traverse Occupy and collect a point with the rover then move the base receiver to just collected pont Occupy then Traverse gt R 250 Survey Menu Basic GPS Module Control Points Control Points or Data Collection The Control Points screen is used to measure GPS control points to use in the localization adjustment or to check the location of exiting points against GPS measurements and the latest coordinate system This screen is described on Page R 192 Check Control Point Screen Check Point or Data Collection Check Point The Check Control Point screen is used to check a control point This is done when you want to verify the quality of the coordinate system solution and is described on Page R 193 Occupy Control Point Screen Control Points Control or Data Collection Control The Occupy Control Point screen is used to add geodetic coordinates to a known project point The most common use of this screen is to measure control points for the localization solution and is described on Page R 194 R 251 Survey Pro Reference Manual Post Processing Post processing data collection involves two steps First you must open a file and begin lo
287. n all three criteria check this box but enter 0 0 for the criteria you do not wish to apply e HRMS is the horizontal RMS threshold for automatic acceptance or warning on point acceptance e V RMS is the vertical RMS threshold for automatic acceptance or warning on point acceptance e PDOP is the PDOP threshold for automatic acceptance or warning on point acceptance Automatically Accept Data Collection is where you select to automatically accept data collection points when the criteria is met R 102 Job Menu GPS Module When checked both the data and Offset Shots screens will automatically accept points once the measurement is better than the specified criteria Data collection routines will always collect at least 5 seconds worth of data before automatically accepting points based on criteria Epoch Averaging is where you set a number of epochs to average in Survey Pro If this number is greater than one Survey Pro will use the number of epochs specified to calculate the final position using a simple non weighted average Note This function is not appropriate for every receiver Some receivers when dynamics are set to static use Kalman filtering and other superior techniques to calculate an average position In this case the position returned from the receiver is better with each epoch and you may actually degrade your result by averaging with Survey Pro You should check with your receiver manufacturer for sp
288. n in the previous screen Latitude displays the WGS84 latitude of the job file point Longitude displays the WGS84 longitude of the job file point Ellipse Height displays the WGS84 height of the job file point lt BACK returns to the previous Base Setup screen SET sets the receiver as an RTK base and configures the base reference position in Survey Pro If there is a Recording Interval set on the Job Settings Post Process page a file will be opened and logging of raw GPS measurements for post processing will start The base name and antenna measurement will be recorded in the file for this static session Ee Base Setup ir d 5 Base Point 2 Latitude 44 330769 N Longitude 123 160657 E positive Ellipse Height s50m idm Average position for epochs Al Base Setup Two GET and SET This final Base Setup screen is used to GET an autonomous HERE position from the receiver SET the receiver as an RTK base and configure the base reference position in Survey Pro This screen is shown when the selected base point does not have geodetic coordinates Base Point displays the base point name chosen in the previous screen Latitude is where you enter the WGS84 latitude for the base point Longitude is where you enter the WGS84 longitude for the base point R 183 Survey Pro Reference Manual Ellipse Height is where you enter the WGS84 ellipsoid height for the base poi
289. n sequence around the scan frame to create a polygon with three or more sides When is displayed a rectangular scan frame is defined by tapping two diagonal corners R 141 Survey Pro Reference Manual rs Hatching Tool fills an existing scan frame with parallel lines to make it stand out visually Clear Scan Frame Data clears any scan frame data from the screen Scan Frame Toggle inverts the horizontal limits of an existing rectangular scan frame This tool can be used to quickly define a 360 scan frame for taking panoramic photos by first creating a rectangular scan frame with the desired height and a near zero width and then tap this button Predefined Vertical Scan Frame generates a vertical scan frame with horizontal limits that fall within the video image and vertical limits that extend to the vertical turning limits of the total station Note Once a scan frame is defined it can be resized by dragging the edges or corners Predefined Horizontal Scan Frame generates a horizontal scan frame with vertical limits that fall within the video image and with horizontal limits that wrap nearly 360 around the total station W Undo will undo the last change s made to the current scan frame with each tap Zoom In will digitally zoom in the image with each tap between four levels from 1x to 4x Zoom Out will zoom out with each tap from 4x back to 1x Define Scan Frame W Aim Instrument toggles between two
290. n the Instrument Settings screen The Remote Control screen allows you to turn the total station in any direction using the arrow buttons on the keypad and control the tacking functions The arrow keys are typically used to get the total station to aim in the general vicinity of the prism prior to initiating a search The total station will continue to turn in the direction of the button as long as the button remains pressed M aims the scope upward g Remote Contro gt 47 lt 6 38 aims the scope downward Battery 74 Link GOOD MEASURING gt turns the scope to the right as you face the total station from the data collector turns the scope to the left GeoLock This button is available when GeoLock is Ha 171 37 34 enabled and when a supported total station has lost lock za 88 49 44 sp 25 662 He e HI 1 620 Results Video map Aim Foresight Search starts the search routine where the total station searches in a specific pattern until it sees the prism and then stops on the prism Tapping it will turn the total station to the area of the prism computed by the GPS solution followed by a prism search See the User s Manual for more information on using GeoLock Lock puts the total station in track mode where it will track the movements of the prism R 157 Survey Pro Reference Manual Stop stops the total station from trackin
291. new line can be defined by entering a range of points Solve computes the location of the offset point and optionally stores the point R 357 Survey Pro Reference Manual Corner Angle The Corner Angle screen provides information on the horizontal angle created from three known points Backsight is an end point of the angle to be solved EJ Corner Angle Middle Point is the corner point of the angle to be Begin Point fz solved Middle Point Ee Foresight Point is the other end point of the angle to be T End Paint iz solved 3 Select from Map Allows you to quickly select all of the AgI A Angle i above points from a map view The first point tapped is entered in the Backsight field the second in the Middle Point field and the third point tapped is entered in the End Point field Ltt Solve will compute the following results that describe the angle defined by the three points provided ele Results Angle left is the horizontal angle created as you occupy the Middle Point face the Backsight and turn counterclockwise to the Foresight Point Angle right is the horizontal angle created as you occupy the Middle Point face the Backsight and turn clockwise to the Foresight Point 180 right is the angle that results from subtracting the angle right value from 180 HD to Beg is the horizontal distance between the Backsight and the Middle Point HD to End is the
292. ngent to circle R 377 linework cccecceecceeseees R 73 localization c ccecceeee 225 default zone 237 horizontal card R 208 manual parameters R 207 ONG POI eesin 281 parameters 006 276 pick from database R 204 residuals 000 R 207 residuals for Basic GPS R 247 set ZONE cceceece sees R 203 SOL Crete fSscpeun Caine R 205 solve for Basic GPS R 247 vertical card R 208 with control points 271 localization calculator R 209 MAIN MENU 0ecee ees R 3 Main Menu 006 13 manage basemapB6 R 442 manage layers R 85 map check 163 R 361 map display options R 441 map projection 6 223 map VIEW eeeeeee 28 R 439 mapping ground coordinates POEPIE EA E E ET 242 mapping plane select zone 236 239 mapping plane scale factor225 303 measure mode settingsR 102 modem serial commR 98 R 99 modem serial communications NEW ODore rns R 9 new occupy point R 122 NGVD29 ieee 220 TOG aeia R 78 O Oblique Mercator 224 Oblique Mercator projection bits eA hod Sra an I AETS 224 occupy control pointR 194 R 251 occupy data point 291 occupy data points R 191 offset line R 355 R 356 offset points 06 R 356 SOrD S nana R 312 offset shot 291 offset s
293. ngle Right value is changed to zero to reflect the change The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the design point 3 To prevent errors the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog if this button has been used A Circle zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked Note The Ci rcle Zero button is not available when using a robotic total station lt Back returns to the previous screen Stake gt accesses the third Define a Location screen where the new point can be staked out R 325 Survey Pro Reference Manual Note The third Define a Location screen is identical to the third Stake Points screen which is described on Page R 272 Where is Next Point Where Is Next Point The Where is Next Point screen is used to assist the rod person in locating another point given the current rod point a reference point and the point to locate Current Rod Pt is the current rod point Next FS Point is the point that the rod person wants to locate Increment is added to the Next FS Point value after pressing the button A negative integer can be entered to have point numbers advance in descending order Next Point gt advances the Next FS Point value by the specified Increment replaces the current rod point by the previous FS point and accesses Screen Two Note If the Next FS Point does not exist and the Increment v
294. ngs screen respectively o gt __ _ _ Als Hang up Disconnects the cell phone or IP modem connection Post Process The Post Process card displays information about GPS raw data logging for post processing Recording no session Recording Site ID Interval 1 0 sec Elapsed Wo session Free Memory 1 KB DOPs HOOF 1 60 YDOF 2 10 Satellites Used 6 Locked 6 Receiver Data Link Post Process gt Oo aj Note Some GPS receivers monitor post processing session status while others simply record event markers in the log file If your receiver does not monitor sessions some fields are not displayed Status displays information about the recording It will be one of four values e No Communication we are not receiving a response to commands R 170 Survey Menu GPS Module e No Data we are receiving an unknown or a bad response to commands e Recording a file on the receiver or in the data collector is open and recording GPS raw data If this receiver monitors sessions this field will display session in progress when a session is ongoing e Not Recording no file is open and there is no raw data recording Last Site ID displays the Site ID of the current session if a session is in progress If your receiver does not monitor sessions the Site ID is the last Site ID used by Survey Pro Interval displays the current recording interval
295. nna are defined INext gt opens the final Base Setup screen The final screen depends on the base point you choose e Ifthe base point has existing geodetic coordinates or if they can be computed from 3D plane coordinates and the latest projection solution the final screen allows you to SET the receiver with the known position e Ifthe base point does not have geodetic coordinates or if geodetic coordinates cannot be computed for this point the final screen is used to GET an autonomous position and set the receiver R 180 Survey Menu GPS Module Receiver Antenna The Receiver Antenna screen is used to define the parameters of the antenna used with the current receiver This screen may be opened as the Base Receiver Antenna Rover Receiver Antenna or the Post Processing Antenna screen PJ Base Receiver antem lt 4x C Antenna Type is where you select the model of antenna to use The options available here depend on the current antenna Type Measure To Measured Radius Offset Serial Motch oO F receiver Slant measure mark Measure To is where you select method for antenna height measurements Most antennas have only two 0 570866 ft 0 029528 ft choices measure to bottom of mount or a visible slant measure mark Measured is where you enter the height of the antenna measured to the location specified in the Measure To field Radius is where you enter the di
296. ns and returns to the previous screen R 60 Job Menu Edit Polylines M Add Edit Polylines iew eat petete 7 Boudary 1 i en ee ees gon h The Edit Polylines screen is used to add edit and delete polylines in the current job The first screen will display a list of all the polylines that are stored in the current job Selecting any of the polylines listed will display a horizontal overhead and vertical side view of that polyline New will open the Polyline Editor where a new polyline can be created Edit will open the selected polyline in the New Polyline screen described below Delete will delete the selected polyline Screen Two New Polyline the current polyline can be modified The second screen is used to define all of the points that are used in the polyline Any curve information will be entered later but the end points must still be selected at this point The current polyline is shown on color displays with bold red lines and all other polylines are shown using thin black lines Only the current polyline data can be edited Tap Points opens a map view where the points in your polyline can be tapped They must be tapped in the order that they occur in the polyline To From Allows you to define a range of points to define a polyline Edit Accesses the third screen described next where R 61 Survey Pro Reference Manual Cle
297. ns from where the tangent intersects with the spiral toward where the spiral intersects with the curve TS gt SC or if the curve runs from where the curve intersects with the spiral toward where the spiral intersects with the tangent CS gt ST R 63 Survey Pro Reference Manual Adding a Vertical Curve Tap the tab M Apply Curve must be checked to enter a vertical at curve Grade at EVC BVC is the known grade at either the end of vertical curve or beginning of vertical curve The grade entered here is determined by the selection made in the Auto Compute field Auto Compute will automatically compute the grade at the selected point and display it on the screen The grade at the point that is not checked here must be specified in the field defined above R 64 E Add Edit Curve ok cade at EV T Apply Curve 4uto Compute Q EC 0 EWC BYC 4 000 gt Arc Spiral Parabolic Curve Cancel gt Job Menu Edit Alignments The Edit Alignments screen is used to create and edit alignments which can then be used with routines such as Offset Staking Offset Points Offset Lines and Road Layout Alignments are used to describe all of the horizontal and vertical details of a road s centerline An alignment does not use existing points to define any particular locations on the alignment although a point can be used to anchor the starting location which is the same location for both the horizontal and
298. ns the GPS Status screen Page R 168 R 191 Survey Pro Reference Manual Control Points Control Points or Data Collection The Control Points screen is used to measure GPS control points to use in the localization adjustment or to check the location of exiting points against GPS measurements and the latest coordinate system GPS Status displays the current solution type radio signal quality number of satellites used and the receiver s estimate of the horizontal precision of the solution Fixed current point If this area is tapped the GPS Status screen will open Page R 168 J Poit cov A Set HR displays the current antenna measurement and measure to setting You can change the antenna to Bottom of mount measurement by entering a new value in the edit box Utilities This new antenna height will be sent to the receiver with your next control or check point collection You can Occupy change both the antenna measurement and measure to setting by tapping on to open the Receiver Antenna screen Page R 181 HF Control Points ir ax E Radio 99 Sw OF HRMS 0 07 Input E Results Projection opens the Projection screen Page R 200 View Points opens the View Coordinates File screen where the project points can be examined Post Process opens the Receiver Session screen Page R 197 where you can occupy a point for a post processing only session This allows you
299. nsition length will extend before and after the starting point and or the ending point of the super elevation This should be considered when using parabolic transitions near the end of an alignment since this length cannot extend beyond the limits of the road Hinge on gt Center gt Edge determines if the super elevation is computed by rotating the road around the centerline or the road s edge Note When hinging on edge the road is actually rotated around the end of the first segment of the template that leads into the super elevation Only the first segment is adjusted with a super elevation The length and slope of any segments beyond the first will not be adjusted from a super elevation Check checks the road for errors and displays the results in the Roads Report screen described on Page R 399 R 408 Roads Menu Road Stakeout The Stake Road screen is used to stake any segment of a road profile at any station Tap Road opens the Tap on a Road screen where you can tap on any road in the job to select it B er 4f 10 34 Toroa f JB H v Mame Example Begin Station 0 00 000 End Station 34 76 540 Use Station Equation Equation Settings OCC 1 Hi 5 000 BS 0 00 00 Backsight Name displays the name of the selected road Begin Station displays the station assigned to the beginning of the road End Station displays the final station in the road Use St
300. nstrued in accordance with the laws of the State of Oregon United States of America LIMITED WARRANTIES AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY LICENSOR grants solely to you a limited warranty that i the media on which the Program is distributed shall be substantially free from material defects for a period of NINETY 90 DAYS and ii the Program will perform substantially in accordance with the material descriptions in the Documentation for a period of NINETY 90 DAYS These warranties commence on the day you first obtain the Program and extend only to you the original customer These limited warranties give you specific legal rights and you may have other rights which vary from state to state Except as specified above LICENSOR MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING THE PROGRAM MEDIA OR DOCUMENTATION AND HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE LICENSOR does not warrant the Program will meet your requirements or that its operations will be uninterrupted or error free If the media Program or Documentation are not as warranted above LICENSOR will at its option repair or replace the nonconforming item at no cost to you or refund your money provided you return the item with proof of the date you obtained it to LICENSOR within TEN 10 DAYS after the expiration of the applicable warranty period If LICENSOR determines that the particular item has been damaged by acc
301. nstrument and stored in the raw data OCC 1 HE 5 000 BS 0 00 00 2 The Angle Right value is changed to zero to reflect the change The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the design point 3 To prevent errors the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog if this button has been used A circle zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked 4 The first time Circle Zero is used during a stakeout session a dialog will appear to warn that the original backsight reference will be lost Note The button is not available when using a robotic total station lt Back returns to the first screen Stake gt accesses the third and final Stake Points screen where the shots to the stake point are performed R 271 Survey Pro Reference Manual Stake Points Screen Three Height of Rod is the length of the rod fg stake Points lt 0 9 43 Design Elev displays the current design elevation From GUN to ROD which can be modified with the button FORWARD 0 6 26 GoLEFT 0 272 2 FORWARD BACK indicates if the rod must move Hr 5 800 ift Ee cut forward toward the total station or backward away Rod Elev 95 278 0 022 from the total station Design Elev 95 256 Change Go RI GHT Go LEFT indicates if the rod must move to pie the right or left from the total station s point of view Angle Right Shot ae 00 OU Stake Ne
302. nt Note You can enter latitude in dd mmsssss format with north positive or you can enter dd mm ss ssssss N S You can enter longitude in ddd mmsssssss format with east positive or you can enter ddd mm ss sssss E W Average position for epochs before GET instructs the receiver to average autonomous positions for this number of epochs before returning Get Position From Receiver Rx queries the receiver for an autonomous position and updates the edit boxes GPS Status opens the GPS Status screen Page R 168 Note It is highly recommended that you do only one autonomous base setup per job This will make it much easier to manage the transformation from geodetic to local plane coordinates in your job It is possible however to do multiple autonomous setups in a job If you do this each setup is assigned a unique setup group to identify them See the user s manual for more information on setup groups SET sets the receiver as an RTK base and configures the base reference position in Survey Pro If there is a Recording Interval set on the Job Settings Post Process page a file will be opened and logging of raw GPS measurements for post processing will start The base name and antenna measurement will be recorded in the file for this static session R 184 Rover Setup The Rover Setup screen is used to set the RTK rover receiver and to configure or check the base reference position in Survey Pro Rover
303. nt dialog so you can store the last point that was shot Remote Stake to Line The content of the Stake to Line screen when running in remote mode is nearly identical to running in non remote mode but the graphic portion of the screen looks and behaves differently The graphic is more intuitive simply point the data collector toward the total station and the graphic tells you the orientation of the line and what direction to travel to reach the line in the shortest distance See the illustrations below R 279 Survey Pro Reference Manual If the Use Manual Updating Remote Control field is checked in the Stakeout Settings screen Page R 45 a button will be available which allows you to manually control when shots are taken R 280 a Stake to Line en aff 5 43 BACK 2 140 RIGHT of Line Station O 32 797 Offset 25 316 Fill 0 379 E 40 ifeet lt Back Prism is greater than 10 feet from the line Tp H Stake to Line an af 5 34 0 659 LEFT of Line Station 0 08 938 Offset 0 659 Fill 0 076 BACK D 1 00 Feet on Al Prism is within 1 foot of the line 2 Stake to Line qo a 5 31 4 4 652 LEFT of Line Station 0 07 188 Offset 3 682 Fill 0 077 Prism is between 1 and 10 feet from the line es F thy Stake to Line qr a 5 41 BACK 0 010 Station 04 10 074 Offset 0 010 Fill 0 067 Results _ on 1 00 feet QO im i
304. nt is advanced by the Design Elevation 99 960 Increment value Staked Elevation 96 177 Fill 3 703 Left Curb Fil 3 923 Left EQIP Fill 3 423 Center Line Fill 3 523 Right EOF Fil 3 423 Right Curb Fil 3 923 R 287 Survey Pro Reference Manual Slope Staking Slope Staking The Slope Staking screen is used to locate the catch points for a roadway in any terrain The first screen is used to define or select the line that E Slope Staking describes the centerline of the road to be slope staked An existing polyline or alignment can be selected or a i Tap Line series of existing points can be entered to define the lt centerline g v Tap Line allows you to tap an existing polyline or Begin Station o oo0 alignment that defines the centerline of the road To From allows you to enter a range of points to define the centerline of the road OCC 1 HE 5 000 BS 0 00 00 Begin Station defines the station at the beginning of the centerline Backsight accesses the Backsight Setup screen Next gt opens the next screen Backsight Settings Close Slope Staking Screen Two Enli Slope Staking 1 2 Road Width The second screen is used to describe the profile of the L 20 0 ft road R 20 0 ft 1 2 Road Width is the horizontal width of Left and LISEN Right sides of the road respectively from the centerline A L 2 0 Offset From to the nearest edge of the curb or ditch
305. nt job or import the data from a LandXML file to the current job Warning Coordinate values can change when they are imported Importing coordinates from any source other than a JOB file requires that the distance units used in the source file be specified It is not necessary to specify the distance units when importing coordinates from a JOB file since those units are written within the file If importing coordinates where the distance units in the source file are different than the distance units for the current job the imported coordinates will be converted to the current job s distance units when they are imported This is normally the desired result but it can cause a problem if any distance units were set incorrectly This situation can most commonly occur when working with International Feet and US Survey Feet where the conversion from one to the other is not always obvious Usually the difference between International Feet and US Survey Feet is negligible 2 parts per million but when dealing with State Plane or UTM mapping plane coordinates which are often very large in magnitude the difference can be substantial if the coordinates are converted from one format to the other If importing coordinates from a source such as an HP 48 where you are not sure if the units are in International Feet or US Survey Feet into a job that is set to International Feet or US Survey Feet you will usually just want to import them without an
306. nt station ZE to Rod is the zenith angle that the total station must aim toward so that it is facing the current station Circle Zero is used to modify the circle on the total station so that the angle right reading will be zero when it is facing toward the design point which can sometimes be easier than turning to an obscure angle value When this button is tapped the following actions will occur 1 Anew backsight circle value is computed sent to the instrument and stored in the raw data 2 The Angle Right value is changed to zero to reflect the change The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the design point 3 To prevent errors the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog if this button has been used A circle zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked Note The button is not available when using a robotic total station lt Back returns to the previous screen R 304 Stake Out Point Stakeout Menu Stake gt accesses the next screen which is identical to the third Stake Points screen described on Page R 272 Screen Summary Screen One is used to define the primary curve used to determine the location of the curve to be staked and the station associated with the PC Point Screen Two is used to define the offset distance and location the station to be staked and the station interval Screen Three pr
307. ntal Card The Horizontal card shows results of the horizontal localization solution Status displays the status of the current horizontal solution This will be one of the following e Control points solution is displayed when the parameters were calculated from the selected control points van Solve Localizati 2 Er f 6 03 Horizontal Vertical Status a horizontal solution and Solve H was not Scale 1 000006523 Rotation Se a oa selected on this pass Delta M 92 352 208 m l oe Delta E 94 770 615 m e No horizontal solution is displayed when there is Origin N 100 000 000 m no horizontal solution in Ground TDS Origin E 100 000 000 m Localization mode This happens when you tap Solve H and no control points are selected e Unadjusted Mapping Plane is displayed in Mapping Plane mode when there is a mapping plane zone selected but no horizontal adjustment is solved Scale displays the scale factor Rotation displays the rotation Delta N E displays the horizontal shift from the centroid of the control points on the intermediate map projection to the centroid of the control points in the local coordinate system Origin N E displays the coordinate origin of the localization control points This is the centroid of the control points on the intermediate map projection R 211 Survey Pro Reference Manual Vertical Card The Vertical card shows results of the vertical localization solut
308. nts Length is the length of the boundary from the first point to the last point Perimeter is the length of the boundary from the first point to the last point plus any additional length between the last point and the first point Error dist is the distance between the last point and the first point R 361 Survey Pro Reference Manual Error azm is the direction from the last point to the first point Precision is the ratio between the Error distance and Perimeter Add Edit Line Map Check Add Line E Add Edit Line ok The Add Edit Line screen is used to enter a newline to gt Aamuth Etim __ the list prior to the selected line segment Length Boot lt l Azimuth gt Bearing is the direction of the line Length is the length of the line in feet or meters enters the line to the list Cancel closes the screen without entering any new line data Add Edit Curve The Add Edit Curve screen is used to enter a new curve to the list prior to the selected line segment Radius The distance from the radius point to the curve Delta The internal angle from center to tangent points Degree Arc The internal angle equivalent to a 100 ft arc length Degree Chord The internal angle equivalent to a 100 ft chord length Length The arc length The chord length Tangent The distance from the PC or PT to the PI R 362 E Add to Map Descr
309. nverted In Decimal Unit ee Fractional ecima 45 674479 ift inch distance numerator In Architectural Unit Fractional Feet inch component denominator Whole inch component Convert Use will perform the conversion If this screen is accessed from the Quick Pick list when the cursor was in a distance field this button will be labeled Use and will copy the converted distance to the corresponding distance field R 368 Curve Menu The Curve Menu contains routines that will compute all aspects of a horizontal curve and assist in curve layout Spiral Layout A Curve Solution B PI and Tangents C 38 Point Curve D Radius Point E Tangent to Circle F Curve Layout G Traverse on Curve H Parabolic Curve I Parabolic Layout J Straight Grade K Spiral L M Traverse on Spiral R 369 Survey Pro Reference Manual Curve Solution The Curve Solution screen provides detailed information on a curve when two parts of the curve are known The first known part of the curve is defined by one of the FAREA following i a 100 0 ft e Radius is the distance from the radius point to the oor Ly curve O IS Delta is the deflection angle Degree Arc is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft arc length e Degree Chord is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft chord length Traverse The second known part of the curve is defined by one of the following
310. nywhere within the video image will turn the total station to that location Existing points are overlaid on the screen when they are in view Zoom In will digitally zoom in the image with each tap between four levels from 1x to 4x Zoom Out will zoom out with each tap from 4x back to 1x Take Photo Takes a digital photo and stores the photo to a file Brightness Contrast Opens a dialog box where the brightness contrast and white balance can be adjusted 4 Video Display Options Opens the Video Display Options screen described below where the look of overlaid points can be customized Green Blinking Light A blinking green light in the upper right corner indicates a good data feed is being received Red Blinking Light A blinking red light in the lower left corner indicates a good video feed is being received Settings Accesses the Settings screen where the Video Settings screen Page R Error Bookmark not defined can be accessed R 160 Survey Menu Video Display Options f video Display 0 9 4 9 03 The Video Display Options screen is used to customize Show Points w Mames Smart Point Labels Show All Points So the look of points that are overlaid on the video screen a Show Points when checked points will be overlaid on the video screen The color that fills the small squares that represents the points can be selected with the corresponding color button
311. o Line routine Page R 279 When staking to a line and the prism is located at a perpendicular distance to the specified line that is within the range set here a message will state that you are on the line Horizontal Distance Tolerance This setting affects the GPS staking routines When you are within the specified distance to the location you are staking you are considered on that location Turn gun to design point only applies to motorized total stations The following options are available e 2D HA only A motorized total station will turn horizontally toward the design point after tapping the L urn Gun button in the particular stakeout screen e 3D HA and ZA A motorized total station will turn horizontally and vertically toward the design point after tapping the button in the particular stakeout screen e Automatic 2D HA only A motorized total station will automatically turn horizontally toward the design point when the stakeout screen opens e Automatic 3D HA and ZA A motorized total station will automatically turn horizontally and vertically toward the design point when the stakeout screen opens Cut Sheet Offset stored The cut sheet offset information can be stored to the raw data file in either of the following formats when performing any offset staking routine e Design Offset When selected a cut sheet report will list the design offset values R 47 Survey Pro Reference Manual e Actual Offset
312. o codes Feature Code File displays the selected feature code file to use with the current job See the User s Manual for more information on feature codes Browse Allows you to select a file to use with the current job Simply tap on the filename and then tap Open Clear closes the currently selected file so that it is no longer used with the current job R 43 Survey Pro Reference Manual Surveying Settings The Surveying Settings card allows you to select various options that affect how data collection is performed M Prompt for Description When checked a prompt for a description will appear before any new point is stored from only the routines under the Survey menu Page R _ LJPremot for Description Prompt for Height of Rod 113 Survey with True Azimuths Adjust for Earth Curvature f Refract Detect Duplicate Shots Note Descriptions can be no longer than 16 characters a Classic Backsioht Se Scale Factor C Use Scale Factor M Prompt for Height of Rod When checked a prompt RES OE BRE Sem regres for the rod height will appear before any new point is scaled stored Compute Scale O Prompt to Reset Scale With Mew M Prompt for Layer When checked a prompt to select Setups a layer will appear before any new point is stored from E only the routines under the Survey menu Page R 113 emer G aa M Prompt for Attributes When checked a prompt to select feature information
313. o define FAETH which point on the curve is known Known W PYCC Pwl One of the following options must be selected from the dropdown list PWC Station e Curve Length is selected when the length of the PC Elevation curve is known When selected the following must Begn Grade 5 0 also be specified End Grade o Curve length is the length of the vertical curve the horizontal distance between the PVC and Hi Lo Elev soar PVT e Point On Curve is selected when the location of another point on the curve is known When selected Input Results a the following must also be specified o Station is the station where the other point is located on the curve o Elevation is the elevation of the other point e Hi Lo Elevation is selected when the high or low point for the curve is known When selected the following must also be specified o Hi Lo Elevation is the elevation of the curve at the location where the tangent is zero the crest of the curve Note When the begin and end grades are both positive or both negative the high low elevation will not be located between the PVC and PVT PVC PVI Station is the station for the specified point R 384 Curve Menu PVC PVI Elevation is the elevation for the specified point Begin Grade is the grade at the tangent of the PVC End Grade is the grade at the tangent of the PVT Solve computes the details for the vertical curve La
314. o delete or copy move to 77252581 701 9 14 2004 14 55 34 the data collect 77252582 7T01 9 14 2004 16 09 17 data collector 77252590 T01 9 14 2004 17 24 10 Delete Selected File s Deletes the selected files from the receiver HJ File Management 2 2 55 Note When files are deleted from the receiver they are actually renamed so that they can be recovered later The oldest renamed files will automatically be permanently deleted by the receiver when disk space _ Delete File s After Download becomes low Active Files Recoverable Files Download Selected File s copies the selected files to the data collector These files will be stored in the directory on the data collector where the current job resides Note If a file being downloaded already exists on the data collector you can overwrite the existing file give the downloaded file a new name or cancel the transfer If you choose to give the file a new name you must also provide the same T00 or TO1 extension as in the original name R 239 Survey Pro Reference Manual Note Downloaded files can be transferred to a PC with ActiveSync and then converted to a DAT file for use with Trimble Geomatics Office TGO To convert a T00 or TO1 file to a DAT file right click on the file from a PC running the latest version of TGO and select Convert to DAT format Delete File s After Download When checked any files that are copied to the data c
315. o the tangent Delta is the angle between the tangent and the line between the PI and SC R 392 Roads Menu The Roads Menu contains the routines used to perform road layout Edit Templates Edit Alignments Edit Roads Road Stakeout Slope Staking Show Station Road Station and Offset 7 a goue R 393 Survey Pro Reference Manual Add Edit Templates The Add Edit Templates screen is used to edit an existing template or create a new template Templates describe the cross sectional profile of a roadway They can contain information such as the road width its slope a curb and or a ditch Each separate portion of a template is called a segment All templates must have at least one segment and all templates of a particular road must have the same number of segments Any template can describe either the left or right side of the road s cross section they re reversible If a road s left and right side are identical only one template needs to be created the other side can use the same template or be mirrored later when the road is defined All of the saved templates are listed displayed in this screen including each template s name number of segment cut slope and fill slope An image of the selected segment is also displayed in this screen New opens the New Template screen where a new add Edit Templates template can be created This screen is identical to the eA ew Ea Edit Template
316. ocalization Page R 205 Start Surveying Now 1 th Solve the required localization later ae ow gt al ows you to start surveying now wit out localizing Localization can be performed later at which time all data collection points will be updated to the proper local coordinates R 186 DF Data Collection at dx O Solution Fixed Survey Menu GPS Module Data Collection The Data Collection screen is used to collect GPS measurements and store new points in the job GPS Status displays the current solution type the data modem reception quality the number of satellites used Radio 99 Sye OF HRMS 0 07 and the horizontal precision computed by the receiver at o mua A When this area is tapped the GPS Status screen Page to Bottom of mount Occupy R 168 will open Point is where you enter the point name for the next point to be stored Description is where you enter the description for the Post Process next point to be stored Feature Offset es Set HR displays the current antenna measurement and Topo Ss Set HR display Input E Results measure to setting You can change the antenna measurement by entering a new value in the edit box This new antenna height will be sent to the receiver with your next data collection point You can change both the antenna measurement and measure to setting by tapping on Set HRI to open the Receiver Antenna screen Page R 1
317. of the origin point This coordinate will be used to calculate an offset from the mapping plane grid coordinates so that you can separate the grid and ground coordinates to make them recognizable This screen is used when you select either Key in coordinates to define origin or Pick point to define origin on the first page Reference Point Location Grid displays the local northing and easting of the ground origin Desired Local Ground Coordinate is the desired local northing and easting coordinate of the ground origin Ground Coordinates Results The Ground Coordinates Results screen is used to preview the values van Ground Coordi ie Er af 11 49 Reference Point Location Local Lat 44 S3 08 16360 H Long 123 16 05 95157 W Height 64 999 Ground Offsets Morth 5341441 793306 m East 6 72020 4595255 M Scale Ground Scale 0 s00035688 to be used for the ground coordinate system This screen displays the parameters for the ground coordinate system If the origin was set to use either Key in coordinates to define origin or Pick point to define origin on the first page the values on this page are calculated from the parameters entered in the wizard If the origin was set at the Mapping plane origin then you need to enter the scale and offsets in the edit fields on this page Ground Offsets displays the shift applied to the mapping plane coordinates to get the desired local ground coordinate at the selecte
318. of the super elevation measured from the Start Station or it is the end Start Slope io _ station depending on how the button is toggled End Slope l Parabolic Transitions Start End Cancel L Roads Menu Add Edit Super Elevation Screen Roads Edit Roady New or Edit Super Elevationg Add or ait The Add Edit Super Elevation screen allows you to add a super elevation to the road or edit an existing super elevation Start Station is the location of the beginning of the super elevation on the alignment Note Keep in mind that the slope at the end of a super elevation will continue down the road unless another super elevation is entered to change the slope back again For example a curve will typically require two super elevations for each side of the road one at the beginning of the curve and one at the end Slope 1 2 is the starting and ending slopes of the road respectively The starting slope must match the current slope of the road at that station Parabolic Transition 1 2 is the length of the vertical curve that will lead in and out of the super elevation respectively Parabolic transitions are optional parts of a super elevation and result in a smoother change going into and coming out of a super elevation similar to how a spiral curve is used with a horizontal curve R 407 Survey Pro Reference Manual Note One half of the parabolic tra
319. offset from an existing polyline or alignment at a specified interval Tap Line allows you to tap an existing polyline or Store Offset Points alignment that the station and offset will be computed eS From To From allows you to enter a range of points that define the line where the station and offset will be Begin Station computed from Begin Station is the station assigned to the beginning of the line Next gt takes you to the next Store Offset Points screen where the slope staking parameters are set up Close Settings R 312 Stakeout Menu Store Offset Points Screen Two The second Store Offset Points screen is used to define the road profile or offset distances that will be used to compute the offset point coordinates 1 2 Road Width is the Left and Right width of the road respectively from the centerline to the edge of payment Store Offset Points 1 2 Road Width Stake Curb Ditch X Slope is the Left and Right slope of the road L 20 0 ft a leant respectively from the centerline to the edge of payment ay X Slope calculated from 100 Run L 2 0 Offset From Edge of Road R j 2 0 2 0 ft Note A negative slope will result in water running from the centerline toward the edge of payment M Stake Curb Ditch When checked a curb or ditch and an offset can be defined beyond the edge of the pavement Close Settings He
320. oint 1 pte es 4 0 ft Perpend Offset a Elevation Offset Backsight Shoot Line OCC 1 HI 5 000 BS 0 00 00 Input E Results Close Settings e Horiz _ Offset R Shot 1 Ling Shot2 y a a ao Perpend Offset Elevation Offset Corner amp Offset Backsight accesses the Backsight Setup screen Page R 114 where the current backsight can be modified R 136 Survey Menu Note After each shot is complete the computed elevation is displayed for the new point You can either enter a different elevation or tap amp to accept the computed elevation Corner amp Plane a Oe The Corner and Plane screen is used to store a point ae using a reflectorless total station for a point that cannot a Foresight ps M be shot but three points on the same plane can be shot Foresight is the name of the point that will be stored Point 1 of Plane Angle Right pog o deg ATI ee aa a ates EA den Description is the description for the point that will be Slope Dist 100 000 feet stored Point 2 of Plane HR 0 000 shows that no rod height will be used with ane ne this routine since all shots are direct reflectorless Shoot Plane will prompt you to take three shots on the occ 1 HE 5 000 BS 0 00 00 same flat surface that the new point is located Input Results Map Note Each shot can be in any location on the same plane but they must not form a straight
321. ollector will automatically be deleted from the receiver after the transfer Recoverable Files The Recoverable Files page lists the details of all the files on the receiver that were recently deleted Files can be selected from this list and recovered FileName Creation Time FF2o2580 T1D of14f2004 14 52 Recover Selected File s Restores the selected files on 77252582 T1D 9142004 16 09 77252590 T1D 9 14 2004 17 24 the receiver la pi File Management 2 a2 2 58 Active Files Recoverable Files Recover Selected File s R 240 Survey Menu Basic GPS The Survey Menu while running in GPS mode with the Basic GPS module contains the routines used for RTK data collection and post processing data collection The menu items are the same regardless of the type of data collection However some functions such as Control Points and Remote Elevation will only allow you to start when connected to an RTK receiver The Data Collection function will behave differently based on the receiver type that is active Page references are given for screens that are already described for the GPS module A GPS Status Start GPS Survey Data Collection Control Points Post Processing Projection Receiver Info T 2 Hagg File Management R 241 Survey Pro Reference Manual GPS Status The GPS Status screens are described starting on Page 168 Start GPS Survey The Start GPS Survey wizard is used to complete the set
322. om this screen Description is the description that will be given to all the points that are stored from this screen Start Location is the location for the first point which is the reference location used to compute the locations of the remaining points The default location is the POB defined from the Edit Alignment screen R 435 Survey Pro Reference Manual Trimble Slant HR gt HR Ra From any HR field Trimble Slant HR gt HR This option only applies when using a Trimble Traverse Kit that allows the measurement of a Slant HR instead of the usual HR When this option is selected it will convert a Slant HR entered in an HR field to a standard HR This must be performed each time a new Slant HR is entered in the HR field Consult the documentation that came with the Trimble Traverse Kit for more information on correctly measuring a Slant HR Convert Slant HI to HI Ra From any HI field Convert Slant HI to HI This option is only available when using a Trimble total station that supports a Slant HI instead of the usual HI such as a Trimble S6 When this option is selected it will convert a Slant HI entered in an HI field to a standard HI This must be performed each time a new Slant HI is entered in an HI field Consult the documentation that came with the Trimble Total Station from more information on correctly measuring a Slant HI R 436 Miscellaneous Screens Quick Pick Editor 3f Edit Quick Pick
323. oose a Centerline The Select Line screen is used to select a particular polyline or alignment that defines a centerline Separate overhead and side views are displayed for the selected polyline Simply select the desired line and tap amp HF Select Line at dx 12 42 Deserto yes Boun Polyline Fence Polyline Retain Alignment R 317 Survey Pro Reference Manual Stake DTM Screen Two Stake DTM The second Stake DTM screen displays all relevant Fig Stake DTM information for the current rod position and a graphic Data Result Centerine that shows the reference DTM surface and its corners 42 11 42 Once a shot is taken the rod location and the occupied 88 24 47 261 245 TIN triangle are displayed Data shows the angle and distance information from the alii previous shot C ns e EDM Inst EDM w Result shows the current northing easting and Data Result Centerline elevation of the rod as well as the computed elevation of N 5 193 472 DTM 106 154 the reference DTM at the current location and the cut or E 5 175 399 Fill 0 919 fill necessary to bring the elevation at the current ge ADLERS location to the elevation of the reference DTM at the current location Note If the DTM and Cut or Fill fields are blank after taking a shot it indicates the rod is outside the reference DTM boundary Centerline shows the current station and offset Data Result Centerine infor
324. op Date Time Settings The Date Time Settings card is used to set the date and time in the data collector Time displays the current time Eni Settings Date displays the current date mE TIIE Format Select Local to display your local time or UTC to Date 04 13 2010 display Coordinated Universal Time Format DUT Correction is the polar wandering correction SEU Sete cect Sec Set Date factor in seconds used to convert UTC to UT1 ME DD ae Ea E Set Time Note The date time and UTC are computed using HH MM 58 Operating System s Date and Time values Set Date will set the system date with the date that is Date Time Buttons d 4 entered Set Time will set the system time with the time entered Synchronize When pressed will zero the fractional portion of the current time and advance to the nearest second so that the time can be set more accurately R 52 Job Menu Buttons Settings The Buttons Settings card is used to customize the function for the physical buttons located on the data collector The upper half of the screen lists all of the customizable button s current assignments A particular button must be selected from this list prior to changing its settings from the lower half of the screen M Settings Goba Hal Button 1 Enter Button 2 Tab PE Button 3 lt Global gt Escape Assignment Within Survey Pra lt Global gt Global Assignment
325. opens the Bluetooth control panel application This separate application is used to scan for Bluetooth receivers and select devices to use with Survey Pro This button only shows when your Data Collector Port is set to Bluetooth Set Rx Comms sets the receiver with the communication parameters from this screen In order to use this function you first must know the correct communication parameters in Survey Pro This is usually accomplished by using the function Once you have established communication with the receiver you can choose new parameters and tap to change the settings on the receiver This button only shows when your Data Collector Port is set to COM1 or COM2 Rx Settings connects to the receiver using the selected communication parameters and opens the Rx Settings screen R 92 2 Rx Settings Brand Trimble Model Trimble 5800 at axe 2 34 Job Menu GPS Module Rx Settings or or Connect to Receiver Rx Settings or Connect to Receiver or The Rx Settings screen contains three cards to configure the receiver mode RTK correction type RTK data modem satellite tracking elevation cutoff as well as some settings specific for particular brands and models of receiver Receiver Settings The Receiver card is used to set the mode of the receiver the correction format for RTK receivers and the elevation cutoff for satellite tracking Brand displays the receiver manufacturer selected in the
326. or a particular job All the existing backups for the current job are listed in the main Backup Restore screen along with other information including the date the backup was created the number of files stored in the archive and if the archive includes a snapshot Archives that include a snapshot are shown with a amp icon while those without a R 26 2 Control Points Er af 2 58 Import Control Points Control points will be imported into the JOB file and records will be written to the RAVY data file External Control File Control points will be referenced fram the control file The points will not be Imported into the JOB file or written to the Raw data file External Control File Clear Browse Eni Backup Restore Se TOSbackup 4 12 2001 6 18 pm ETDS 4 12 2001 6 19 pm cx IDS Backup O Restore Delete Archive Close Settings gt File Menu snapshot have a icon A new empty archive has a icon All of the backups for a particular job are physically stored to a single compressed file located in the J obs directory on the data collector This file will have the same filename as the current job only the Backup extension is appended to the name For example the backups for a job with a filename of Smith J ob will be stored in a file called Smith ob Backup Enl New Archive Enter a description for this new archive Po New Archive opens the New Archive screen wh
327. or gt opens the manual entry screens in Localization Calculator mode This interface only available when using Ground TDS Localization horizontal mode is used as one technique to do one point setups on new jobs Solve gt computes the localization parameters using the least squares solution with the selected control points then opens the Residuals screen R 206 Survey Menu GPS Module Solve Localization Residuals The Solve Localization Residuals screen is used to display the residuals from the least squares solution and to change your control point selections and re solve the adjustment if desired Solutions The box for horizontal and vertical solution will display the root mean squared results If the Solutions 5 solution is from a least squares calculation with LSQ H Residuals RMS N 0 008 residuals the RMS values are from the residuals of each RMS E 0 008 l l ae l LSD V Residuals point used in the calculation If the solution is unique RMS Vv 0 009 minimum number of control points or fixed horizontal RMS 3D 0 014 scale the RMS values are from the misclosures of each a ENTE AE point aR aL point not used in the calculation RMS 3D displays the 3D RMS calculated from the AJIG26 Yes Yes 0 004 0 001 ORIOA Yes Yes D 00r noos Sauare root of the horizontal RMS squared plus the GR1951 Yes Yes 0 012 0 014 vertical RMS squared Yes Yes 0 009 0 007 van Solve Localiz
328. or the staked point Results Current Location displays either the directions to the closest point on the line or the current local coordinate LEFT of Line RIGHT of Line ON LINE displays the position of the rover with respect to the line Left and right are relative to north ON LINE is displayed when you are within the Horizontal Distance Tolerance specified in the Stakeout Settings screen Page R 45 Offset Dist displays the perpendicular offset distance from the line to the rover Station displays the station on the line associated with the offset location It is relative to the Start Point defined in the first screen gt NEZ toggles the display between Results and Current Location Store prompts you for a point name and description and stores a point for the current location R 334 2 Slope Staking Solution Fixed ov OF HRMS 0 01 Right CUT Slope Obs Slope Des Slope 3 000 HO to HP 0 965 Cut to HP 0 040 H to CL 1 335 Cut to CL 0 380 bY Map t Automatic Slope Stakeout Menu GPS amp Basic GPS Module Slope Staking The Slope Staking screen is used to locate the catch points for a roadway in any terrain The first screens of this routine are similar to the conventional method except that the and buttons are replaced with a Setup HRI button to configure rover antenna and the backsight information is replaced with rover antenna height information See Page R 288 fo
329. orizontal angle that the total aes at a station must aim toward so that it is facing the current 2 000 station doh elt n i i ZE to Rod Horz Dist is the horizontal distance from the occupy 90 00 00 point to the current station OCC 53 HI 5 000 BS 90 00 00 Vert Dist is the vertical distance from the occupy point Circle zero to the current station Close Settings ZE to Rod is the zenith angle that the total station must aim toward so that it is facing the current station Circle Zero is used to modify the circle on the total station so that the angle right reading will be zero when it is facing toward the design point which can sometimes be easier than turning to an obscure angle value When this button is tapped the following actions will occur 1 Anew backsight circle value is computed sent to the instrument and stored in the raw data 2 The Angle Right value is changed to zero to reflect the change The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the design point 3 To prevent errors the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog if this button has been used A circle zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked Note The Ci rcle Zero button is not available when using a robotic total station R 308 Stakeout Menu lt Back returns to the previous screen Stake gt accesses the next screen which is id
330. orizontal distance Note This routine only works when used with a robotic total station in remote control mode Foresight is the point name that will be used when storing the first new point Each successive point name will automatically be incremented by the next available point number Description is the description that will be assigned to all the points that are stored from this routine Time When this radio button is selected a point will automatically be stored after each time specified in the corresponding field passes Enl Auto Collect C Collect by O Time Every SEC Distance Every OCC 1 HI 6 000 BS 90 00 00 o Foresight Description Height of Rod Backsight Close Settings E Distance When this radio button is selected a point will automatically be stored each time the prism is moved from the last stored point by the horizontal distance specified in the corresponding field Note The accuracy that a point will be stored when auto collecting by Distance will vary depending on how frequently the total station measures a distance and how fast the prism is traveling Backsight accesses the Backsight Setup screen Page R 114 Next gt accesses the next screen is a shortcut to the Surveying Settings screen Page R 44 R 132 Survey Menu Auto Collect Screen Two The second Auto Collect screen displays information related to the points that hav
331. orizontal distance the rod must move toward or away from the hinge point before it is over the catch point Note The computed horizontal distance is based on the observed terrain computed from the last two shots If only one shot has been taken this value will be blank R 296 Stakeout Menu EDM This button can be toggled to shoot in various EDM modes The options available depend on the total station being used Consult the total station s documentation for more information on the EDM modes that it supports Results This will open the Slope Staking Results screen listing detailed Slope Staking Design information for the current setup and last Observed shot Slope from a Point Start Point 2 See ean Ga Note The button is only available from the Store Elevation 100 000 Catch Point screen when using GPS or Remote mode ape recton Se Doaa which is accessed after tapping Store gt Catch Point OF From Slope Dir 0 122 Actual Direction 31 27 2s The button described below selects which information is Hinge Point displayed in the screen from the following options HD gt Vertical Map displays a cross sectional view at the current station Note When you tap a map view an expanded view of the same map will fill the screen Note The Vertical Map will show an X at the location of each previous shot This can be useful in determining if the current terrain will never intersect the slope no
332. orrespond to the existing points in a selected line or point range M Sta Intervals When checked computes offset points from the beginning of the selected line or point range and at each specified station interval along the line or point range Description is the description that will be assigned to all points that are stored R 356 COGO Menu Solve computes the offset points and stores them if the Store Pts checkbox is checked Station Offset The Station Offset screen will compute and optionally store a point at a specified station and offset to an existing polyline or alignment The elevation for the stored point will always be set to the elevation of the first node of the polyline or alignment HF Station Offset er x 11 11 Start Station O 00 0 Station 0 50 0 oft ok o w Store Pts DFA From Solve Input Results fx man oO 7 i l Start Station is the station for the first node of the selected line Station is the station on the line where you want to compute an offset point from Offset is the offset distance that is to the left when L is selected or right when R is selected from the selected line M Store Pts When checked will store the computed offset point with the name specified in the corresponding field Tap Line opens a window where any polyline or alignment in the current job can be selected To From opens a window where a
333. ort or use Directory displays the directory where the current job will be stored J ob Name is where the name of the new job is entered The default name is the current date Browse allows you to select a different directory where to store the new job Use or mport a Control File When checked you can select an external control file or import the points from a different job as control points Next gt opens the next screen The screen that opens depends on if a control file will be used Note Pressing may result in a warning if you have chosen a folder in the data collector s RAM instead of a location on an external CF card See Page 54 for more information amp Cancel cancels the creation of a new job and brings you back to the main menu R 9 Survey Pro Reference Manual Create a New Job 2 Imported or External Control File This screen will only open next when a control file will be used or imported PF Create a New Job gi aff 3 11 PF Create a New Job gv af 3 12 w Import Control Points 0 Import Control Points 0 Use External Control File a Use External Control File Control points will be imported Control points will be into the JOB file and records referenced from the control will be written to the RAY file data file The points will not be imported into the JDB file or written to the RAW data file Browse I mport Control Points When selected the points in the
334. ose Settings R 310 Stakeout Menu Show Station Screen Two The second Show Station screen is used to take a shot to the prism and view the data Height of Rod is the length of the rod E Show Station and Offset Height of Rod EDM This button can be toggled to shoot in various EDM modes The options available depend on the total Coarse EDM station being used Consult the total station s Fast shot documentation for more information on the EDM modes am that it supports 2 13 022 Offset Dist Shot Data 70 688 Angle Right Flew ET 300 00 00 Tra Offset Dist displays the perpendicular offset from the Zenith Offset centerline to the rod position 90 00 00 Left slope Dist Segment Elev displays the elevation at the rod position 255 000 Spiral Offset displays if the rod position is to the right of the lt Back Store line left of the line or on the line Close Settings Station displays the station at the rod position Segment displays the name of the template s segment at the rod position Shot Data displays the angles and distance measured by the total station from the last shot Shot takes a shot to the prism lt Back returns to the previous screen Store stores the stake point R 311 Survey Pro Reference Manual Store Offset Points Store Offset Points The Store Offset Points screen is used to store points in the current job at a specified
335. ost processing will start This will be a stop and go data file and the site ID and antenna measurement will be recorded in the file with each point occupation at the rover The rover receiver will monitor the data link until the base reference position arrives then Survey Pro will check the point database for a matching point If you are using a remote base Survey Pro will find a matching point or prompt you to store a new point If you are using R 185 Survey Pro Reference Manual the base station you have already set with this data collector then this check serves as error detection Solve Localization The Solve Localization screen is used to indicate when a horizontal and vertical localization adjustment is required and to guide you through the steps to collect control points and solve the adjustment Collect Control gt opens the Control Points screen where 25 eqSrt yr you can choose local points to use as GPS control points Collect Control Points and occupy them with the GPS rover Occupy known local points these points can be used to solve the Solve Localization displays information about the eee Collect Control gt current number of GPS control points and how many 2 6 Solve Localization more are needed to have the minimum number required acer yao a ere ee eae to solve the localization vertical points to solve the localization Solve Localization opens the Solve Localization wizard Pe Solve L
336. ou agree to exercise reasonable efforts to protect LICENSOR S proprietary interest in the Program and Documentation and maintain them in strict confidence USER RESTRICTIONS You may physically transfer some Programs from one computer to another provided that the Program is operated only on one computer Other Programs will operate only with the computer that has the same security code and cannot be physically transferred to another computer You may not electronically transfer the Program or operate it in a time sharing or service bureau operation You agree not to translate modify adapt disassemble de compile or reverse engineer the Program or create derivative works based on the Program or Documentation or any portions thereof TRANSFER The Program is provided for use in your internal commercial business operations and must remain at all times upon a single computer owned or leased by you You may not rent lease sublicense sell assign pledge transfer or otherwise dispose of the Program or Documentation on a temporary or permanent basis without the prior written consent of LICENSOR TERMINATION This License is effective until terminated This License will terminate automatically without notice from LICENSOR if you fail to comply with any provision of this License Upon termination you must cease all use of the Program and Documentation and return them and any copies thereof to LICENSOR GENERAL This License shall be governed by and co
337. ovides the distance and direction information to the current station to be staked from the occupy point Screen Four is used to stake the current station Stake Out Point Store Tape Screen The Stake Out Point Store Tape screen allows you to E store a point at a specified offset from the stake point a Paint Fs Im resulting in a point that is either closer to or further Description away from the total station Point will be stored at an offset along Point is the name assigned to the new offset point the gun target line Tape Out Tape In Description is the description assigned to the new offset point Tape Out Tape In is the specified offset from the stake point A positive value will result in a new point that is further away from the total station The default value is the appropriate distance correction to the design point stores the new offset point R 305 Survey Pro Reference Manual Stake Spiral and Offset The Stake Spiral and Offset screen allows you to stake stations at fixed intervals on a spiral curve or at an offset to it Start Point is the point associated with the beginning of PAEA AAEE the spiral curve This can either be the TS or the CS which is specified later in this screen see below Define a Spiral Start Point E Tangent Azm Tangent Bearing f defines the tangent Pitengent am 100165616 azimuth or bearing at the entrance to the spiral ais m di
338. p projection is selected and you set up over a new location the specified scale factor is compared to the scale factor defined for your current location in the mapping plane If the scale factor is different you will be prompted to use the new scale factor Stakeout Settings The Stakeout Settings card contains the setting that control how stakeout is performed The settings available depend on if you are running in conventional or GPS mode M Stake Corners Not J ust Even Intervals When staking by stations locations where a line segment ane e an Even Int changes such as from a straight section to a curve will JKE OISECTOr OF NMWOM Tangent or ee also be staked when this is checked e Always Start Stakeout With Coarse use Manual Updating Remote Cont J Stake Bisector of Non tangent Corners When _ Design Elevation from Offset Segre iki staking an offset to a centerline that contains a corner Horz Distance Tolerance Line Distance Tolerance Turn Gun to Design Point this option when checked will stake the corner point where the two offsets intersect M Always Start Stakeout With Coarse Mode When 1mm checked the EDM mode toggle button found in all Cut Sheet Offset Stored Design Offset stakeout screens will initially be set to coarse mode fast shot This instructs the total station to measure Fies Surveying stakeout Repet gt distances faster but with slightly less ac
339. passed the decimal point for elevations Stations 124 34 125 kd Sq feet meters allows you to display from zero to four Ee EE places passed the decimal point for square feet or square meter values Sq Feet Meters 1 234 123 Acres Hectares 1 234 123 Acres Hectares allows you to display from zero to four places passed the decimal point for acre or hectare values Distances allows you to display from zero to six places Units Format Files d gt passed the decimal point for distances Angles allows you to include from zero to four fractional seconds with angle values Stations allows you to display stations in any of the following formats R 42 Job Menu e 12 434 123 displays stations where the number to the left of the advances after traveling 100 feet or meters e 1 234 123 displays stations where the number to the left of the advances after traveling 1 000 feet or meters e 1 234 123 displays standard distances rather than stations Files Settings Settings an ax 12 32 Description File _ This File Uses Codes Browse Clear Feature Code File Browse Clear Files ga gt oo 2 Eaj Description File allows you to select a description file to use with the current job M This file uses codes check this box if the description file contains codes and associated descriptions Leave the box unchecked if the description only contains descriptions n
340. pe based on the current rover position If the rover is above the hinge point a cut slope is computed If the rover is below the hinge point a fill slope is computed e gt Force CUT Slope forces all computations to be based on a cut slope e gt Force FILL Slope forces all computations to be based on a fill slope The second button selects which information is displayed in the lower corner of the screen from the following options e gt V Map displays a cross sectional view at the current station Note When you tap a map view an expanded view of the same map will fill the screen Note The Vertical Map will show an X at the location of each previous shot This can be useful in determining if the current terrain will never intersect the slope no catch point gt H Map displays an overhead view of the job e gt N E Z displays the coordinates computed from the last shot Occupy switches the receiver dynamics to static depending on settings and opens the Occupy Data Points screen Page R 191 where data can be collected for the current point Topo SS allows you to store a side shot measurement during stake out This button opens a prompt for the side shot point name and opens the GPS Occupy Data Points screen After you store the new point or cancel you will resume with the Slope Staking screen Results displays the results computed from the last Shot R 336 Stakeout
341. pecified it is automatically assumed that the first point of the traverse will be the closing location e Location allows you to enter coordinates to define the closing location o North is the Y coordinate for the closing location o East is the X coordinate for the closing location o Elev is the elevation for the closing location o gt Point allows you to select an existing point to define the closing location o Point is the name of the existing point at the closing location Next opens the next screen of the adjustment wizard R 430 t Dreyjew Adjustment Settings Angle Adjust Compass Rule Angle Adjust Original Error dist Error azm Precision Angular error Change per angle Closing angle Length Perimeter Adjusted Error distance Error azimuth Precision Length Perimeter Compass Rule Closing to Known Location Location M Location E Location Z Original Error distance Error azimuth Precision Length Perimeter Adjusted Error distance Error azimuth Precision Length Perirmeter Point Details Traverse First point is fixed Traverse Original N Original E Original 2 Adjusted M Adjusted E Adjusted Z Change N Change E Change 2 Linear change Traverse Adjust Menu Traverse Adjust Results 0 495 126928 02 1 5609 379751 05 81 4912 20 65 261 30 00 325 484 3233 976 333 416 622s 21 1 9 3 255 484 3 588 900 a 743 847 3 066 043 230
342. per elevation can either hinge at the outer edge of the first segment or at the centerline Hinging at the center results in the elevation of the outer segments to change Hinging at the edge results in the elevation of the centerline changing Because of this Survey Pro will only allow you to hinge on edge for one side of a road If the other side is also super elevated you will be forced to hinge that side at the center so that an abrupt change in elevation does not occur at the centerline Es Edit Road Add When a super elevation or lt End gt is selected add at A A from the Lor R columns in the Super Elevations card this button opens the Add Super Elevation screen which m satan 250d oo TEK allows you to add a super elevation to the same side of 2 00 000 2 25 0 E the road that was selected Widenings and super elevations are always sorted in this list by their specified start stations Edit allows you to edit the selected super elevation in IQ the Edit Super Elevation screen which is identical to the lt a Add Super Elevation screen RQ Remove removes the selected super elevation from the list Widenings Super Elevations gt Cancel Check checks the road for errors and displays the results in the Roads Report screen described on Page R 399 Ea 200 eS R 406 Enl Add L Super Elevation Start Station 10 pend Station fis25 e gt End Station is the length
343. performing a traverse shot you Turmto Lock will return to the Traverse Sideshot screen when the EDM IR Tracking Stop shot is completed e FS o 89 14 39 5 000 Aim opens the Aim screen described on Page R 163 o 23 169 5 000 Foresight Displays the computed coordinates for the ed 167 019 720 03206 oo 4 987 939 current foresight 100 306 Results Map Aim amp Tow E R 124 E Repetition Shots o Foresight Survey Menu Repetition Shots The Repetition Shots screen is used to perform side shots or traverse shots using any number of repetitions Note The sequence that the repetition shots are performed is selected in the Repetition Settings screen Page R 51 Foresight is the name of the point that will be stored qn PERAE Number of Sets is the desired number of sets to shoot ly to the backsight and foresight Number of Sets bor BF Average fot acksight Note One set is equivalent to two shots to the backsight Worst Residual and foresight point HR is the rod height opens the Smart Target options Page R 444 CC 1 HE 5 20 BS 42 359 59 55 Average of shows the average angle or distance to the Input Results foresight from all the shots taken The value in parenthesis is the total number of repetitions performed Worst Residual displays the worst residual calculated from all the sets of the selected measurement
344. phone Settings r7 2 9 70 el Cellphone Settings r7 2 9 14 Use Advanced Settings Number to Dial Auto Answer Command Po aeu Hang Wp PO Dial Command Base Rover Base Rover Cell Phone Settings Base Card Cell Phone Settings Rover Card Use Advanced Settings Base Card When checked allows you to specify alternate Hayes AT auto answer command If unchecked the default AT auto answer command of ate0s0 1 is used Auto Answer Command is the alternate Hayes AT command to use for auto answering Number to Dial is where you enter the telephone number of the RTK base receiver s cell phone Use Advanced Settings Rover Card When checked allows you to specify alternate Hayes AT commands to hang up and dial If unchecked the default AT command to hang up of athO and the default AT command to dial of ateOdt followed by the Number to Dial will be used Hang Up is the alternate Hayes AT command to use for hanging up Dial Command is the alternate Hayes AT command to use for dialing R 98 Pa IP Modem IP Address of Base Port Socket of Base Use Advanced Settings Connect Command Disconnect Command Job Menu GPS Module IP Modem Settings Screen The IP Modem Settings screen is used to create or modify an IP modem configuration You can only configure in IP modem when RTK Rover is selected for the receiver IP Address of Base is the IP address of the base Port Socket of Base i
345. r if the first base is far away more ee than 10km or it is considerably higher or lower 200m you may wish to enter the parameters of the intermediate mapping plane Solve Localization opens the Solve Localization wizard Page R 205 where control points can be selected and the horizontal and vertical localization are solved Switch to Mapping Plane switches the horizontal projection mode from Ground TDS Localization to Mapping Plane Page R 213 R 202 Survey Menu GPS Module Projection Details Save System To Database f will save the current projection record to a coordinate system database file pam Projection Det 2 an 12 43 oe eee First the current database file is checked for a matching TDS Localization ZoneGroup i cite record and if found you will be prompted that you need Vegas Ground not save the current coordinate system If no matching Projection Parameters record is found then the current coordinate system will be saved as a new record If a different record with the gt Horizontal Adjustment same name is found you will be prompted to rename the Origin Morth 102 621 45 Origin East 100 312 5 shift North 44 075 7 n 95 083 Localization Set Zone Survey Projection The Localization Set Zone screen is used to manually configure the parameters of the localization reference stereographic projection It is also used to select the geoid model to use wit
346. r Set 3 and so on Take Shot takes the shot indicated within the box on this screen Leveling Shot Results The Shot Results screen opens when you are finished taking the shot necessary shots for a particular BS Point 1 observation Average of Worst Residual pone W Dist 1 7043 Toss will delete the shot data from the corresponding H Dist 9 985 3 set of shots that has the worst residual Each j ern consecutive tap of this button will delete the next shot ier te hws are with the worst residual until all the sets are eventually el Le cilia Average of Worst Residual Bs allows you to shoot additional shots to the se en oe backsight You will be prompted to shoot the number of sets specified in the Level Settings screen Resulting FS Elev 100 252 m oA Store Observation FS allows you to shoot additional shots to the foresight You will be prompted to shoot the number of sets specified in the Level Settings screen R 260 Leveling Menu All allows you to shoot additional shots to the backsight and foresight You will be prompted to shoot the number of sets in the shooting sequence specified in the Level Settings screen Store Observation records the observation and returns you to the Level screen where you can specify which type of observation to shoot next Leveling Side Shot Level Sideshot gt The Leveling Sideshot screen is used to describe a leveling si
347. r add geodetic locations to all points The plane coordinate of all points will be used to calculate geodetic coordinates using the latest projection Points that have geodetic coordinates will be updated points that did not have geodetic coordinates will be set with the latitude longitude and height calculated from the transformation Adjust with Projection Select Source Coordinate system The Adjust with Projection Select Source Coordinate System screen is used to select the coordinate system of the current job file points When the adjustment mode is Readjust with Current Projection this screen shows the current coordinate system record details This screen only shows when the wizard is opened from the menu Group US State Plane 1983 HF Adjust With Projectio 7 x QO Source Projection Record O Database Zone O Database Site Current Projection The Select Source Coordinate System screen is almost zone Oregon North 3601 identical to the Select Coordinate System screen described in the mapping plane section Page R 204 Datum NAD 1983 Conus The following controls are special to the Adjust with Projection wizard Geoid GEOID99 Conus Source Projection Record is where you select what type of aaa system record to choose for the source You o gt E R 232 Survey Menu GPS Module e Database Zone will display controls to pick a map projection from the zone groups and zones in the database
348. r details Once the centerline of the road is selected and the road profile is defined the fourth Slope Staking screen is used to locate the stake point at the current station Slope Staking Screen Four The graphic portion of the Horizontal Map and Vertical Map is updated continuously This allows the user at the rover position to watch the movement of the rover in relation to the slope and easily position the rod over the catch point Note You can tap in the graphic portion of the screen to VRMS 0 01 open the graphic in a larger window Above DS eaves i Although the graphic portion of the screen is i 44 continuously updated the numeric values are not Ahead sta updated until the button is tapped The correct procedure for slope staking in GPS mode is to use the graphic portion of the screen to locate the catch point as eee shot 7 closely as possible and press Shot Once the position is oa satisfactory you can determine if the rover needs to be Te Oo im F onal moved again j GPS Status displays the current solution type the number of satellites used and the horizontal and vertical R 335 Survey Pro Reference Manual precision computed by the receiver Tap on this button to open the detailed GPS Status screen Page R 168 The first button selects the type of slope that will be used between the catch point and hinge point from the following options e gt Automatic Slope selects the slo
349. r receiver is not detected it is automatically configured to use a serial connection Note This wizard will only detect EPOCH 25 Bluetooth receivers and specified Bluetooth dongles when used with supported data collectors with built in Bluetooth running Windows Mobile 5 See the Radio Settings screen on Page 109 if configuring a Bluetooth cellular phone for use as a data modem for Internet base corrections R 108 Job Menu Basic GPS Module Radio Settings Settings Settings E gt af 7 31 S Settings GO gt Wf 1213 Base Rover Radio RTK O Base Rower Radio RTK O Internet Single Base NTRIP RTK Internet Single Base NTRIP RTK Dial Lip Connection O Use CMR Station es Manage Connections Index IP Address of Base Port Socket of Base The Radio Settings card is used to configure the base radio when using a local base radio configuration or configure a cellular phone as a data modem for Internet base corrections The choice made from the upper radio buttons determines the remaining options on the screen Base Rover Radio RTK should be selected when using a local base receiver radio configuration e Use CMR Station Index should be checked in situations where more than one base is in range of the rover allowing it to distinguish one from the other Enter a unique value from 0 31 in the corresponding field e Change Radio Settings opens the Change Radio Settings screen described below
350. r the United States GHAQO is the Greenwich Hour Angle of the sun at zero hour Universal Time Greenwich on the current date DeclO is the declination of the sun at zero hour on the current date GHA24 is the Greenwich Hour Angle of the sun at zero hour Universal Time Greenwich on the following day 24 hours later DeclI24 is the declination of the sun at zero hour on the following day Solar Semi Diameter is the semi diameter of the sun expressed in minutes and seconds i is a shortcut to the Date Time Settings screen Page R 52 R 153 Survey Pro Reference Manual Shots Number of sets is the number of sets that will be taken IARTA terri to the celestial object Number of Sets Reverse Shots M When checked reverse shots will be Reverse Shots required with each set When unchecked only direct shots are required BD D1 359 10 23 07 12 25 Shoot accesses the Enter Shot Data screen described be 353 10 27 07 13 07 below where the shot data is entered for the selected observation incl will toggle the selected observation so that it will be hidden or un hidden respectively When an observation is hidden it will not be used when calculating the final azimuth ES Settings Close Note The buttons perform the same function as checking unchecking the checkbox in front of each observation D3 353 O9 S2 OF 13 39 i BR Note A backsight observation
351. ration at the backsight Send Circle This will send the circle entered in the BS Circle field to the instrument Read Circle Will read the current horizontal angle from the instrument and set that as the backsight circle Non zero backsight circle values are typically used only when surveying in true azimuths Check Backsight Once the backsight has been checked by distance or angle the symbol will be replaced with a By Distance will take a shot to a prism located over the backsight point and compare the measured distance with the computed distance between the occupy and backsight points stored in the current job Note Checking the backsight by shooting a distance does not apply if the backsight is defined by a direction R 116 Survey Menu By Angle When the backsight is defined by a direction this routine will read the current horizontal angle from the total station and compare that to the backsight direction Check Backsight Check The Check Backsight screen is used to help confirm that the total station is facing toward the correct backsight by comparing the known distance or horizontal angle to the backsight with the measured value This routine can also be performed from the Backsight Solved screen E Check Backsight Occupy Backsight Zenith Slope Dist HD Error D Error Angle Error Angle Right Azimuth BS Circle BS Azimuth By Distance 1 2 90 00 71
352. receiver is in dynamic mode and will calculate your position as you move to the point When OCCUPYING the receiver is switched to static mode depending on settings and will calculate the most precise position for the staked point Topo SS allows you to store a side shot measurement during stake out Accept opens the third and final Stake Points screen where the current stake point can be staked and optionally stored When post processing and in Occupying mode this button will be labeled Store and will signal the end of the occupation and store the point Stake to Line Stake to Line The Stake to Line screen allows you to locate points on a continuous predefined line Direction information is provided to locate the line by traveling the shortest possible distance a perpendicular offset to the line between the rover and the line The first screen of this routine is similar to the conventional method except that the button is replaced with a Setup HRI button R 332 Stakeout Menu GPS amp Basic GPS Module to configure rover antenna and the backsight information is replaced with rover antenna height information See Page R 277 for details Stake to Line Screen Two The second screen is where measurements take place and the staking directions are displayed The graphic Solution Fixed Se eee conan and display direct you to points on line via the shortest route a perpendicular offset from the
353. recision Errors dN 0 014 dE 0 0231 dE 0 005 Measuring Accept GPS Status Note Ifthe Errors are larger than the measurement precision of the instrument you probably have a problem with your projection solution Session Time displays the total occupation time so far for this measurement Count Status displays Measuring when you have current coordinates from the receiver and the screen is updating with the latest measurement If you are using Epoch Averaging Averaging is displayed after you tap Accepti while the number of epochs is averaged in Survey Pro Suspended is displayed if you are not receiving valid data from the receiver GPS Status opens the GPS Status screen Page R 168 Accept writes the results to raw data and returns you to the Control Points screen R 193 Survey Pro Reference Manual Occupy Control Point Screen Control or Data Collection Control The Occupy Control Point screen is used to add geodetic coordinates to a known project point The most common use of this screen is to measure control points for the localization solution This screen is also used by the Localization Calculator routine Page R 209 for one point localization setup Geodetic Coordinates Lat 449 33 07 55713 N Lng 123 16 08 89800 W Ht 45 895 Solution Quality Solution Fixed Num SV Fj H Predsion 0 015 V Precsion 0 020 Control Point Use this point for Horizontal Vertical Geod
354. rence Manual detail starting on Page R 202 and Mapping Plane mode on Page R 213 Projection TDS Localization Mode The Projection screen is described below for when the horizontal projection mode is set to TDS Localization Use this setting when you want ground level coordinates and there is no projection and no datum to define a geodetic coordinate transformation In this mode a default map projection is created with your first RTK base setup You collect GPS measurement on points with known local coordinates and solve a Localization adjustment The Localization adjustment will translate rotate and scale the default map projection s y x into your local coordinates N E Show Details opens the Projection Details screen Ea projection 3 ef d 12 41 where the complete details of the localization solution Ground TDS Localization reference map projection and Geoid model are displayed latton Solved Reset Origin opens the Localization Set Zone screen Ground distances ath 619 m Page R 203 where you can enter the parameters of the Vertical Localization intermediate mapping plane to be used for the localization adjustment Reset Origin Note This step is usually not necessary since the intermediate mapping plane is automatically set up by Switch to using a mapping plane from the coordinate system database default using the location of the first RTK base setup in this job Howeve
355. rent Rod Location Direction to Gun Remote Toposs _Done On Display when the prism is within the Horizontal Distance Tolerance specified in the Stakeout Settings screen Page R 45 Stakeout Menu Stake List of Points Screen The Stake List of Points screen is used to stake points from a specified list of points Points can also be selected by description or polyline Stake List of Points To From opens a window where a range of points can ae be defined The points within the specified range can cela then be staked E PT2 Tap Points displays a map of the current job Simply Design Point 605 tap the points that you want to stake and then tap amp Allows you to select points using a variety of other ees methods including select all points all control points all non control points by description or by polyline Height of Rod Design Point displays the point to be staked The OCC 1 HE 5 000 BS 0 00 00 initial Design Point is the first point of the selected olyline or point range dm adi Change Design Point opens the Edit Point List screen where the current point list can be edited Increment is the number of points to advance from the Design Point after tapping Next Point gt A negative integer can be entered to have point numbers advance in descending order Next Point gt Advances the Design Point by the Increment and automatically solves to open the Stake L
356. rent job R 17 Survey Pro Reference Manual Import CR5 Coordinates When importing a CR5 file you will first be prompted to Paea a et dx 9 54 select the layer where you want the new data stored Importing Select a layer and tap amp to continue ae In the next screen select the distance units that the eee ee een ern rp coordinates were stored in and tap amp CRS File O Meters Import GPS Coordinates Feet O US Survey Feet When importing a GPS file you will first be prompted to select the layer where you want the new data stored Select a layer and tap amp to continue In the next screen select the distance units that the coordinates were stored in and tap amp When importing coordinates from both a TDS CR5 and GPS file from the same job the GPS coordinate will be linked to the coordinates in the CR5 file For more information on this refer to the GPS User s Guide Import gi TXT Coordinates 2 Ascii Import Wizard 7 x 9 55 l N Please give the delimiter unit Since the coordinates in an ASCII TXT file can be I and coordinate type of the imported file stored in a variety of formats two screens are used to define the format of the file that is being imported once a a an e layer is selected The source TXT file can contain D either plane coordinates or geodetic coordinates 2 nits Delimiters is the character that separates each column Meters _ Feet of text in the ASCII file
357. rover to the line 5 Hz Mode Results Azimuth 345 00 00 Distance 98 469 R The graphic display will change depending on how close you are to the specified line The chart below illustrates ea each screen type Offset Dist 96 469 Station 1 76 456 O im x E Rover is greater than Rover is between 0 3 Rover is within 0 3m Rover is on the line 3 m 10 ft from the and 3 m 1 and 10 ft 1 ft of the line or within the line from the line Horizontal Distance Tolerance specified in the Stakeout Settings screen Note Tap the graphic portion of the screen for an expanded view GPS Status displays the current solution type the number of satellites used and the horizontal and vertical precision computed by the receiver If this area of the screen is tapped the epoch count stops and the GPS Status screen opens Page R 168 R 333 Survey Pro Reference Manual Go SOUTH NORTH displays the distance the rover must move ina south or north direction to reach the closest point on the line Go EAST WEST displays the distance the rover must move in an east or west direction to reach the closest point on the line ROVING switches from ROVING to OCCUPYING mode When ROVING the receiver is in dynamic mode and will calculate your position as you move to the point When OCCUPYING the receiver is switched to static mode depending on settings and will calculate the most precise position f
358. rs is also displayed Offset When checked allows you to specify an offset distance to stake as opposed to staking the actual node locations Note A positive value offset is applied at the specified distance from each node away from the centerline A negative value offset is applied at the specified distance from each node toward the centerline Note If an offset occurs past the edge of the road no vertical or cut fill information will be computed for that point Subgrade When checked allows you to specify a vertical offset from the actual node locations Positive values result in the stake location R 410 Stake Road Station 0 00 000 Line Segment Roadbed Right Roads Menu occurring below the selected node Negative values result in the stake location occurring above the selected node Backsight accesses the Backsight Setup screen Page R 114 lt Back returns to the previous screen Next gt takes you to the next Stake Road screen where the direction and distance information to the stake point is displayed Stake Road Screen Three The third Stake Road screen displays distance direction and other information about the point to be staked Station displays the station where the stake point occurs and the type of line segment it falls on in the alignment Segment displays the name of the segment tangent to From Gun to Design Point the point to be staked if the point is on the L
359. rt routine Answering No to this prompt will return you to R 397 Survey Pro Reference Manual the Add Edit Roads screen without making any changes Delete alignment a ignment name Answering Yes to this prompt will delete the selected alignment s from the current job so they are no longer displayed in the Edit Alignments screen In this case the alignment can be re associated with the routine from the definition in the RD5 file Answering No to this prompt will open the next prompt without deleting the selected alignment s from the current job Delete Roadname RDS5 file Answering Yes to this prompt will permanently delete the selected alignments and road RD5 files from the data collector Import Opens the Import Road screen where an existing road RD5 file can be added to the current job This is useful to copy road files that were transferred to the data collector from a PC and to add roads that were stored in a directory other than the current directory New Road Screen Edit Road or The New Road screen is identical to the Edit Road screen and is used to assemble the parts of a road or edit an existing road This screen consists of five separate index card style tabs Each tab accesses a different card that is used to define a particular part of the road R 398 Roads Menu The Road Card Roads Edit Roads New or Edit Road The Road card of the New Road screen is used to select the a
360. s allows you to select points by tapping them from a map view To From allows you to select points by typing in a point range M Translate by Coordinates When checked all of the selected points will be adjusted in the same direction and distance as between a specified From point or location and a To point or location When unchecked the selected points will be adjusted by the specified direction and distance The choice made here determines the options available below Note The choice made above determines which fields will be available below Azimuth gt Bearing is the direction to move the selected points Horizontal Distance is the horizontal distance that the selected points are moved Vertical Distance is the vertical distance that the selected points are moved From is where the first point or location is defined that is used to compute the direction and distance that the selected points are adjusted To is where the last point or location is defined that is used to compute the direction and distance that the selected points are adjusted R 425 Survey Pro Reference Manual Location allows you to enter either a point name or location coordinates Solve adjusts the selected points in the same direction or distance as defined from the From point to the To point or by the direction and distance entered Rotate Rotate The Rotate screen will rotate selected point
361. s The Receiver Settings card is used to select and activate GPS receivers as well as modify or create a receiver s settings parameters The upper portion of the first Receiver Settings screen settings ef 46115 lists the names of all the receiver profiles on the data collector The other columns list the COM Port Brand and Model of the receiver defined in each profile Trimble 5800 Bluetooth Trimble Demo Mode is a special profile that cannot be deleted or edited When activated Survey Pro is put into Demo Mode which can be used to simulate GPS measurements This mode is used for training and demonstration Receiver Create New purposes Settings Receiver Receiver Settings opens the Receiver Setup screen where you can set the parameters for communication from data collector to receiver as well as access the Rx Settings screens where you can configure the receiver settings R 90 Job Menu GPS Module Create New Receiver opens the Receiver Setup screen where you can set the parameters for communication from data collector to receiver as well as access the Rx Settings screens where you can configure the receiver settings When you tap OK the new receiver is added to your list of known receiver Activate makes the selected receiver the currently active receiver in Survey Pro Delete Deletes the selected receiver profile from the list of known receivers Import imports an receiver profile
362. s E A wanna 225 Receiver Information essssssssssssssssesssennnnnnnnnrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrnns 230 Adjust with Projection sesssessessssressrnsennnsrrnsnnnsennnsrensrnnenrens 231 Projection Cacucci a 236 iv Traverse SideShot cccccccccsssssecccccccessseccececsaeseeeesceaaaseeeess 120 File Management esccesssecssssessseeessseenssneesseeeesseneeesseeeesneess 239 Survey Menu Basic GPS ssssssn 1 241 GPSS S aaan 242 Start GPS SUVO naaa a 242 Daa CONCCHOM anana a a 249 Control POM AUS seseics visio sieved ats ate Wieelieiaieha tied este daw 251 POSEIP KOGSSSINIG sesvaivisharscnccanaiaic N 252 POSCO enn aa a a 252 Receiver Information ssssssssssssssssssssssensnnnnnnrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrnns 253 File Management sisesassncsaianaiacersnnnsiatanasaveaanavarsnasaniwenmeiadania 253 Leveling Men sor i 255 AU Clreale LOOP unnn 256 APITO n S 264 AJUE a T 266 Leveling Remote Control sssssessesesressrnsrrresrrnsrrnerensennn 268 Stakeout M nu eS aa 269 aS 5 lt S11 ca 0 Soa nee S 2 0 Stake List of Points SCFECN icccccesssssserteseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessseens 275 Stake tO Dm Renee tment art ane ye ner a Par fie eee ee 277 OSEE SAKI ING n 281 SOPE SOKIN yena a a 288 PONE SIONS taK ING ken NN 295 Stake Line and Offset scien tis Sao cileneeuienind 299 Stake Curve and Offset oc cccccccceeeseseccccreeeeeseeeeeuneeeeeeessseeens 302 Stake Spiral and OSE iiiavsic
363. s R 183 get and set 264 R 183 pick base point R 179 SC EE 263 basemap edinir R 443 manage ceeceeee ee es R 442 Basic GPS data collection R 249 bearing format 10 eep 0 ee R 54 Bluetooth 320 R 38 R 165 Basic GPS R 108 in Survey Pro 328 on a Recon 008 321 on a Recon X 06 325 break lines 114 R 80 C calculator R 87 carrier phase differential 212 cell modem R 170 central meridian 144 Central Meridian A 1 check backsight R 115 R 117 check control pointsR 193 R 251 check points 280 308 choose from map 18 choose polyline 112 R 80 I 1 Survey Pro Reference Manual chord offset 169 R 380 close level loop R 264 code differential 212 codes description 38 39 combined scale factor 227 compass rule 068 181 compass rule adjustment183 R 430 compute area R 359 compute radius point R 375 conformal map projections224 conformality 606668 223 connect to receiver R 177 control fileSee import control control files 36 R 26 control points125 272 279 R 192 Basic GPS R 251 check R 193 R 251 CONECE cxcaseecacinineiess 307 OCCUPY 06 R 194
364. s a shot and displays the deltas between deltaE 0 045 ft the observed point and the selected point High delta delta El 0 000 ft values can indicate either the rod and or total station is over the wrong point The deltas can also be viewed in OCC 1 HI 5 600 BS 3 45 00 00 the Results screen and Map screen i is a shortcut to the Surveying Settings screen Page R 44 Input E Results x map R 151 Survey Pro Reference Manual Solar Observation The Solar Observation screen is used to compute the azimuth to an arbitrary backsight based on the position of a celestial body typically the sun WARNING Direct viewing of the sun without a proper filter will cause serious eye damage Pointing a total station directly toward the sun without a solar filter can also damage the EDM components Find Azimuth Using Ephemeris Data select this method if you plan to enter data from an ephemeris Find Azimuth Using Date and Time select this method if you do not plan to use an ephemeris Note The fields within the Solar Observations screen will vary depending on the method selected above All of the fields from each method are described below Lat Long is the latitude and longitude of the total station These values can be scaled from a map such as a U S G S 7 5 minute quadrangle sheet or collected with a handheld GPS unit Aim selects the portion of the celestial body that where you intend to aim You can sele
365. s around a specified point This is useful to correct a survey where an incorrect backsight was used during data collection Tap Points allows you to select points by tapping them from a map view 4 points selected To From allows you to select points by typing in a point range Rotation Pt Rotation Point The selected points will be rotated around the point specified here The coordinates for the rotation point will not change CO DE anel ba Gue Simple Angle When selected this allows you to enter a o i the deflection angle to rotate the selected points P hew Azimuth s8 2354 DT Old and New Azimuths When selected this allows you to enter an old and new azimuth which is used to compute the angle to rotate the selected points O Simple Angle Note The choice made from the two options above determines which fields will be available below Rotate is the angle to rotate the selected points around the Rotation point R 426 E Traverse Adjust Choose our Traverse Adjust Menu gt Old Azimuth gt Old Bearing is a known direction between any two points in the current job before they are rotated gt New Azimuth gt New Bearing is the direction between the same two points specified above after the rotation Solve will perform the rotation on the selected points and change the coordinates accordingly Traverse Adjust The Traverse Adjust wizar
366. s the distance perpendicular to the tangent to the curve at the particular station o Tan is the length of the tangent the distance from the PC to the PI o Tan TD is the distance on the tangent from the PI to the PC or the PI to the PT where the offset occurs R 379 Survey Pro Reference Manual e Chord Offset provides perpendicular offset information from the chord the line from the PC to the PT for each station on the curve PC deflection information is also provided The results are given in the following format Current Station o Station is the current station on the curve o Chord dist is the distance on the long chord from the PC toward the PT where the perpendicular offset occurs o Chord offset is the distance to the current station on the curve perpendicular to the long chord o PC Deflection is the angle to turn to the Chord Offset current station as if occupying the PC and backsighting the PI o Chord Length is the distance from the PC to the current station on the curve The first known part of the curve is defined by one of the following Radius is the distance from the radius point to the curve Delta is the deflection angle Degree Arc is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft arc length e Degree Chord is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft chord length The second known part of the curve is defined by one of the follow
367. s the final Stake Road screen where the shots to the stake point are performed Stake Road Screen Four Height of Rod is the length of the rod Stake Road Design Elev displays the current design elevation From GUN to ROD Height of which can be modified with the button FORWARD 0 089 Rod Go RIGHT 0 000 FORWARD BACK indicates if the rod must move EDM forward toward the total station or backward away Design Eley 100 000 ee from the total station 100 000 FILL Go RIGHT Go LEFT indicates if the rod must move to Snor Dat oe a Angle Right the right or left from the total station s point of view 45 00 00 Shot ith k EDM This button can be toggled to shoot in various a ae ALE Ne EDM modes The options available depend on the total Slope Dist Ue Ene station being used Consult the total station s 70 800 Store Tape documentation for more information on the EDM modes Store that it supports Settings Close F CUT FILL displays the required amount of cut or fill to bring the stake point to the design point s elevation Rod Elev displays the elevation at the rod s location computed from the last shot R 412 Roads Menu Shot data displays the measurements from the last shot Change is used to modify the current design elevation which will also modify the associated CUT FILL value for the current station being staked Shot takes a shot to the prism and computes com
368. s the socket number of the base Use Advanced Settings When checked allows you to specify alternate Hayes AT commands to connect and disconnect When unchecked the default connect command of ate0 amp d0dt and disconnect command of athO will be used Connection Command is the alternate Hayes AT command used to connect Disconnect Command is the alternate Hayes AT command used to disconnect The General Settings card is used to configure settings specific to each brand and model Models which have special settings available are described below Settings For Trimble Receivers Store post process file to is where you choose the location of the post processing file Choices are e Receiver memory e Data Collector Note This setting is only available when your receiver model is 5700 5800 R7 R8 R 99 Survey Pro Reference Manual Settings for Thales Ashtech Receivers reference Z family documentation available at ftp ttp thalesnavigation com Reference 20Manuals Z Xtreme Z family pdf Canopy is where you set a parameter to describe the multi path environment This command is relevant for ROVER mode or RVP Choices are e Open Sky default e Under Canopy forest urban canyon Confidence Level is where you set the confidence level for ambiguity fixing The values here are the statistical confidence level in percent The higher the confidence level the more certainty that the ambiguities are fixed correctly b
369. screen except most the buttons are initially deactivated Template Cut Slope Edit opens the Edit Template screen where the 4 2 000 4 0 selected template can be edited 4 2 000 4 01 Copy opens the Save As dialog box where a copy of the selected template can be saved with a different name Delete deletes the selected template Import opens the Open dialog box where a template can be copied from one folder to the current folder and imported into the job 2 UUL a p 1 R 394 Roads Menu Edit Template Roads Edit Templates Edit or The Edit Template screen is identical to the New Template screen and is used to create a new template or edit an existing one All of the segments of the current template are listed in the screen The list shows the name of each segment the Cut Slope horizontal and vertical offsets lengths and the slope Enl New Template Fill Slope Segments _ Edit Remove Phe The length of the first segment must be greater mea Roadbed 20 000 0 400 2 000 lt End Cut Slope is the slope that will be used when locating the catch point in a situation where the existing terrain 4 pe is above the level of the hinge point Y a Insert opens the Edit Segment screen where a new segment will be added prior to above the segment selected in the Edit Template screen Fill Slope is the slope th
370. screen will list a seid E all of the coordinate system database files csd you have in the Survey Pro directory Highlight the csd file you wish to use and tap amp to load the selected coordinate system database file HF Select Database eo an at 7 22 Current Database Complete csd Africa csd alee a Solve Localization North America csd US HPGN csd Survey Projection Solve Localization The Solve Localization wizard is used to solve a horizontal and vertical adjustment for a coordinate system The user interface and procedure to solve a localization in Ground TDS Localization mode and Mapping Plane mode are very similar This section explains how to solve a horizontal and vertical adjustment in either projection mode 4J1826 Yes Yes Select H GR1054 Yes Yes GRi951 Yes ves seet Solve Localization Control Points MRG Yes Yes Select All The Solve Localization Control Points screen is used to ae of Pts Clear All pick control points for a least squares localization Hi 4 wog solution or to key in parameters for a manual Fix H Scale to 1 0 1 1 luti C Solve Rotation Only ocalization solution ight i i j ae eee A list of all occupied control points matching the current Solve H s ly Solve base set up group is displayed If a point is to be used in solve W the horizontal and or vertical transformation solution a Yes will appear in the H and or V column for tha
371. seamlessly switch between different units in mid job Problems can arise if these units are inadvertently set to the incorrect units when entering new data For example assume a new job was created by hand entering a list of coordinates where the job was set to International Feet and the coordinates being entered were in US Survey Feet Now assume you created another new job and correctly set it to US Survey Feet If you then imported the hand entered points from the other job they would be converted to different units when no conversion should have taken place Depending on the magnitude of R 41 Survey Pro Reference Manual the imported coordinates the error after the conversion could be significant Units for Angles defines the units used for angles as Degrees or Grads gons Display Directions as will display directions as a Bearing or Azimuth Azimuth type defines if you are using a North Azimuth or a South Azimuth Format Settings The Format Settings card defines the number of places beyond the decimal point that are displayed for various values in all screens and how stations are defined All internal calculations are performed using full precision Northings Eastings will allow you to display from i l i ME zero to six places passed the decimal point for northing and easting values Elevations l Distances 124 125 Elevations allows you to display from zero to six places Angles 123 41 23 hd
372. sed if you choose to stake a point at a specified offset away from the catch point Station displays the current station being slope staked Offset from CP is the offset from the catch point 0 00 000 Right Line specified in the previous screen Offset from CP 2 000 From Gun to Design Point Angle Right 90 00 00 Horz Dist 31 886 Wert Dist 2 615 FE to Rod 85 18 44 From Gun to Design Point displays the angle and distance information from the total station to the design point Circle Zero is used to modify the circle on the total station so that the angle right reading will be zero when it is facing the current target which can sometimes be easier than turning to an obscure angle value When A e ee cee this button is tapped the following actions will occur 1 A new backsight circle value is computed sent to Close Settings the instrument and stored in the raw data 2 The Angle Right value is changed to zero to reflect the change The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the current target location 3 To prevent errors if this button is used the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog A circle R 293 Survey Pro Reference Manual zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked Note The button is not available when using a robotic total station lt Back returns to the previous screen
373. sing the button which when used during data The following two wildcards can be appended to a description where each one performs a special function Asterisk When a description entry ends with an asterisk any description entered during data collection that begins with the same characters before the asterisk will be joined to the previous linework entry For example if CURB were used as in the screen shown here and a description for a point was called CURB5 or CURBSIDE the line segment associated with CURB would be appended to the previous line segment Pound sign When a description entry ends with a pound sign any description entered during data collection that begins with the same characters before the pound sign will generate the associated line segment type but if the next description is at all different from the previous use a new independent line segment will be drawn For example if LOT were used as in the screen shown above all entries of R 73 Survey Pro Reference Manual LOT10 would be connected If LOT15 were also used as a description during data collection any future use of LOT15 would connect to the previous LOT15 entry Note Linework descriptions are case sensitive Cmd lists the current type of line segment linework that will be created after shooting the required points and storing them with the associated Description The following linework command options are selected by repeatedly
374. sired slope calculated from run over rise between the hinge point and catch point when the area requires a cut Segment Fill HP When the terrain requires a fill you have the option to compute the hinge point from either side of the second segment The option to use segment 1 can simplify the situation where a ditch meets an area requiring a fill which would otherwise result in an area with two similar or identical negative slopes lt Back returns to the previous screen Stake CP gt opens the next screen R 289 Survey Pro Reference Manual Slope Staking Screen Four The fourth screen is used to perform the actual slope staking shots Left Right displays if a Cut or Fill slope is being computed and if it is on the Left or Right side of the road respectively Rod Elev is the current elevation at the rod location Des Slope is the design cut or fill slope Obs Slope is the computed observed cut or fill slope based on the last shot and the corresponding hinge point Cut Fill is the cut or fill required for the current rod location to be positioned on the design slope Toward CL Away CL is the computed horizontal distance that the rod must move either toward the centerline or away from it respectively before it is positioned at the catch point ng Slope Staking 6 dr d 9 21 Right FILL Slope Rod Elev 98 799 Above DS Des Slope 4 000 0 627 Obs Slope 7 130 Toward HO to HP a
375. sive mode active tracking turned off it is important to leave the Use Target ID box unchecked and if the active tracking is enabled to leave Use Target ID box checked since a different vertical correction is applied for each case Use Target ID When checked the Target ID can be selected for the Smart Target This option is only available when using a total station and prism that supports target IDs e Use For Searching When selected the total station will check the Target ID only when searching for the prism and then track the prism Once the prism is being tracked the total station can potentially start tracking a different reflector that comes into view e Use Always When selected this forces the total station to continuously check the Target ID even while tracking the prism eliminating the possibility of the total station tracking a different reflector that comes into view Using Active Prism Check this option when using an active prism This option is only available when using a total station that supports active prisms Note In order to perform automatic repetitions when using active prisms active prisms must be set up over both the backsight and foresight R 447 Appendix A Transverse Mercator Zones Central Meridians for State Plane Coordinates E East W West C Central Zone Central State Zone Central Meridian Meridian Hawaii w om wn be Illinois 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 E C W
376. solved It displays live coordinates for the current Battery 75 Link GOOD a foresight MEASURING Foresight N 4 974 611 E 9 003 737 z 102 144 Prism Conet O Orn Results Video Map Aim Foresight Sky P O t available only when using GeoLock Sky Plot The Sky Plot screen displays the relative location of the visible satellites in the sky as well as if they are being used to calculate a position Satellites with a usable signal are shown with red flashing indicators The Elevation Mask is the minimum angle above the horizon where locked satellites are used for a solution This area is indicated on the screen by the inner circle te SU ecm G oo A arse ale Eley Mask 10 Inside Circle Sky View R 164 Survey Menu GeoLock Settings Settings or The GeoLock Settings screen is used to enable disable GeoLock and configure the receiver communication settings Pil GeoLock Settings lt P 4 12 59 Enable GeoLock When checked enables the GeoLock feature Enable GeoLock Model Select Holux from the dropdown list if using a og Holux or other CompactFlash GPS receiver The Serial Port koma m remaining communication settings will be hidden Select Generic NMEA if communicating with any other brand GPS receiver that sends NMEA data Serial Port is the serial port on the data collector used Use 3D GeoLock may be unreliable to communicate with the GPS receiver Select Bluetooth with a
377. specified interval by using the and Station buttons and then re computed with the button Straight Grade Begin Station Begin Elev Grade Solve for Elevation O Station 1 00 0 100 0 ft End station Interval End Elevation is the elevation at the point where you want to compute the station Layout performs the computation and displays the results Results Station is the current station Elevation is the elevation for the current station R 388 Curve Menu Spiral The Spiral screen will compute the details of a spiral curve given the spiral length and radius Spiral length is the length of the spiral curve ee Erat Ee Radius is the circular curve radius E moo A Solve computes the details of the spiral curve Layout accesses the Spiral Layout screen Page R 390 where the location of stations on the spiral curve can be computed Traverse accesses the Traverse on Spiral screen Page R 391 input F Resuts fas Map Results X of Throw is the distance along the tangent where a perpendicular line intersects with the radius point Y of Throw is the minimum distance between the tangent and the extended circular curve X is the distance from the TS to the SC along the tangent Y is distance from the SC to the tangent Delta is the angle between the tangent and the line between the PI and SC R 389 Survey Pro Reference Manual
378. stance from the antenna s center to the measuring mark on its outer Ej edge Offset is where you enter the vertical distance measured from the Measure To location to the phase center Serial is the serial number of the antenna This information is only written as a note in the raw data Notch Is the notch number on the antenna that you are measuring to Note If your antenna type is Manual the Radius and Notch fields will not be available Set Updates the base antenna settings with the values selected on this screen R 181 Survey Pro Reference Manual Vertical Offset Slant Offset m Radius T Phase Center ty R E tein Point Slant Height Vertical Height Marker Note When this screen is used by the RTK rover for updates of antenna height during a survey the Set button will send the new antenna parameters to the receiver as well as updating Survey Pro s settings R 182 Survey Menu GPS Module Base Setup Two SET This final Base Setup screen is used to SET the receiver as an RTK base using the job file point as the reference position and to configure the base location in Survey Pro This screen is shown when the base point has measured or computed geodetic coordinates in the job i i Base Setup Fag HE Base Point Latitude 44 3707 69000 N Longitude 123 16 06 57000 W Ellipse Height 55 000 m eba ser Oo A Base Point displays the base point name chose
379. t select the D if the segment travels downward or select U if the segment travels upward from the point of view of the centerline Note A segment with a negative slope will result in water that flows from the centerline toward the road edge R 396 Roads Menu Edit Alignments Edit Alignments or Edit Alignments The Edit Alignments screen is used to create an alignment that defines the centerline of a road containing both horizontal and vertical elements Editing alignments is fully described starting on Page R 65 Add Edit Roads The Add Edit Roads screen is used to define your road This is where the templates are added to the alignment and any widenings and super elevations are defined All existing roads are listed in this screen If an existing road is selected the overhead and profile view of that road are also displayed Add Edit Roads New Opens the New Road screen where a new road impor C27 be defined 2 Example Edit Opens the Edit Road screen where the selected road can be edited The Edit Road screen is identical to the New Road screen Delete Opens the following prompts to delete the selected road s e Are you sure you want to delete the selected Roads Answering Yes to this prompt will disassociate the selected road s from the current job so they are no longer displayed in the Add Edit Roads screen In this case the road can still be re associated with the mpo
380. t line R 355 Survey Pro Reference Manual Offset Points The Offset Points screen is used to store points at a specified perpendicular offset to an existing polyline alignment or point range Points can be stored that correspond with the nodes of an alignment points of a polyline and or at a specified station interval Tap Line allows you to tap an existing polyline or FY offset Points alignment that the offset points will be computed from aa aes et ie To From allows you to enter a range of points that OL R define the line where the offset will be computed from lt C Store Pts Offset defines the offset distance and which side the L_ Store Nodes offset occurs The right or left side is referenced from the 0 Sta Intervj100 0 f first point that defines the selected line Description M Store Pts When checked will store the offset points el that are computed based on the selected line and which To From From of the two following checkboxes are checked Note Leaving the Store Pts field unchecked and solving ade fe the screen will result in a map screen that displays the points that would be stored but without actually storing anything to the job This is useful for testing the routine before storing information M Store Nodes When checked computes offset points that correspond to each node in the selected alignment points where the horizontal or vertical alignment change or that c
381. t point If it is not to be used in the solution that field will be blank Each point can be selected for horizontal or vertical control by tapping the corresponding column or pressing the H or V key on the keypad You can double tap on a point to display information about that point R 205 Survey Pro Reference Manual Select H selects the currently highlighted point as horizontal control in the least squares solution Select V selects the currently highlighted point as vertical control in the least squares solution Select All selects all of the control points to be used in the least squares solution Clear All un selects all of the control points Fix scale to 1 0 check the Solve Rotation Only control to constrain the least squares solution to a scale of 1 0 Do this when you want to orient your GPS to an existing grid but you want to hold the scale of the GPS measurements Note You must choose exactly two horizontal control points for a fixed scale localization Solve H check Solve H to use the selected control points in a least squares solution or to use the horizontal values from the manual entry card Solve V check Solve V to use the selected control points in a least squares solution or to use the horizontal values from the manual entry card Manual Entry gt opens the screens used to manually enter a set of localization parameters for a horizontal and or vertical solution Calculat
382. t station is the station that will be solved for with the Layout button Elevation is the known elevation for the location s on the parabolic curve where you want to compute the station s Solve computes the details of the vertical curve Sta decreases the Current station by the Interval Sta increases the Current station by the Interval Layout computes either the elevation at the specified Current station or the station s at the specified Elevation R 386 Curve Menu Results PVC sta is the station at the PVC PVI sta is the station at the PVI PVT sta is the station at the PVT elev is the elevation for the respective point Hi Lo sta is the station where the vertical curve has a tangent equal to zero the crest of the curve R 387 Survey Pro Reference Manual Straight Grade The Straight Grade screen will solve for the elevation at a specified station or a station at a specified elevation on a straight grade Begin Station is the station where the straight grade begins Begin Elev is the elevation at the Begin station Rise Grade is the percent slope 100 Run Solve for is where you select to solve for an Elevation or a Station The choice made here determines which of the following selections are available End station is the station where you want to compute the elevation M Interval When checked the End station can be incremented by the
383. t value Instrument Stakeout Instrument Stakeout is a special stakeout option only available when using a Nikon DTM or NPL series total station while the Send Stakeout Data to Instrument option is checked in the Instrument Settings screen When using Instrument Stakeout a new stakeout screen shown below will appear after you tap from the Stake Points Screen Two described above The stakeout data is then sent to the Pa Instrument Stakeout 12 71 Stakeout data has been sent to the instrument and it is now ready for staking OCC 1 HE 3 20 BS o 00 00 Stake Point 2 Northing 4 962 462 ift Easting 4 963 214 ift Elevation 104 659 ift Azimuth 225 354 46 Horiz Dist 52 557 wert Dist 4 659 Update HR on Instrument Take Final Shot gt total station where the controls on the total station are used to stake the point Once you are satisfied with the stake location tap Take Final Shot gt to shoot the final stakeout location and proceed to the Stake Points Screen Three as described above If you tap from Screen Three to take another shot you will return to the Instrument Stakeout screen where you can once again use the controls on the total station to stake the point HR is the rod height Update HR on Instrument If a new rod height is entered in the HR field or if a new Smart Target is selected this button sends the new HR information to the total station Take Final Shot gt
384. taking merges with another road and once you stake past the point where the roads merge you want to use the stationing assigned to the other road Once you pass the location where the stationing changes all ahead stations are displayed with a 2 after it to differentiate between a back and ahead station such as 11 00 2 Likewise when keying in an ahead station you must append it with a 2 to indicate it is an ahead station Road Name Displays the name of the current alignment rea Station Equati Pag a 10 45 E l Road Name Sampe Back Defines the stationing on the back alignment Back where the stationing change occurs Ahead Defines what the new stationing is for the same Forward Direction location defined in the Back field Increase I ncrease indicates the stationing should increase as you move forward past the location where the stationing Decrease changes Decrease indicates the stationing should decrease as you move forward past the location where the stationing changes Note When Stake Corners Not J ust Even Intervals is checked in the Stakeout settings the location where the stationing change occurs is considered a corner and will be included as you advance R 421 Adjust Menu The Adjust Menu contains routines to perform a variety of adjustments A Scale B Translate C Rotate D Traverse Adjust R 423 Survey Pro Reference Manual Scale The Scale screen will scal
385. tapping the appropriate button gt Line creates a straight line between the next two points stored with a description associated with Line gt P Crv creates a curve through the next 3 points stored with a description associated with P Crv e gt R Crv creates a curve between the next two PT auto Linework points that are stored with a description Please enter radius and curve direction associated with R Crv After the second R Crv point is shot the prompt shown will open and is used to define the details of the curve Turn Left Right Arci Small E R 74 Job Menu a auto Linework ok e gt T Crv creates a curve with a specified Please enter an incoming azimuth for this incoming tangent from the next two points that CIV are stored with a description associated with T Crv When the second point is stored the prompt Paama ed I shown here appears where the incoming azimuth or bearing is specified gt Rect will compute and store the fourth and final point that forms a rectangle or parallelogram after three points are stored with a description associated with Rect Note At any time the line type for any linework command can be changed while collecting linework for a particular feature For example a feature called FENCE might ae use the Line linework command but might also contain a curved section To add a curve to the fence you would open the J off screen and togg
386. te the control ve i points listed above and then take Finish See the section on Finish below the following action Finish The finish behavior will be one of three cases G i 1 Create the control points solve the localization with all job file control points launch the projection readjust wizard and apply the updated localization to the map projection zone 2 Create the control points and open the solve localization wizard 3 Create the GPS control points and exit the wizard R 229 Survey Pro Reference Manual Receiver Information The Receiver Information screen is used to display the serial number and firmware version of the current receiver Also different receivers will return additional information in this window including channel or option version installed Receiver Type displays the manufacturer of the receiver currently connected to the data collector Serial Number displays the serial number of the current receiver Firmware Version displays the firmware version of the current receiver Note the remaining fields if any are dependent on the particular make and model of the current receiver Record in Raw Data records a note to the raw data file containing the information displayed on the screen R 230 2 Receiver Info er x Receiver Type Demo Mode Serial Number TOSOO1 Fimware Ver Demo Record in Raw Data Survey Menu GPS Module Adjust w
387. ted from all horizontal angles that are read during data collection and the resulting points are adjusted accordingly This is usually only done when surveying in true azimuths This value can be change from the Backsight Circle or Backsight Solved screens R 114 Survey Menu Current BS Direction displays the azimuth of the current backsight Remote When connected to a robotic total station this opens the Remote Control screen Page R 157 to remotely aim the total station This is particularly useful when using a fixed backsight with a Smart Target because the Remote Control screen will then automatically reflect the prism configuration at the backsight Check accesses the Check Backsight dialog box Page R 117 which is used to help confirm that the total station is facing the correct backsight This routine can also be performed from the Backsight Solved screen Circle accesses the Backsight Circle dialog box Page R 119 where the backsight circle can be changed or the circle reading on the total station can be set remotely without re solving the backsight This function will automatically be available after solving the first Backsight Setup screen Solve solves the screen based on the information entered and opens the Backsight Solved screen described next Backsight Solved Solve The Backsight Solved screen is automatically opened after solving the Backsight Setup screen It is used
388. tem is updated in the job the raw data is written and the projection adjustment is applied to job points R 212 Survey Menu GPS Module Projection Mapping Plane Mode The Projection screen is described below for when the horizontal projection mode is set to Mapping Plane Use this setting when you want your coordinate system to be a conformal map projection chosen from the coordinate system database file See Page R 202 for when the projection mode is set to TDS Localization Status Line The text at the top of the screen describes Falproject p d octi of pees Ls ea Sal the status of the horizontal projection solution Mapping Plane alae Show Details opens the Projection Details screen vegas Ground Page R 203 where the complete details of the Transverse Mercator Calibration localization solution reference map projection and Geoid EGM96 Global Calibration model are displayed Select Zone Select Zone opens the Select Coordinate System screen Page R 204 where you can choose a zone or site from the data base key in a custom zone and delete Solve Localization zones or sites from the database Switch to using Ground TOS Localization mode Mapping Plane Ground opens the Ground Coordinates screen Page R 221 where the grid to ground conversion G mj parameters can be calculated and applied Solve Localization opens the Solve Localization wizard Page
389. tered Indicates that the corresponding module GPS has been added lavang Trimble System Extension Current Code Enter Registration Code R 32 A my Register Serial Number 9AF S005 742 Registration Code 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Tabja jwje r t yjujijoje i 1 cAPja s a fjaj njilkjij Shift z x c v bjn m F Fe ca ee File Menu Enter Registration Code Opens the Register screen shown here where the registration number for a particular module can be entered About Survey Pro Survey Pro Visit TOS on the web at wi Cosvvay cam SuUMeyPro exe TdsInstruments all TdsRtk dll Tdskermit dll TdsOxt dll TdsImading all Hardware Information Copyright C 2007 Tripod Data Systems The About screen displays the version of the Survey Pro CE software and the versions of several of the Survey Pro software files which can be updated from the TDS Website Hardware Information is a shortcut to the Windows System Information screen Exit This will close the Survey Pro software and return you to the operating system installed on your data collector R 33 Job Menu Settings Edit Points Edit Polylines Edit Alignments Auto Linework View Raw Data File View DTM Manage Layers Job Information Um OA OOD pp Calculator R 35 Survey Pro Reference Manual Settings See Page R 90 if running in RTK GPS mode The Settings screen actually consists of severa
390. tes if the Inverse Point is located to the right left or on the specified line as you occupy the beginning of the polyline and face the end Segment Type shows if the segment is a line arc or spiral Beg Pt if applicable this is the first point selected that defines a line End Pt if applicable this is the second point selected that defines a line R 347 Survey Pro Reference Manual Inverse Point to Multiple Points Multiple Points The Inverse Point to Multiple Points screen will calculate the distance and direction from an existing point to one or more other points Inverse point is the reference point used to compute EG Inverse Point to Multiple Points the distance and direction to the other points CO Inverse Point Eloo Tap Points provides a map view where you can tap Select Multiple Points to Inverse to multiple points 3 points selected To From provides selection of points by point name Tap Points H Solve will compute the distance and direction from the W Inverse point to all selected points sane Results Azimuth is the azimuth from the Inverse Point to the selected point Horz Dist is the horizontal distance from the Inverse Point to the selected point Vert Dist is the vertical distance from the Inverse Point to the selected point Slope Dist is the slope distance from the Inverse Point to the selected point North is the change in the Y coordinate from the
391. tetera ese ane 356 Stalon OUISEU iis eti tis rsa ee ido ls 357 Corner ANOINO ccssccccsssesssscecssseesssseessseeeeseneessenensenensseneneseees 358 COMPUTG A Cal conna a eae 359 TRANG eG SONG OS araa a 360 MAD CHECK sais sicanstasscataxassinuntevatetanaanandiarciaaatarsatamenianstaraietanal 361 Predetermined PA Ca eetcdeosiecectartetctnenietectet ante duatievendaubetetuen totes 364 AD VDO SID ZA aer AOT 366 SD ZATO ADV Denna 367 PMG OPV EF SIO IVa tesasacersectatocuace eesnctova teense tee saa cttentaattoumtanide 368 C rve t 9 ee ee ee ae 369 CUI S SONU Osassa sav disledtect baa autiwealoveducaties 370 KNOWN PI and Tangents cccessecssseessseeessssesssseeessseesseeeess 372 TAPES PONE CUN C heres rete tite scents eae onetenetee ates 373 Compute Radius POINL ccescccssssesssseeesseessseeessseeeesseeeeees 375 Line Tangent tO Circles ccccsssecssceessseeesseesssseessseeneseeess 377 Curve Layou E sae 377 CUr GAY OUI sce demerabe Asa viad ttnweabedtessadaanemaesaieceadhe 3 8 Traveso C UVO enin E 382 Parapo CUNO beer emer te teria alle te eae ee ro teri ot a 384 FP araDOlG WAY OUI aai A 386 Sadr Grad E aan 388 E Dl E EAEE A AE E E I A PA A E E EE 389 PFW CW OU ena 390 Traverse ON Spiral ss sesssessrnserresrrnsrrnesrrnsrrnsrrnnnrnnsrrnnsrensens 391 Roads M enU sissa a aa aaa aa G 393 Addi Edit Templates neangannana 394 EGE A OMA VCIUS aa a aa a 397 Add EGiICR Gad Sorana iad 397 ROI SlaKCOUE aan 409 Ro
392. the Survey Pro Version 2 x format and earlier R 23 Survey Pro Reference Manual Export CR5 Coordinates The Export CR5 dialog box will open when exporting E Export Coordinates coordinates to a TDS CR5 coordinate file CR5 File Options CR5 File Options specifies if the resulting file should be icone Sequential or Non Sequential The HP 48 data collector Non Sequential can only use sequential coordinate files lt Back returns to the previous screen Export exports the selected coordinates to the new CR5 file Export TXT Coordinates Since the coordinates in an ASCII TXT file can be stored in a variety of formats two screens are used to a define the format of the resulting file I Please specify a delimiter and an E Export Coordinates Unit for the fle exported ta Delimiters is the character that separates each column suse Sten LES of text in the ASCII file D O Other Coordinates is used to select if the resulting eee ee coordinates should be plane coordinates geodetic Plane Geodetic DMS coordinates in degrees minutes seconds format or O Geodetic Decimal geodetic coordinates in decimal format Units i i i Coordinat ted as Units are the distance units that will be written to the e T resulting TXT file These units are automatically set to Headers in the first row the same units that are set for the current job TRTE M Headers in the first row When
393. the centerline respectively R 419 Survey Pro Reference Manual Cross Section Card Station displays the station at the rod position Template displays the name of the template that is oan Alignment Cross Section Shot Data used at the rod position Station 1 12 281 Template t1 Segment displays the name of the template s segment at the rod position Segment Roadbed Fill 3 276 Fill to CL 4 564 Fill to Edge 2 412 Cut Fill is the necessary cut or fill that will bring the rod position even with the road s surface Cut Fill to CL is the necessary cut or fill that will bring the rod position to the same elevation as the centerline at the current station Cut Fill to Edge is the necessary cut or fill that will bring the rod position to the same elevation as the outer edge of the last segment at the current station Shot Data Card Displays the angles and distance measured by the total station from the last shot Alignment Cross Section Shot Data Angle Right 10 23 45 zenith 90 O 14 Slope Dist 112 252 R 420 Roads Menu Station Equation Road Stakeout Equation Settings or Slope Staking Equation Settings or Show Station Equation Settings The Station Equation screen is used to configure the stationing for an alignment with stationing that changes at a specific location This situation might occur where the road you are s
394. the next screen Slope Staking Screen Five The fifth screen is used to store a point for the last shot taken from the previous screen which should be located at the catch point Point Name is the name assigned to the stored point FZlsiope Staking 4 9 22 Description is the description assigned to the stored EES point o Point Mame e W Results This will display the following additional cut Description fill and location information e Type of slope e g left right cut fill Stake Reference Point e Design and observed slope ratios run Off from CP e Design and actual stations o HD and Cut Fill to Hinge Point e HD and Cut Fill to Center Line e Ifapplicable HD and Cut Fill to Edge of Pavement and Edge of Curb e Name of segment and HD and Cut Fill to that segment extremity Road Slope Stake only R 292 M Slope Staking Station Stakeout Menu Store CP stores the point Offset from CP This field is used if you want to stake another location that is at the specified horizontal distance from the catch point away from the road Solve gt opens a new screen described next used to stake the point at the offset specified above lt Back returns to the previous screen Next CP gt returns to the third slope staking screen where the station to stake can be advanced and the next catch point can be located Slope Staking Offset Stake The following screen is only acces
395. the offset is computed Point Direction is the second point or known direction that defines the line from which the offset is computed Vl Store Point When checked will store the coordinates a Results for the point located on the specified line tangent to the offset Solve will compute the distance and direction of the offset from the known point perpendicular to the specified line Results Inv Station is the station on the specified line where the perpendicular offset occurs starting from the Begin Station Offset is the horizontal distance of the perpendicular offset between the Inverse point and specified line Offset is indicates if the Inverse point is located to the Right Left or on the specified line as you occupy Point 1 and face the second point or direction of the line Azimuth pt to line is the azimuth of the offset from the Inverse point toward the specified line R 345 Survey Pro Reference Manual North is the Y coordinate on the specified line tangent to the perpendicular offset East is the X coordinate on the specified line tangent to the perpendicular offset Elevation is the elevation on the specified line tangent to the perpendicular offset Inverse Point to Polyline Point to Polyline The Inverse Point to Polyline screen computes the offset distance from a known point perpendicular to a polyline Inverse Point is the known point that the offset
396. the same name and the same coordinates as a point that is already in the current job it is ignored and a message will be displayed after the remaining points are imported to indicate this If an imported point is encountered with the same name but with different coordinates as a point in the current project the Confirm Point Replace screen will open FF confirm Point Rep g 4x 10 01 Yes will replace the point in the current job with the There is an existing point in the job with point being imported the same name but different coordinates Existing Point Yes to All will replace the point in the current job with 1 the point being imported and perform the same action for Would you like to replace the existing any remaining duplicate points point with the new one Yes to All No will not import the duplicate point keeping the No to All coordinates for the existing point unchanged Starting At No to All will not import the duplicate point keeping Rename All the coordinates for the existing point unchanged and perform the same action for any remaining duplicate Compare Coordinates points Stop Importing Rename will store the new point in the current job under the name specified in the Starting At field Rename All will store the new point in the current job under the name specified in the Starting At field and perform the same action for any remaining duplicate points storing them wit
397. ting layer or create a new layer to store autonomous points Session Monitor is where you select to use the session monitoring thresholds when collecting data with the Static Rover Session screen To have Survey Pro display warnings during post processing data collection check Warn me if and specify threshold values for the number of SV HDOP and memory R 104 Job Menu Basic GPS This section describes the Settings menu item from the Job Menu for the Basic GPS Module See Page 89 for a description of the Job Menu for when running in GPS mode with the standard GPS module Only the Settings menu item in the Job Menu contains screens that are unique to the Basic GPS module References are given for all the other Settings screens that are documented elsewhere in the manual All the remaining Job Menu items are covered in the Job Menu for conventional surveying starting on Page R 35 Settings Edit Points Edit Polylines Edit Alignments Auto Linework View Raw Data File View DTM Manage Layers Job Information SO FOF FOOD Se Calculator R 105 Survey Pro Reference Manual Settings The Settings screen provides access to several individual screens that control all hardware and software settings The screens are provided in an index card format Connections The Connections card is used to configure how the data collector will communicate with the base and rover receivers Current Connection Settings Displays th
398. tings Connections Change Settings Yerify Bluetooth Choices Verify Bluetooth Choices The Verify Bluetooth Choices screen performs a scan to quickly verify that the Bluetooth adaptors listed are connected to the corresponding receivers or if a serial cable is connected Be sure all receivers are powered on with the appropriate Bluetooth dongle s connected to Rover BtRx01007 Port 2 on the receiver s and any serial cables are Summary BtRxO1007 is verified as attached before starting the scan a Rover i Yerify Bluetoot G gr 8 54 Finished Checking Receivers Base Serial Cable Summary Verified R 107 Survey Pro Reference Manual Bluetooth Setup Wizard j Bluetooth Setu G gh 7 56 Bluetooth Setu s 9 30 i Bluetooth Setu Q gF q 9 32 Finished Bluetooth Scan Choose Rover Connection BtRx01120 Serial Cable Survey Pro will now scan for int BtRx01120 O0084C038 Rover Bluetooth receivers in the area Please make sure your EPOCH 25 receivers are powered on and your Choose Base Connection EPOCH Bluetooth Adapters are fully Peas secured to COME Serial Cable The Bluetooth Setup Wizard uses a series of screens to walk you through the process of scanning for nearby Bluetooth receivers and configures their connections on the data collector Any Bluetooth devices in the area that are not valid receivers will not be displayed If a particular base rove
399. tively R 145 Survey Pro Reference Manual Record Mode When running in Record Mode all control of the total station is performed from the total station s keypad The data collector will simply log each shot that is taken from the total station This routine is typically used for topo work where the total station remains over a single occupy point during all shots Note Not all total stations support record mode Foresight is the point name that will be used when storing the next point Once a point is stored it will be incremented to the next available point Description is the description for all the shots that are stored HR is the length of the rod Rae opens the Smart Target options Page R 444 Start Recording starts recording all shots performed from the total station Stop stops record mode Backsight accesses the Backsight Setup screen Page R 114 where the current backsight can be modified E Record Mode a Foresoht ps M Press Start Recording to begin Backsight Start Recording OCC 1 HI 5 000 BS 0 00 00 Input E Results Close Settings e i is a shortcut to the Surveying Settings screen Page R 44 R 146 Survey Menu Resection The Resection screen allows you to compute an unknown occupied position by shooting two to seven known positions Store Point is the name that will be used when the new occupied point is stored
400. tly define the side shots that are adjusted Instead they are determined by the information stored in the raw data file If no side shots were stored from any of the traverse points an error message will be displayed and no adjustment is performed If any of the following settings were changed during or after the traverse was recorded then side shots cannot be adjusted Distance units Angle units Earth curvature adjustment Scale factor Next gt opens the next screen of the adjustment wizard R 428 Adjust Menu Traverse Adjust Angle Adjustment E Traverse Adjust If an angle adjustment is being performed this screen Angle Adjust will appear next Enter the observed closing angle of the traverse Closing Angle 268 1548 Closing Angle is the closing angle for the traverse which must be represented as an angle right See illustration Next gt opens the next screen of the adjustment wizard Closing Angle R 429 Survey Pro Reference Manual Traverse Adjust Compass Rule If a compass rule adjustment is being performed this En Traverse Adjust screen will appear next Compass Rule Closed Traverse select this option if you are adjusting a sed Traverse closed traverse cy Close to Known Location Close to Known Location select this option if you are ee adjusting an open traverse and closing to a known point or location Point Pe I Note if a closing location is not s
401. to Circles Tangent Line ist Radius Pt Eoo Radius e a e Store Tan Pt 5 2nd Radius lie l eas OR a w Store Tan Pt be Solve Q I 2nd Radius Pt Tangent Line determines which sides of the circles the computed line will be tangent to as you occupy the 1st Radius Point and face the 2nd Radius Point See illustration below 1st 2nd Radius Pt defines the points around which the circles are computed Radius defines the radius of the circles that are used to compute the Tangent Line M Store Tan Pt When checked will store the computed tangent points Solve computes the location of the tangent line and optionally stores the two tangent points Results tangent point a TP 1 displays the coordinates for the first D i TP 2 displays the coordinates for the second tangent point Azimuth is the azimuth of the tangent line from the first tangent point to the second Distance is the length of the tangent line Line Tangent to Circles solution illustrating the location of a Left Left Tangent Line R 377 Survey Pro Reference Manual Curve Layout The Curve Layout screen is used to assist in the layout of a horizontal curve by computing the direction and distance to points on the curve using a variety of methods ay Curve Layout Method PC Deflection Dee o Dos o f pestiion po A mena oan Ih Method The method determines how the points on the C
402. traverse shot New Occupy Point After traversing to a new point the New Occupy Point dialog box will open that informs you of the points that have been updated and computes the azimuth to the new backsight New Backsight Circle displays the horizontal angle that should be displayed on the total station once it is set up over the New Occupy Point and facing the New Backsight Point This angle is typically zero unless you are surveying in true azimuths as set in the Surveying Settings screen Page R 44 Height of Instrument is the new height that the total station is above the ground Send Circle to Instrument can be used once the R 122 M New Occupy Point The Occupy and Backsight points have changed Mew Occupy Point 4 New Backsight Point 1 Mew Backsight Circle 070000 Height of Setup on the new Occupy point and sight the new Backsight point and press Send Circle to Instrument Send Circle to Instrument Backsight Setup Survey Menu instrument has been moved to the New Occupy Point and is aiming toward the New Backsight Point The New Backsight Circle angle will then be sent to the total station so its horizontal angle will display this value Backsight Setup accesses the Backsight Setup screen Page R 114 where the current backsight can be modified Point Exists or When performing a traverse or side shot and the foresight point name already exists the Point Exists screen wil
403. ts to Shoot 380 19 rows x 20 cols Estimated Time to Finish 33 mints 37 sects os o w Store Pts Om iw van Surface Scan Re 6 ar af 2 44 Elapsed Time 5 mins 33 sects Remaining Estimated Tire 14 minfs 14 sects Point Being Shot 99 380 Row 5 19 Col 20 20 Battery 93 Shots Failed Oo Shots Rejected o Done Vo Failed Points Stored 99 Survey Menu Video Scan Survey Video Scan This feature is only available when using a supported total station with a USB or supported radio connection and only on data collectors running Windows Mobile 5 The Video Scan routine will quickly take several measurements within a predefined area scan frame The data is stored to a tsf Point Cloud file which along with the raw data file can be read by Trimble RealWorks software to digitally model the surface Full 360 3D surfaces can be modeled with RealWorks for areas that are scanned from three different occupy points around the area RealWorks is also able to integrate any photos taken of the area with the scanned data i ideo Scan gf 4 9 13 ideo Scan gf qf 9 31 Battery 31 Link GOOD mene GREE Shas x x T ou Define Scan Frame Scanning Polygon Framing H Rectangular Framing This button toggles between two sets of buttons displayed on the left side of the screen When is displayed a scan frame is defined by tapping three or more points on the screen i
404. tsiieteieniatoniaratervannciatavanianns 306 SHOW SaO eaaa a a 310 Store Offset POMS ecstatic bet ee eta 312 SUK COTM basra Sa ak ple ahs G aster eatate ts 315 KON SUI ING nerin 320 Defined Localo esa 324 Whereis Next POUNCccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeegy 326 Stakeout Menu GPS and Basic GPS s2222222222 329 StaKE POINTS rrera anA no SO ERES 330 Stake to Linean aa laa eat ou aes 332 AOPE SAKIN O intincwrineeciendininiaa nea aR 335 LINE AIG EE e E E AEAEE EEEE EE 337 Curve and OTE SEU wee iteintectestess cate hoes aseh chard Gsciden te casectieticudcesaanenee ces 338 SPI Fal NO FSP aae 338 Show Station and Offset cccccecssssesssssssesessssessssesseeseeeeeen 338 Store Offset POINTS ransis 340 Stak e DTM aren AN Se SO 340 Whereis Next POint eeeessssssssssssssssessnsnnnnerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrnnnns 342 Inverse Menu s ssn22222222220222222222 2 25 5 343 Inverse Point to POINt saasssssnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrnnrnnna 344 Inverse Pont to LINE sanana a a 345 Inverse Point to Polyline sssesssesssesressresrrnsrrnserrnsrensernen 346 Inverse Point to Multiple POINTS ccessessstessseesseees 348 Inverse Point to Location POINC cccceccccccstsctecceceeeeeeeeees 349 Cogo M ent aaa aAA aa 351 POINCITDIrecU OM ann a a 352 E O a E ceenctene deem eeeunanedemacecect 353 OSE ENS nrnna ns ae aie ete 355 SCE Ol IES raa sans soeane
405. ttings application where you can set a recognized receiver as the Bluetooth favorite This button only shows when the selected receiver is using the Bluetooth port Connect gt sets the selected instrument as the current active instrument begins communicating with the device and opens the next setup screen in the Start GPS Survey wizard Note When the current active instrument is Demo Mode only the Demo Mode receiver will show up in the list If you are in Demo Mode and you wish to begin surveying with a real receiver tap Receiver or Create Receiver to activate the desired instrument R 178 Survey Menu GPS Module Base Setup Base Setup One Pick Base Point The first Base Setup screen is used to pick the base point and set the antenna height ria Base Setup ar E C Select an existing point or enter a new name to create a point from an autonomous GPS positon Base Point e Base Point 1 Last antenna for this receiver Antenna Manual Measured To Bottom of mount Last antenna for this receiver Antenna Dema 1 Measured To Bottom of mount oz ft Measured Offset 0 236 Setup HR Measured 0 6096 m Offset 0 000 Base Setup standard Base Setup one point setup Base Point is where you enter the point name that the base antenna is set up over or displays the name of the remote base point or the name of the one job file point when using one
406. u can change both the antenna measurement and measure to setting by tapping on Set HRI to open the Receiver Antenna screen Page R 181 Traverse opens the Traverse Base screen described below Control opens the Control Points screen Page R 192 Topo SS stores a point with a single epoch of data The current position is checked against the criteria and if acceptable the point is stored Solution Float Radio 100 Sv O4 HRMS 33 09 Note The function never puts the receiver in static mode so the precision of the rapid side shot will be less than a point occupied in static mode Feature opens the Feature Collection screen Page R 188 where various automatic and manual data collection options are available R 249 Survey Pro Reference Manual Offset opens the Offset Shots screen Page R 189 where a point can be collected and stored at a specified offset Point opens the Occupy Data Points screen Page R 191 used to occupy and store a new point Traverse Base The Traverse Base routine provides an easy method to collect a point and then move your base to that point or to move your base to any existing point in the current job Traverse Base gt This prompts you to move your base to Py Sy UBT another existing job point and then starts the Start GPS Traverce Base Survey wizard described on Page R 242 Move base receiver to a known point and set it broadcasting Occupy the
407. u can choose to distribute the error equally to each setup or apply a weighted adjustment proportional to the distance between each setup You also have the option to adjust any side shots that were performed in the selected loop Weigh by of Setups This option divides the 4 Adjustment 2 Er f 10 17 computed error equally among each setup selected in the Distribution loop A Weigh by of Setups Weigh by Length of Setups This option distributes the Weigh by Length of Setups error where each setup is adjusted by an error L_ Adjust Affected Sideshot Points proportional to the length between them so setups that adjust Loop From Begin To End are farther apart will carry a larger portion of the error iAd Loop From a Specific Pt To End adjustment than the setups that are closer together dasen Loop Name Adjust Affected Sideshot Points When checked any anaes x side shots will be adjusted by the same amount as the a Begin cam rt E fs Desc Start setup that was occupied when the side shots were P a A performed Adjust Loop From Begin To End This option includes every setup of the selected level loop in the error adjustment Adjust Loop From a Specific Point To End This option will only adjust the setups starting from an alternative benchmark specified in the Begin CBM Pt field to the end of the loop Closed Loop Name is where you select the loop to adjust from the dropdown list Only closed loops are
408. um ooo Ss curve are laid out Each method is described below Station So PC D e PC Deflection provides deflection angles and distances to each station on the curve as if occupying the PC and backsighting the PI The results are given in the following format o Station is the current station on the curve o Deflection is the angle to turn to the RP current station o Long chord is the distance from the PC to the current station o Short chord is the distance from the previous station to the current station eflection PC Deflection R 378 RP RP Current Station PC PI Deflection PT Current Station Tangent Offset Curve Menu PI Deflection provides deflection angles and distances to each station on the curve as if occupying the PI and backsight the PC The results are given in the following format o Station is the current station on the curve o Deflection is the angle to turn to the current station o PI to Station is the distance from the PI to the current station Tangent Offset provides perpendicular offset information from the tangent the line from the PC to the PI for each station on the curve The results are given in the following format o Station is the current station on the curve o Tan dist TD is the distance on the tangent from the PC to the PI or the PI to the PT where the perpendicular offset occurs o Tan offset i
409. up This screen is always part of the Start GPS Survey wizard If the next screen is Base Setup the Connect to Base prompt will display a list of all your RTK base receivers The last RTK base receiver used by this data collector is selected by default If the next screen is Rover Setup Start GPS Survey Solve Localization or Data Collection the Connect to Rover prompt will display a list of all your RTK rover receivers R 177 Survey Pro Reference Manual Tree I A Hig Connect to Base en x eS Select RTK Base Select RTK Rover Topcon Legac Topcon Hiper Rover Trimble 5700 Base Trimble 5800 Rover Create New Receiver Create New Receiver Receiver Settings Receiver Settings Tap Bluetooth if you wish to set the rover receiver as the favorite device Bluetooth 9 Connect to Rover en x C Using Bluetooth to talk to the rover receiver Tap Connect when you are ready go 7 Plug the cable into the base receiver Tap Connect when you are ready E l Oo 7 Connect to Base Connect to Rover with Bluetooth opens the Receiver Setup screen Page R 91 where you can define a new base or rover receiver Receiver Settings opens the Job Settings Receiver and Post Process screens where you can change the settings for the current active receiver activate a different receiver or change the post processing settings Bluetooth opens the control panel Bluetooth se
410. up necessary for any RTK GPS Survey It is opened from the main menu or any time you try to access data collection or stake out functions The steps to complete the Start GPS Survey wizard will depend on what you have already done in the job When connecting to the receivers by serial cable Survey Pro will detect if it is a base or rover and start the workflow accordingly When connecting to either receiver by Bluetooth you are prompted for which receiver you are connected to Each screen is shown below i Start Surrey W E dr 2 4 55 F Start Survey WO gt a 7 31 Solution Autonomous Solution Autonomous Radio 0 Sv OF HRMS 11 39 Radio 100 Sw OF HRMS 10 43 Base Receiver Rover Receiver it Base is ready to set Rover receiver is ready to set Check the antenna height then tap Check the antenna height then tap Next gt Next gt Base Antenna EPOCH L1 L2 EE Rover Antenna Epoch L1 L2 EE Measure To Measure Tao Bottom of antenna mount Bottom of antenna mount Measured 5s oOo Measured 5 000 ift Serial Serial Connected to Base Connected to Rover R 242 Survey Menu Basic GPS Module Base Rover Receiver displays information about the status of the receiver Measured To specifies the location on the antenna or receiver where the antenna height should be measured to Measured The distance from the ground to the Measured To location Serial is the seri
411. upport it R 96 Job Menu GPS Module iy Radio Settings en x 2 49 Hi Radio Settings Er x 2 52 Current Settings Channel 9 Sensitivity Medium Baud 9600 Parity Rone Current Settings Channel 1 Mode 4506a 9600 Configure Channel Sensitivity Set Configure Channel 1 464 5500 Mode 4505sm 9600 Set Trimble Internal Radio Pac Crest Radio Channel is where you select the channel the radio will use to communicate with the other radio Sensitivity is where you select the sensitivity of the radio Mode is where you select the transmit format used by the base radio The rover radio must be listening for same format the base is broadcasting Baud displays the baud rate the radio is currently set to There is no way for Survey Pro to change this value so you must set the receiver to radio communications to match what you see here Parity displays the parity the radio is currently set to Set sends commands to the radio firmware to configure the settings selected on this screen Note some settings on the radio cannot be modified with Survey Pro To fully program the radio modems you need to PC software that should be supplied with the radio R 97 Survey Pro Reference Manual Cell Phone Settings Screen The Cell Phone Settings screen is used to create or modify a cell phone data modem configuration van Cell
412. urvey Pro Reference Manual Radial Sideshots The Radial Sideshots routine combines the functionality of the Multiple Sideshots routine with the accuracy of the Repetition Shots routine It is used to perform repetition shots to a backsight and any number of foresights side shots from the same occupy point The routine consists of multiple screens Each is customized according to where you are in the routine Consult the User s manual for more information on using this routine ii accesses the Surveying Settings screen Page R 44 EG R 55 BS Dir ef af 8 17 and Radial Sideshot Settings screen which is identical to occ 4 Hr 5 200 ps 2 geoo o3 the Repetition Settings screen Page R 51 with the exception of the choices for the Shooting Sequence Op Angle Only Select B gt F1 gt gt Fn F1 gt gt Fn gt B to shoot all Face 2 side Number of Sets shots in the same order as the Face 1 side shots or Raw HA 359 59 56 deg B gt F1 gt gt Fn4Fn gt gt F1 gt B to shoot the Face 2 side shots in Pa Zenith 90 1620 deg reverse order Option When shooting the first set measuring a distance and angle for each shot is required but when starting all subsequent sets Angle Only can also be selected for this field Number of Sets is where the desired number of sets is specified Done with SS gt is used when you are finished shooting side shots This is only available while taking Face 1 side shots for the first set
413. ut the longer it will take to fix them The choices are e 99 0 e 99 9 Settings for Topcon Javad Receivers reference GPS Receiver Interface Language GRIL documentation v 2 3 available at http Awww topcongps com support manuals html gril Co Op Tracking is where you set the common loops mode of the receiver For more information on common loops mode see http www topcongps com images coop tracking pdf There are two choices e Off e On Multi Path Reduction is where you set to use C A code phase multipath and C A carrier phase multipath reduction This feature is only applicable if your receiver has the _MRP option enabled There are two choices e Off e On R 100 Job Menu GPS Module Confidence Level is where you set the statistical criteria to use in the RTK engine s fixed ambiguity resolution algorithm The settings of Low Medium and High correspond to confidence levels of 95 99 5 and 99 9 respectively There are three choices e Low e Medium Note It is recommended you set this value to High This will usually mean the RTK engine may take longer to resolve a fixed position It might even mean not being able to resolve a fixed solution in some situations However the consequence of a lower confidence level is that it makes it more likely to resolve an incorrect fixed ambiguity The results of using an incorrect fix are usually much worse than the results of us
414. ve adds the curve to the current horizontal alignment R 70 Job Menu Edit Segment Spiral Card The Spiral card is used to add a spiral curve to the alignment Radius is the radius of the spiral This equals the E Edit Segment radius of the horizontal curve tangent to the spiral Radius foot Tenet Boao M Length is the length of the spiral Tum O Left Right Turn specifies if the curve turns to the Left or Right as you face the curve from the beginning Dir TS to Sc cS to ST y 8 8 jz Make this segment tangent to Dir specifies if the curve runs from TS to SC Tangent Orevious g to Spiral to Spiral to Curve or CS to ST Curve to Spiral to Spiral to Tangent H Azimuth M Make this segment tangent to previous When checked will automatically turn the spiral so the E s is tangent to the end of the previous segment gt Azimuth gt Bearing is used to specify a known azimuth or bearing of the start of the spiral X lt X of Throw gt Y of Throw SC Spiral to Curve Circular Curve R 71 Survey Pro Reference Manual Edit Segment Vertical Grade Card The Vertical Grade card is used to enter a segment with any grade Length is the horizontal length of the segment Grade is the grade slope of the segment Get Previous Grade will automatically enter a grade equal to the grade at the end of the previous segment E
415. ve times a second so the display will update in near real time and measurement latency will be minimized Start opens the Occupy Data Points screen Page R 191 where data can be collected Note If you hotkey to another screen while using the Feature Collection routine the Feature Collection screen will be suspended until you return to it Offset Shots Offset The Offset Shots screen is used to collect a point you cannot physically occupy with GPS You can occupy a nearby point with the GPS rover and then measure the offset distance and direction with tape and compass or take a shoot with a laser range finder E lotset shots KO Offset Point is the point name of the offset point to be a Offset Point kio2 e stored Desc Description is the description of the offset point to be cmm f stored gt Azimuth Bearing is the direction or bearing from Zenith Slope Dist EDM HI Target HR QO mm i the occupied point to the offset point Direction from Two Points is used to compute the Shoot Laser azimuth or bearing from the reference point to the offset point by occupying a second reference point on line with the offset point Once tapped a prompt opens for the name to store the reference point followed by the Occupy Data Points screen Page R 191 After measuring the Store R 189 Survey Pro Reference Manual coordinate at the on line point you will return to the Offset
416. xisting templates to the road The screen displays a list of left and right templates that are currently assigned to the road When a particular template is selected a cross sectional profile view of the selected template is displayed and an overhead view shows where the selected template occurs on the alignment Add When a template or lt End gt is selected from the L or R columns in the Templates card this button opens the Add Template screen which allows you to add a new z template to the same side of the road that was selected el Edit allows you to edit the selected template in the E Edit Template screen which is identical to the Add Template screen Templates Widenings Supf 4 gt Cancel gt Al Remove removes the selected template from the list R 402 Roads Menu Check checks the road for errors and displays the results in the Roads Report screen described above Add Edit Template Screen Roads Edit Roads New or Eait Templateg Add or Eait The Add Edit Template screen allows you to add a template to the road or edit an existing template Template The Template column lists all the templates that can be added to the road Selecting a template will the screen Once the first template is added this box will only list templates with the same number of segments as the first Start Sta is the location of the template on the alignment Che
417. xt gt EDM This button can be toggled to shoot in various Zenith EDM modes The options available depend on the total mri 1002S station being used Consult the total station s 45 000 Store Tape documentation for more information on the EDM modes Store that it supports CUT FILL displays the required amount of cut or fill to bring the stake point to the design point s elevation Rod Elev displays the elevation at the rod s location computed from the last shot Change is used to modify the current design elevation which will also modify the associated CUT FILL value for the current station being staked Shot takes a shot to the prism and computes come go cut fill information Shot data displays the measurements from the last shot Store stores the stake point Store Tape accesses the Stake Out Point Tape Offset dialog box Page R 305 where the staked point can be stored that includes a specified offset The default value is the appropriate distance correction to the design point Topo Ss stores a side shot using the data from the last shot taken This will not take a new shot R 272 Stakeout Menu Turn Gun available with robotic total station turns the total station toward the design point lt Back returns to the second screen Stake Next gt returns you to the previous Stake Points screen where the Design point is advanced by the Incremen
418. y Horizontal vertical Pro 3 5 procedure scale Scale is where you enter the scale factor used to transform distances on the localization mapping plane to Rotation your project coordinate system 1 123392198 Calc Rotation Base Station Local Coordinate Note Using versions of Survey Pro after 3 5 the North 7647 791842 m i localization scale should be very close to 1 0 See the Eagt Eeee user s manual for a more detailed explanation of Occupy Control localization scale values Back Sol Rotation is where you enter the rotation angle used to Qo F El transform the orientation of the localization mapping plane to your grid orientation of your project Calc Scale opens the Localization Calculator screen where the horizontal scale factor is explained Calc Rotation opens the Localization Calculator screen where the rotation can set parallel to a mapping plane selected from the database Base Station Local Coordinate are the local plane coordinates of the base If you set up on a new base point these fields are blank and you need to occupy one control point to calculate the base station local coordinates Occupy Control opens the Control Points screen Page R 187 where you select a control point to occupy When you are done the base local coordinate is calculated using your entered scale and rotation Solve gt computes the horizontal localization parameters using the entered scale
419. y Menu GPS Module Occupy Data Points Screen The Occupy Data Points screen is used to collect measurements to new points This screen is used to occupy a point occupy an offset reference point and for feature collection HI Occupy Data P 6 eo af 11 35 Temporary Local Coordinates Northing 4 987 813 Easting 4 837 7587 Elevation 234 239 Solution Quality Solution Fixed Mum Si T H Precision 0 033 YW Precision 0 049 Session Time 0 29 Count Status Measuring GPS Status Local Coordinates displays the local coordinates computed from the current geodetic measurement Solution Quality displays the quality of the current measurement the solution type the number of satellites used and the horizontal and vertical precision computed by the receiver These values are explained with the GPS Status screen Page R 168 Session Time displays the total occupation time so far for this measurement Count Status displays Measuring when you have current coordinates from the receiver and the screen is updating with the latest measurement If you are using Epoch Averaging Averaging is displayed after you tap while the number of epochs is averaged in Survey Pro Suspended is displayed if you are not receiving valid data from the receiver Store prompts you for description layer and attribute depending on your Survey settings for the new point then returns to the previous screen GPS Status ope
420. y conversion being performed To do this be sure to select the same distance units for the source file as those set for the current job R 16 File Menu Coordinates from a variety of file types can be imported into the current job The first Import screen is used to select from the file types listed below The next screen that opens depends on the selection made here e Job Files J OB import coordinates from another Job file Type e Coordinate Files CR5 import coordinates from G Built in Storage Survey Pro a TDS CR5 coordinate file Jobs Mame e GPS Files GPS import coordinates from a TDS a crore aaa 6 09 30 2004 job hA Basemap job e Text Files TXT text files can contain coordinates in several different possible formats The Import ASCII Wizard is used to define the format of the text file being imported e Text Files CSV this is a simplified text file import routine where the source file is comma delimited and has a CSV extension e LandXML Files xml imports points alignments polylines and parcels from a LandXML file Import JOB Coordinates When importing coordinates from another JOB file the Import screen is used described above A list of all the jobs available in the current directory is displayed Simply tap on the job name that you want to import and then tap the amp button The points in the selected job will be added to the points in the cur
421. you enter the horizontal shift Rotation 1 12 33 922 N E from the intermediate map projection to the local Delta W 94 973 739 m coordinate system Delta E 95 083 188 m Origin M 102 621 531 m Origin N E is where you enter the horizontal Origin E 100 312 573 m coordinate N E of the localization control points Vertical Card The Vertical card is used to manually enter the five parameters of the vertical localization solution Horizontal vertical Status Slope N is where you enter the slope of the inclined l Control points solution plane along the local north grid axis in parts per million Slope M 6 956 Slope E 27 435 Seperation 17 922 m Origin M 9 063 101 m Origin E 3 169 060 m Slope E is where you enter the slope of the inclined plane along the local east grid axis in parts per million Separation is where you enter the separation between the inclined plane and the local elevation Origin N E is where you enter the local origin north east of the inclined plane Solve gt updates the localization solution using the values entered on the Horizontal and or Vertical cards R 208 Survey Menu GPS Module Localization Calculator This sub section describes a feature available only in Ground TDS Localization mode The Localization Calculator is used to enter the crm ase up ge i iF Solve Localizati 4 q 6 03 horizontal localization parameters using the pre Surve
422. you will see a yellow arrow and the status the status line will indicate the failure to solve the localization Finish will solve the localization If any of the horizontal or vertical control toggles are changed in this screen before tapping Finish the button will change to Resolve allowing you to re compute the quality before continuing Occupy Additional Check Point opens the Occupy Control screen Page R 251 which allows you to collect another control point and add it to the localization solution R 248 Survey Menu Basic GPS Module Data Collection The Data Collection screen is used to collect GPS measurements and store new points in the job f j Data Collectio G gF 11 16 GPS Status at top of screen displays the current solution type the data modem reception quality the number of satellites used and the horizontal precision computed by the receiver When this area is tapped the ec EB s l l GPS Status screen will open Page R 168 Point is where you enter the point name for the next point to be stored to Bottom of antenna mount Occupy Desc is where you enter the description for the next Control point to be stored aise Set HR displays the current antenna measurement and measure to setting You can change the antenna Input E Results measurement by entering a new value in the edit box This new antenna height will be sent to the receiver with your next data collection point Yo
423. yout accesses the Parabolic Curve Layout screen Page R 386 where you can solve for an elevation at a specified station or solve for a station at a specified elevation Results PVC sta is the station at the PVC PVI sta is the station at the PVI PVT sta is the station at the PVT Hi Lo sta is the station where the vertical curve has a tangent equal to zero the crest of the curve elev is the elevation for the respective point R 385 Survey Pro Reference Manual Parabolic Layout The Parabolic Layout screen allows you to compute an elevation ata specified station or a station at a specified elevation Beg Grade is the percent grade at the PVC End Grade is the percent grade at the PVT Curve Length is the horizontal distance between the PVC and PVT PVC Station is the starting station at the PVC PVC Elevation is the elevation at the PVC Solve for is where you select to solve for an unknown Elevation or an unknown Station The selection made here determines which of the following choices will be available M interval When checked the Current station can be incremented by the specified interval by using the Sta Enl Parabolic Layout Beg Grade End Grade Curve Length 457 74546 tt PYC Station 0 00 0 PWC Elevation 223 322 Solve for 0 Elevation Station Interval 100 0 ft Current sta 0 00 0 and Sta 4 buttons and then re computed with the button Curren
424. ys a description of Regular Setup mode Start Survey With Regular Setup gt opens the Choose Projection Mode screen which is used to help you solve the coordinate system for this job R 174 Survey Menu GPS Module Choose Projection Mode The Start GPS Survey Choose Projection Mode screen is used to select a horizontal projection mode This screen shows when you have not yet solved a coordinate system for this job You can choose one of two projection modes depending on the requirements for your survey Use Ground TDS Localization gt sets the horizontal projection mode to Ground TDS Localization and opens the Choose Base Setup screen Use this mode when you want to do a ground level survey when there is no projection and no datum to relate your local coordinate system to any geodetic coordinate system Select a Mapping Plane Zone gt sets the horizontal projection mode to Mapping Plane and opens the Select Coordinate System screen Page R 204 Use this mode when you want to use a conformal map projection Select a Mapping plane zone gt selected from the coordinate system database file i Start Survey Wizard 47 af G Choose a projection mode If your job is A local coordinate system at ground level with no projection and no datum from the database If your job is A mapping plane coordinate system with a geodetic datum chosen from the database R 175 Survey

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Manual de instruções  Bedienungsanleitung    ECS IC43T-A2 (V1.0)  OSJI-International Crimes-FR-07-29-2012.indd  Speedheater Infrared Paint Remover, Model 1100 Removedor de  Samsung GT-P7300 Наръчник за потребителя  User Manual PZ69E - Physik Instrumente  Unitron Hearing Aid Moxi 13 User's Manual  Whynter CUF-110B Use and Care Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file